HORIZONS Grade 10 Learner’s Materials Music and Arts Appreciation for Young Filipinos Raul M. Sunico, Ph.D. Evelyn F. Cabanban Melissa Y. Moran GOVERNMENT PROPERTY NOT FOR SALE ALLOTTED TO District/ School: ____________________________________________________________ Division: ____________________________________________________________ First Year of Use:____________________________________________________________ Source of Fund (year included): ______________________________________________ Department of Education Republic of the Philippines i All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. HORIZONS Grade 10 Learner’s Materials Music and Arts Appreciation for Young Filipinos ISBN 978-971-793-023-7 Philippine Copyright 2015 by Tawid Publications All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means—electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or any information storage or retrieval system without prior written permission from the publisher. Published by Tawid Publications 102 B. Gonzales St., Xavierville II Loyola Heights, Quezon City 1108 Metro Manila, Philippines (+63-2) 453-7918 tawidcorp@yahoo.com; tawidpub@gmail.com Editorial Board Editors: Evelyn F. Cabanban Melissa Y. Moran Milagros P. Valdez, language reader Coordinator: Evelyn F. Cabanban Cover Design: Rowena E. Cabanban Cover Art and Divider Art: Joe Dureza ii All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. TABLE OF CONTENTS MUSIC Quarter I Quarter II MUSIC OF THE 20th CENTURY ............................................... 2 Impressionism ............................................................. 3 Primitivism ............................................................. 10 Neo Classicism ............................................................. 14 Avant Garde Music ............................................................. 17 Modern Nationalism ............................................................. 22 Electronic Music ............................................................. 25 Chance Music ............................................................. 28 AFRO-LATIN AND POPULAR MUSIC ..................................... 37 Music of Africa ............................................................. 38 Music of Latin American ............................................................. 53 Jazz Music ............................................................. 65 Popular Music ............................................................. 68 Philippine Popular Music ............................................................. 76 Quarter III CONTEMPORARY PHILIPPINE MUSIC ................................. 88 Traditional Composers ............................................................. 89 New Music Composers ............................................................. 110 Song Composers ............................................................. 125 iii All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Quarter IV 20th and 21st MULTIMEDIA FORMS ........................................ 141 Opera in the Philippines .................................................................... 142 Ballet in the Philippines .................................................................... 156 Musical Plays .................................................................................... 163 Musical Plays in the Philippines ....................................................... 167 ARTS Quarter I MODERN ART ............................................................................... 188 Impressionism: Origins of the Movement......................................... 190 Impressionism: A Break from Past Painting Traditions.................... 192 Impressionism: Works of Manet, Monet, and Renoir....................... 194 Post-Impressionism: Works of Cezanne and Van Gogh ................... 197 Expressionism: A Bold New Movement........................................... 203 Abstractionism .................................................................................. 208 Abstract Expressionism, Pop Art, Op Art ......................................... 214 Contemporary Art Forms: Installation Art, Performance Art ........... 223 Quarter II TECHNOLOGY-BASED ART ................................................... 231 Computer / Digital Arts ................................................... 232 Mobile Phone Art / Computer-generated Images ............................. 239 Digital Photography ................................................... 246 Video Games / Digital Painting / Imaging Videos............................ 251 iv All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Quarter III MEDIA-BASED ARTS AND DESIGN IN THE PHILIPPINES ............................................................ 257 Photography ...................................................................................... 259 Film ................................................................................................... 265 Animation.......................................................................................... 274 Print Media: Advertising, Comics, Book Design and Illustration .... 278 Innovation in Product and Industrial Design..................................... 289 Quarter IV ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE WITH THE USE OF MEDIA ................................................... 299 Philippine Theater and Performing Groups ...................................... 300 Roles in a Stage Production ............................................................. 308 Culminating Activity: Staging an Original Performance.................. 313 Music Glossary ........................................................................................................ 317 Music Pronunciation Guide ..................................................................................... 320 Arts Glossary .......................................................................................................... 321 Arts Pronunciation Guide ........................................................................................ 324 Music Bibliography ................................................................................................. 325 Arts Bibliography .................................................................................................... 326 v All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. vi All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter I Quarter I: MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of... 1. The 20th century music styles and characteristic features. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner... 1. Creates musical pieces using a particular style of the 20th century. LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Listens perceptively to selected 20th century music. Describes distinctive musical elements of given pieces in 20th century styles. Relates 20th century music to its historical and cultural background. Explains the performance practice (setting, composition, role of composers/performers, and audience) of 20th century music. Sings melodic fragments of given Impressionism period pieces. Explores other arts and media that portray 20th century elements through video films or live performances. Creates short electronic and chance music pieces using knowledge of 20th century styles. From the Department of Education curriculum for MUSIC Grade 10 (2014) 2 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century Quarter I: MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY T he start of the 20th century saw the rise of distinct musical styles that reflected a move away from the conventions of earlier classical music. These new styles were: impressionism, expressionism, neo-classicism, avant garde music, and modern nationalism. The distinct musical styles of the 20th century would not have developed if not for the musical genius of individual composers such as Claude Debussy, Maurice Ravel, Arnold Schoenberg, Bela Bartok, Igor Stravinsky, Sergei Prokofieff, and George Gershwin stand out as the moving forces behind the innovative and experimental styles mentioned above. Coming from different nations—France, Austria, Hungary, Russia, and the United States— these composers clearly reflected the growing globalization of musical styles in the 20th century. IMPRESSIONISM O ne of the earlier but concrete forms declaring the entry of 20th century music was known as impressionism. It is a French movement in the late 19th and early 20th century. The sentimental melodies and dramatic emotionalism of the preceding Romantic Period (their themes and melody are easy to recognize and enjoy) were being replaced in favor of moods and impressions. There is an extensive use of colors and effects, vague melodies, and innovative chords and progressions leading to mild dissonances. Sublime moods and melodic suggestions replaced highly expressive and program music, or music that contained visual imagery. With this trend came new combinations of extended chords, harmonies, whole tone, chromatic scales, and pentatonic scales. Impressionism was an attempt not to depict reality, but merely to suggest it. It was meant to create an emotional mood rather than a specific picture. In terms of imagery, impressionistic forms were translucent and hazy, as if trying to see through a rain-drenched window. In impressionism, the sounds of different chords overlapped lightly with each other to produce new subtle musical colors. Chords did not have a definite order and a sense of clear resolution. Other features include the lack of a tonic-dominant relationship which normally gives the feeling of finality to a piece, moods and textures, harmonic vagueness about the structure of certain chords, and use of the whole-tone scale. Most of the impressionist works centered on nature and its beauty, lightness, and brilliance. A number of outstanding impressionists created works on this subject. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 3 MUSIC  Quarter I The impressionistic movement in music had its foremost proponents in the French composers Claude Debussy and Maurice Ravel. Both had developed a particular style of composing adopted by many 20th century composers. Among the most famous luminaries in other countries were Ottorino Respighi (Italy), Manuel de Falla and Isaac Albeniz (Spain), and Ralph Vaughan Williams (England). CLAUDE DEBUSSY (1862–1918) One of the most important and influential of the 20th century composers was Claude Debussy. He was the primary exponent of the impressionist movement and the focal point for other impressionist composers. He changed the course of musical development by dissolving traditional rules and conventions into a new language of possibilities in harmony, rhythm, form, texture, and color. Debussy was born in St. Germain-en-Laye in France on August 22, 1862. His early musical talents were channeled into piano lessons. He entered the Paris Conservatory in 1873. He gained a reputation as an erratic pianist and a rebel in theory and harmony. He added other systems of musical composition because of his musical training. In 1884, he won the top prize at the Prix de Rome competition with his composition L’ Enfant Prodigue (The Prodigal Son). This enabled him to study for two years in Rome, where he got exposed to the music of Richard Wagner, specifically his opera Tristan und Isolde, although he did not share the latter’s grandiose style. Debussy’s mature creative period was represented by the following works:  Ariettes Oubliees  Prelude to the Afternoon of a Faun  String Quartet  Pelleas et Melisande (1895)—his famous operatic work that drew mixed extreme reactions for its innovative harmonies and textural treatments.  La Mer (1905)—a highly imaginative and atmospheric symphonic work for orchestra about the sea  Images, Suite Bergamasque, and Estampes—his most popular piano compositions; a set of lightly textured pieces containing his signature work Claire de Lune (Moonlight) His musical compositions total more or less 227 which include orchestral music, chamber music, piano music, operas, ballets, songs, and other vocal music. 4 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century The creative style of Debussy was characterized by his unique approach to the various musical elements. Debussy’s compositions deviated from the Romantic Period and is clearly seen by the way he avoided metric pulses and preferred free form and developed his themes. Debussy’s western influences came from composers Franz Liszt and Giuseppe Verdi. From the East, he was fascinated by the Javanese gamelan that he had heard at the 1889 Paris Exposition. The gamelan is an ensemble with bells, gongs, xylophone, and occasional vocal parts which he later used in his works to achieve a new sound. From the visual arts, Debussy was influenced by Monet, Pissarro, Manet, Degas, and Renoir; and from the literary arts, by Mallarme, Verlaine, and Rimbaud. Most of his close friends were painters and poets who significantly influenced his compositions. His role as the “Father of the Modern School of Composition” made its mark in the styles of the later 20th century composers like Igor Stravinsky, Edgar Varese, and Olivier Messiaen. Debussy spent the remaining years of his life as a critic, composer, and performer. He died in Paris on March 25, 1918 of cancer at the height of the First World War. CLAIRE DE LUNE (MOONLIGHT) Suite Bergamasque (Excerpt) Claude Debussy Copyright by everynote.com All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 5 MUSIC  Quarter I MAURICE RAVEL (1875–1937) Joseph Maurice Ravel was born in Ciboure, France to a Basque mother and a Swiss father. He entered the Paris Conservatory at the age of 14 where he studied with the eminent French composer Gabriel Faure. During his stint with the school where he stayed until his early 20’s, he had composed a number of masterpieces. The compositional style of Ravel is mainly characterized by its uniquely innovative but not atonal style of harmonic treatment. It is defined with intricate and sometimes modal melodies and extended chordal components. It demands considerable technical virtuosity from the performer which is the character, ability, or skill of a virtuoso—a person who excels in musical technique or execution. The harmonic progressions and modulations are not only musically satisfying but also pleasantly dissonant and elegantly sophisticated. His refined delicacy and color, contrasts and effects add to the difficulty in the proper execution of the musical passages. These are extensively used in his works of a programmatic nature, wherein visual imagery is either suggested or portrayed. Many of his works deal with water in its flowing or stormy moods as well as with human characterizations. Ravel’s works include the following:           6 Pavane for a Dead Princess (1899), a slow but lyrical requiem Jeux d’Eau or Water Fountains (1901) String Quartet (1903) Sonatine for Piano (c.1904) Miroirs (Mirrors), 1905, a work for piano known for its harmonic evolution and imagination, Gaspard de la Nuit (1908), a set of demonic-inspired pieces based on the poems of Aloysius Bertrand which is arguably the most difficult piece in the piano repertoire. These were followed by a number of his other significant works, including Valses Nobles et Sentimentales (1911) Le Tombeau de Couperin (c.1917), a commemoration of the musical advocacies of the early 18th century French composer Francois Couperin, Rhapsodie Espagnole Bolero All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century    Daphnis et Chloe (1912), a ballet commissioned by master choreographer Sergei Diaghilev that contained rhythmic diversity, evocation of nature, and choral ensemble La Valse (1920), a waltz with a frightening undertone that had been composed for ballet and arranged as well as for solo and duo piano. The two piano concerti composed in 1929 as well as the violin virtuosic piece Tzigane (1922) total the relatively meager compositional output of Ravel, approximating 60 pieces for piano, chamber music, song cycles, ballet, and opera. Ravel was a perfectionist and every bit a musical craftsman. He strongly adhered to the classical form, specifically its ternary structure. A strong advocate of Russian music, he also admired the music of Chopin, Liszt, Schubert, and Mendelssohn. He died in Paris in 1937. BOLERO Transcriptions for Two Pianos (Excerpt) Maurice Ravel Copyright by everynote.com All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 7 MUSIC  Quarter I Comparative Styles of Debussy and Ravel As the two major exponents of French Impressionism in music, Debussy and Ravel had crossed paths during their lifetime although Debussy was thirteen years older than Ravel. While their musical works sound quite similar in terms of their harmonic and textural characteristics, the two differed greatly in their personalities and approach to music. Whereas Debussy was more spontaneous and liberal in form, Ravel was very attentive to the classical norms of musical structure and the compositional craftsmanship. Whereas Debussy was more casual in his portrayal of visual imagery, Ravel was more formal and exacting in the development of his motive ideas. ARNOLD SCHOENBERG (1874–1951) Arnold Schoenberg was born in a working-class suburb of Vienna, Austria on September 13, 1874. He taught himself music theory, but took lessons in counterpoint. German composer Richard Wagner influenced his work as evidenced by his symphonic poem Pelleas et Melisande, Op 5 (1903), a counterpoint of Debussy’s opera of the same title. Schoenberg’s style was constantly undergoing development. From the early influences of Wagner, his tonal preference gradually turned to the dissonant and atonal, as he explored the use of chromatic harmonies. Although full of melodic and lyrical interest, his music is also extremely complex, creating heavy demands on the listener. His works were met with extreme reactions, either strong hostility from the general public or enthusiastic acclaim from his supporters. Schoenberg is credited with the establishment of the twelve-tone system. His works include the following:  Verklarte Nacht, Three Pieces for Piano, op. 11  Pierrot Lunaire,  Gurreleider  Verklarte Nacht (Transfigured Night, 1899), one of his earliest successful pieces, blends the lyricism, instrumentation, and melodic beauty of Brahms with the chromaticism and construction of Wagner. His musical compositions total more or less 213 which include concerti, orchestral music, piano music, operas, choral music, songs, and other instrumental music. Schoenberg died on July 13, 1951 in Los Angeles, California, USA where he had settled since 1934. 8 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century THREE PIANO PIECES, OP. 11, NO. 1 (Excerpt) Arnold Schoenberg Copyright by everynote.com All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 9 MUSIC  Quarter I IGOR STRAVINSKY (1882–1971) Igor Stravinsky stands alongside fellow-composer Schoenberg, painter Pablo Picasso, and literary figure James Joyce as one of the great trendsetters of the 20th century. He was born in Oranienbaum (now Lomonosov), Russia on June 17, 1882. Stravinsky’s early music reflected the influence of his teacher, the Russian composer Nikolai Rimsky-Korsakov. But in his first successful masterpiece, The Firebird Suite (1910), composed for Diaghilev’s Russian Ballet, his skillful handling of material and rhythmic inventiveness went beyond anything composed by his Russian predecessors. He added a new ingredient to his nationalistic musical style. The Rite of Spring (1913) was another outstanding work. A new level of dissonance was reached and the sense of tonality was practically abandoned. Asymmetrical rhythms successfully portrayed the character of a solemn pagan rite. When he left the country for the United States in 1939, Stravinsky slowly turned his back on Russian nationalism and cultivated his neo-classical style. Stravinsky adapted the forms of the 18th century with his contemporary style of writing. Despite its “shocking” modernity, his music is also very structured, precise, controlled, full of artifice, and theatricality. Other outstanding works include the ballet Petrouchka (1911), featuring shifting rhythms and polytonality, a signature device of the composer. The Rake’s Progress (1951), a full-length opera, alludes heavily to the Baroque and Classical styles of Bach and Mozart through the use of the harpsichord, small orchestra, solo and ensemble numbers with recitatives stringing together the different songs. Stravinsky’s musical output approximates 127 works, including concerti, orchestral music, instrumental music, operas, ballets, solo vocal, and choral music. He died in New York City on April 6, 1971. OTHER MUSICAL STYLES Primitivism P rimitivistic music is tonal through the asserting of one note as more important than the others. New sounds are synthesized from old ones by juxtaposing two simple events to create a more complex new event. Primitivism has links to Exoticism through the use of materials from other cultures, Nationalism through the use of materials indigenous to specific countries, and Ethnicism through the use of materials from European ethnic groups. Two well-known proponents of this style were Stravinsky and Bela Bartok. It eventually evolved into Neo-classicism. 10 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century RUSSIAN DANCE FROM “PETROUCHKA” (Excerpt) Igor Stravinsky All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 11 MUSIC  Quarter I BELA BARTOK (1881–1945) Bela Bartok was born in Nagyszentmiklos, Hungary (now Romania) on March 25, 1881, to musical parents. He started piano lessons with his mother and later entered Budapest Royal Academy of Music in 1899. He was inspired by the performance of Richard Strauss’s Also Sprach Zarathustra to write his first nationalistic poem, Kossuth in 1903. He was a concert pianist as he travelled exploring the music of Hungarian peasants. In 1906, with his fellow composer Kodaly, Bartok published his first collection of 20 Hungarian folk songs. For the next decade, although his music was being badly received in his country, he continued to explore Magyar folk songs. Later, he resumed his career as a concert pianist, while composing several works for his own use. As a neo-classicist, primitivist, and nationalist composer, Bartok used Hungarian folk themes and rhythms. He also utilized changing meters and strong syncopations. His compositions were successful because of their rich melodies and lively rhythms. He admired the musical styles of Liszt, Strauss, Debussy, and Stravinsky. He eventually shed their influences in favor of Hungarian folk and peasant themes. These later became a major source of the themes of his works. Bartok is most famous for his Six String Quartets (1908–1938). It represents the greatest achievement of his creative life, spanning a full 30 years for their completion. The six works combine difficult and dissonant music with mysterious sounds. The Concerto for Orchestra (1943), a five-movement work composed late in Bartok’s life, features the exceptional talents of its various soloists in an intricately constructed piece. The short and popular Allegro Barbaro (1911) for solo piano is punctuated with swirling rhythms and percussive chords, while Mikrokosmos (1926–1939), a set of six books containing progressive technical piano pieces, introduced and familiarized the piano student with contemporary harmony and rhythm. His musical compositions total more or less 695 which include concerti, orchestral music, piano music, instrumental music, dramatic music, choral music, and songs. In 1940, the political developments in Hungary led Bartok to migrate to the United States, where he died on September 26, 1945 in New York City, USA. 12 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century DUET FOR PIPES (Excerpt) Bela Bartok All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 13 MUSIC  Quarter I Neo-Classicism N eo-classicism was a moderating factor between the emotional excesses of the Romantic period and the violent impulses of the soul in expressionism. It was, in essence, a partial return to an earlier style of writing, particularly the tightly-knit form of the Classical period, while combining tonal harmonies with slight dissonances. It also adopted a modern, freer use of the seven-note diatonic scale. Examples of neo-classicism are Bela Bartok’s Song of the Bagpipe and Piano Sonata. In this latter piece, the classical three-movement format is combined with ever-shifting time signatures, complex but exciting rhythmic patterns, as well as harmonic dissonances that produce harsh chords. The neo-classicist style was also used by composers such as Francis Poulenc, Bela Bartok, Igor Stravinsky, Paul Hindemith, and Sergei Prokofieff. SERGEI PROKOFIEFF (1891–1953) Sergei Prokofieff is regarded today as a combination of neo-classicist, nationalist, and avant garde composer. His style is uniquely recognizable for its progressive technique, pulsating rhythms, melodic directness, and a resolving dissonance. Born in the Ukraine in 1891, Prokofieff set out for the St. Petersburg Conservatory equipped with his great talent as a composer and pianist. His early compositions were branded as avant garde and were not approved of by his elders, he continued to follow his stylistic path as he fled to other places for hopefully better acceptance of his creativity. His contacts with Diaghilev and Stravinsky gave him the chance to write music for the ballet and opera, notably the ballet Romeo and Juliet and the opera War and Peace. Much of Prokofieff’s opera was left unfinished, due in part to resistance by the performers themselves to the seemingly offensive musical content. He became prolific in writing symphonies, chamber music, concerti, and solo instrumental music. He also wrote Peter and the Wolf, a lighthearted orchestral work intended for children, to appease the continuing government crackdown on avant garde composers at the time. He was highly successful in his piano music, as evidenced by the wide acceptance of his piano concerti and sonatas, featuring toccata-like rhythms and biting harmonic dissonance within a classical form and structure. Other significant compositions include the Symphony no. 1 (also called Classical Symphony), his most accessible orchestral work linked to the combined styles of classicists Haydn and Mozart and neo-classicist Stravinsky. He also composed violin sonatas, some of which are also performed on the flute, two highly regarded violin concerti, and two string quartets inspired by Beethoven. 14 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century Prokofieff’s musical compositions include concerti, chamber music, film scores, operas, ballets, and official pieces for state occasions. He died in Moscow on March 15, 1953. CONCERTO IN C MAJOR, OP. 26, NO. 3 (Excerpt) Sergei Prokofieff Copyright by everynote.com All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 15 MUSIC  Quarter I FRANCIS POULENC (1899–1963) One of the relatively few composers born into wealth and a privileged social position, the neo-classicist Francis Jean Marcel Poulenc was a member of the group of young French composers known as “Les Six.” He rejected the heavy romanticism of Wagner and the so-called imprecision of Debussy and Ravel. His compositions had a coolly elegant modernity, tempered by a classical sense of proportion. Poulenc was also fond of the witty approach of Satie, as well as the early neo-classical works of Stravinsky. Poulenc was a successful composer for piano, voice, and choral music. His output included the harpsichord concerto, known as Concert Champetre (1928); the Concerto for Two Pianos (1932), which combined the classical touches of Mozart with a refreshing mixture of wit and exoticism in the style of Ravel; and a Concerto for Solo Piano (1949) written for the Boston Symphony Orchestra. Poulenc’s vocal output, meanwhile, revealed his strength as a lyrical melodist. His opera works included Les Mamelles de Tiresias (1944), which revealed his light-hearted character; Dialogues des Carmelites (1956), which highlighted his conservative writing style; and La Voix Humane (1958), which reflected his own turbulent emotional life. Poulenc’s choral works tended to be more somber and solemn, as portrayed by Litanies a la vierge noire (Litanies of the Black Madonna, 1936), with its monophony, simple harmony, and startling dissonance; and Stabat Mater (1950), which carried a Baroque solemnity with a prevailing style of unison singing and repetition. Poulenc’s musical compositions total around 185 which include solo piano works, as well as vocal solos, known as melodies, which highlighted many aspects of his temperament in his avant garde style. He died in Paris on January 30, 1963. Other members of “Les Six” Georges Auric (1899–1983) wrote music for the movies and rhythmic music with lots of energy. Louis Durey (1888–1979) used traditional ways of composing and wrote in his own, personal way, not wanting to follow form. Arthur Honegger (1882–1955) liked chamber music and the symphony. His popular piece Pacific 231 describes a train journey on the Canadian Pacific Railway. Darius Milhaud (1892–1974) was a very talented composer who wrote in several different styles. Some of his music uses bitonality and polytonality (writing in two or more keys at the same time). His love of jazz can be heard in popular pieces like Le Boeuf sur le Toit which he called a cinema-symphony. Germaine Tailleferre (1892–1983) was the only female in the group. She liked to use dance rhythms. She loved children and animals and wrote many works about them. She also wrote operas, concerti, and many works for the piano. 16 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century PERPETUAL MOTION, NO. 1 (Excerpt) Francis Poulenc Copyright by everynote.com Avant Garde Music C losely associated with electronic music, the avant garde movement dealt with the parameters or the dimensions of sound in space. The avant garde style exhibited a new attitude toward musical mobility, whereby the order of note groups could be varied so that musical continuity could be altered. Improvisation was a necessity in this style, for the musical scores were not necessarily followed as written. For example, one could expect a piece to be read by a performer from left to right or vice versa. Or the performer might turn the score over, and go on dabbling indefinitely in whatever order before returning to the starting point. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 17 MUSIC  Quarter I From the United States, there were avant garde composers such as George Gershwin and John Cage with their truly unconventional composition techniques; Leonard Bernstein with his famed stage musicals and his music lectures for young people; and Philip Glass with his minimalist compositions. Through their works, these composers truly extended the boundaries of what music was thought to be in earlier periods. The unconventional methods of sound and form, as well as the absence of traditional rules governing harmony, melody, and rhythm, make the whole concept of avant garde music still so strange to ears accustomed to traditional compositions. Composers who used this style include Olivier Messiaen, John Cage, Phillip Glass, Leonard Bernstein, George Gershwin, and Pierre Boulez. GEORGE GERSHWIN (1898–1937) George Gershwin was born in New York to Russian Jewish immigrants. His older brother Ira was his artistic collaborator who wrote the lyrics of his songs. His first song was written in 1916 and his first Broadway musical La La Lucille in 1919. From that time on, Gershwin’s name became a fixture on Broadway. He also composed Rhapsody in Blue (1924) and An American in Paris (1928), which incorporated jazz rhythms with classical forms. His opera Porgy and Bess (1934) remains to this day the onlyAmerican opera to be included in the established repertory of this genre. In spite of his commercial success, Gershwin was more fascinated with classical music. He was influenced by Ravel, Stravinsky, Berg, and Schoenberg, as well as the group of contemporary French composers known as “Les Six” that would shape the character of his major works— half jazz and half classical. Gershwin’s melodic gift was considered phenomenal, as evidenced by his numerous songs of wide appeal. He is a true “crossover artist,” in the sense that his serious compositions remain highly popular in the classical repertoire, as his stage and film songs continue to be jazz and vocal standards. Considered the “Father of American Jazz,” his “mixture of the primitive and the sophisticated” gave his music an appeal that has lasted long after his death. His musical compositions total around 369 which include orchestral music, chamber music, musical theatre, film musicals, operas, and songs. He died in Hollywood, California, U.S.A. on July 11, 1937. 18 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century SUMMERTIME (Excerpt) George Gershwin LEONARD BERNSTEIN (1918–1990) Born in Massachussetts, USA, Leonard Bernstein endeared himself to his many followers as a charismatic conductor, pianist, composer, and lecturer. His big break came when he was asked to substitute for the ailing Bruno Walter in conducting the New York Philharmonic Orchestra in a concert on November 14, 1943. The overnight success of this event started his reputation as a great interpreter of the classics as well as of the more complex works of Gustav Mahler. Bernstein’s philosophy was that the universal language of music is basically rooted in tonality. This came under fire from the radical young musicians who espoused the serialist principles of that time. Although he never relinquished his musical values as a composer, he later turned to conducting and lecturing in order to safeguard his principles as to what he believed was best in music. He achieved pre-eminence in two fields: conducting and composing for Broadway musicals, dance shows, and concert music. Bernstein is best known for his compositions for the stage. Foremost among these is the musical West Side Story (1957), an American version of Romeo and Juliet, which displays a tuneful, off-beat, and highly atonal approach to the songs. Other outputs include another Broadway hit Candide (1956) and the much-celebrated Mass (1971), which he wrote for the opening of the John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts in Washington, D.C. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 19 MUSIC  Quarter I He composed the music for the film On the Waterfront (1954). As a lecturer, Bernstein is fondly remembered for his television series “Young People’s Concerts” (1958–1973) that demonstrated the sounds of the various orchestral instruments and explained basic music principles to young audiences, as well as his “Harvardian Lectures,” a six-volume set of his papers on syntax, musical theories, and philosophical insights delivered to his students at Harvard University. His musical compositions total around 90. He died in New York City, USA on October 14, 1990. TONIGHT From “West Side Story” (Excerpt) Leonard Bernstein, with lyrics by Stephen Sondheim 20 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century PHILIP GLASS (1937– ) One of the most commercially successful minimalist composer is Philip Glass who is also an avant garde composer. He explored the territories of ballet, opera, theater, film, and even television jingles. His distinctive style involves cell-like phrases emanating from bright electronic sounds from the keyboard that progressed very slowly from one pattern to the next in a very repetitious fashion. Aided by soothing vocal effects and horn sounds, his music is often criticized as uneventful and shallow, yet startlingly effective for its hypnotic charm. Born in New York, USA of Jewish parentage, Glass became an accomplished violinist and flutist at the age of 15. In Paris, he became inspired by the music of the renowned Indian sitarist Ravi Shankar. He assisted Shankar in the soundtrack recording for Conrad Rooks’ film Chappaqua. He formed the Philip Glass Ensemble and produced works such as Music in Similar Motion (1969) and Music in Changing Parts (1970), which combined rocktype grooves with perpetual patterns played at extreme volumes. Glass collaborated with theater conceptualist Robert Wilson to produce the four-hour opera Einstein on the Beach (1976), an instant sell-out at the New York Metropolitan Opera House. It put minimalism in the mainstream of 20th century music. He completed the trilogy with the operas Satyagraha (1980) and Akhnaten (1984), based on the lives of Mahatma Gandhi, Leo Tolstoy, Martin Luther King, and an Egyptian pharaoh. Here, he combined his signature repetitive and overlapping style with theatrical grandeur on stage. His musical compositions total around 170. Today, Glass lives alternately in Nova Scotia, Canada and New York, USA. MUSIC IN FIFTHS (Excerpt) Philip Glass All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 21 MUSIC  Quarter I Modern Nationalism A looser form of 20th century music development focused on nationalist composers and musical innovators who sought to combine modern techniques with folk materials. However, this common ground stopped there, for the different breeds of nationalists formed their own styles of writing. In Eastern Europe, prominent figures included the Hungarian Bela Bartok and the Russian Sergei Prokofieff, who were neo-classicists to a certain extent. Bartok infused Classical techniques into his own brand of cross rhythms and shifting meters to demonstrate many barbaric and primitive themes that were Hungarian—particularly gypsy—in origin. Prokofieff used striking dissonances and Russian themes, and his music was generally witty, bold, and at times colored with humor. Together with Bartok, Prokofieff made extensive use of polytonality, a kind of atonality that uses two or more tonal centers simultaneously. An example of this style is Prokofieff’s Visions Fugitive. Nikolai Rimsky Korsakov In Russia, a highly gifted generation of creative individuals known as the “Russian Five” —Modest Mussorgsky, Mili Balakirev, Alexander Borodin, Cesar Cui, and Nikolai Rimsky Korsakov—infused chromatic harmony and incorporated Russian folk music and liturgical chant in their thematic materials. VISIONS FUGITIVE (Excerpt) Sergei Prokofieff Example of Modern Nationalism 22 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century 21ST CENTURY MUSIC TRENDS M usic scholars predict that the innovative and experimental developments of 20th century classical music will continue to influence the music of the 21st century. With so many technical and stylistic choices open to today’s composers, it seems there is no obstacle to their creativity and to the limits of their imagination. And yet, this same freedom that has allowed such varied musical experimentation in recent years has also caused contemporary classical music—or music utilizing the classical techniques of composition—to lose touch with its audience and to lose its clear role in today’s society. Presently, modern technology and gadgets put a great impact on all types of music. However, what still remains to be seen is when this trend will shift, and what the distinct qualities of emerging classical works will be. SUMMARY T he early half of the 20th century also gave rise to new musical styles, which were not quite as extreme as the electronic, chance, and minimalist styles that arose later. These new styles were impressionism, expressionism, neo-classicism, avant garde music, and modern nationalism. Impressionism made use of the whole-tone scale. It also applied suggested, rather than depicted, reality. It created a mood rather than a definite picture. It had a translucent and hazy texture; lacking a dominant-tonic relationship. It made use of overlapping chords, with 4th, 5th, octaves, and 9th intervals, resulting in a non-traditional harmonic order and resolution. Expressionism revealed the composer’s mind, instead of presenting an impression of the environment. It used atonality and the twelve-tone scale, lacking stable and conventional harmonies. It served as a medium for expressing strong emotions, such as anxiety, rage, and alienation. Neo-classicism was a partial return to a classical form of writing music with carefully modulated dissonances. It made use of a freer seven-note diatonic scale. The avant garde style was associated with electronic music and dealt with the parameters or dimensions of sound in space. It made use of variations of self-contained note groups to change musical continuity, and improvisation, with an absence of traditional rules on harmony, melody, and rhythm. Modern nationalism is a looser form of 20th century music development focused on nationalist composers and musical innovators who sought to combine modern techniques with folk materials. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 23 MUSIC  Quarter I A number of outstanding composers of the 20th century each made their own distinctive mark on the contemporary classical music styles that developed. Claude Debussy and Maurice Ravel were the primary exponents of impressionism, while Arnold Schoenberg was the primary exponent of expressionism, with the use of the twelve-tone scale and atonality. Bela Bartok was a neo-classical, modern nationalist, and a primitivist composer who adopted Hungarian folk themes to introduce rhythms with changing meters and heavy syncopation. Igor Stravinsky was also an expressionist and a neo-classical composer. He incorporated nationalistic elements in his music, known for his skillful handling of materials and his rhythmic inventiveness. WHAT TO KNOW 1. What group of people inspired many of Bartok’s compositions? 2. Which Russian composer created the music for the ballet The Firebird? 3. Who is considered the foremost impressionist? 4. What kind of musical style is attributed to Schoenberg and Stravinsky? 5. Who was the target audience of Prokofieff’s Peter and the Wolf? 6. Give an example of a musical work of Debussy, Ravel, Schoenberg, Stravinsky, Bartok, Prokofieff, Poulenc, Gershwin, Glass, and Bernstein. Write your answers in the table below. Composer Musical Work Debussy Ravel Schoenberg Stravinsky Bartok Prokofieff Poulenc Gershwin Glass Bernstein 24 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century 20TH CENTURY MUSICAL STYLES: ELECTRONIC and CHANCE MUSIC T he musical styles that evolved in the modern era were varied. Some of these were short-lived, being experimental and too radical in nature, while others found an active blend between the old and the new. Synthesizer New inventions and discoveries of science and technology lead to continuing developments in the field of music. Technology has produced electronic music devices such as cassette tape recorders, compact discs and their variants, the video compact disc (VCD) and the digital video disc (DVD), MP3, MP4, ipod, iphone, karaoke players, mobile phones and synthesizers. These devices are used for creating and recording music to add to or to replace acoustical sounds. NEW MUSICAL STYLES Electronic Music T he capacity of electronic machines such as synthesizers, amplifiers, tape recorders, and loudspeakers to create different sounds was given importance by 20th century composers like Edgar Varese, Karlheinz Stockhausen, and Mario Davidovsky. Music that uses the tape recorder is called musique concrete, or concrete music. The composer records different sounds that are heard in the environment such as the bustle of traffic, the sound of the wind, the barking of dogs, the strumming of a guitar, or the cry of an infant. These sounds are arranged by the composer in different ways like by playing the tape recorder in its fastest mode or in reverse. In musique concrete, the composer is able to experiment with different sounds that cannot be produced by regular musical instruments such as the piano or the violin. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 25 MUSIC  Quarter I SYNCHRONISMS NO. 5 (For Five Percussion Players and Tape / Excerpt) Mario Davidovsky Example of Electronic Music Copyright by Edward B. Marks Music Corporation EDGARD VARESE (1883–1965) Edgard (also spelled Edgar) Varèse was born on December 22, 1883. He was considered an “innovative French-born composer.” However, he spent the greater part of his life and career in the United States, where he pioneered and created new sounds that bordered between music and noise. The musical compositions of Varese are characterized by an emphasis on timbre and rhythm. He invented the term “organized sound,” which means that certain timbres and rhythms can be grouped together in order to capture a whole new definition of sound.Although his complete surviving works are scarce, he has been recognized to have influenced several major composers of the late 20th century. 26 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century POÈME ÉLECTRONIQUE Edgard Varese Copyright by Philips International B.V. Varèse’s use of new instruments and electronic resources made him the “Father of Electronic Music” and he was described as the “Stratospheric Colossus of Sound.” His musical compositions total around 50, with his advances in tape-based sound proving revolutionary during his time. He died on November 6, 1965. KARLHEINZ STOCKHAUSEN (1928– ) Karlheinz Stockhausen is a central figure in the realm of electronic music. Born in Cologne, Germany, he had the opportunity to meet Messiaen, Schoenberg, and Webern, the principal innovators at the time. Together with Pierre Boulez, Stockhausen drew inspiration from these composers as he developed his style of total serialism. Stockhausen’s music was initially met with resistance due to its heavily atonal content with practically no clear melodic or rhythmic sense. Still, he continued to experiment with musique concrete. Some of his works include Gruppen (1957), a piece for three orchestras that moved music through time and space; Kontakte (1960), a work that pushed the tape machine to its limits; and the epic Hymnen (1965), an ambitious two-hour work of 40 juxtaposed songs and anthems from around the world. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 27 MUSIC  Quarter I The climax of his compositional ambition came in 1977 when he announced the creation of Licht (Light), a seven-part opera (one for each day of the week) for a gigantic ensemble of solo voices, solo instruments, solo dancers, choirs, orchestras, mimes, and electronics. His recent Helicopter String Quartet, in which a string quartet performs whilst airborne in four different helicopters, develops his long-standing fascination with music which moves in space. It has led him to dream of concert halls in which the sound attacks the listener from every direction. Stockhausen’s works total around 31. He presently resides in Germany. STUDY II (Excerpt) Karlheinz Stockhausen Chance Music C hance music refers to a style wherein the piece always sounds different at every performance because of the random techniques of production, including the use of ring modulators or natural elements that become a part of the music. Most of the sounds emanate from the surroundings, both natural and man-made, such as honking cars, rustling leaves, blowing wind, dripping water, or a ringing phone. As such, the combination of external sounds cannot be duplicated as each happens by chance. An example is John Cage’s Four Minutes and Thirty-Three Seconds (4’33") where the pianist merely opens the piano lid and keeps silent for the duration of the piece. The audience hears a variety of noises inside and outside the concert hall amidst the seeming silence. 28 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century JOHN CAGE (1912–1992) John Cage was known as one of the 20th century composers with the widest array of sounds in his works. He was born in Los Angeles, California, USA on September 5, 1912 and became one of the most original composers in the history of western music. He challenged the very idea of music by manipulating musical instruments in order to achieve new sounds. He experimented with what came to be known as “chance music.” In one instance, Cage created a “prepared” piano, where screws and pieces of wood or paper were inserted between the piano strings to produce different percussive possibilities. The prepared piano style found its way into Cage’s Sonatas and Interludes (1946–1948), a cycle of pieces containing a wide range of sounds, rhythmic themes, and a hypnotic quality. His involvement with Zen Buddhism inspired him to compose Music of Changes (1951), written for conventional piano, that employed chance compositional processes. CONCERT FOR PIANO AND ORCHESTRA, 1958 (Cover, instruction sheet, and pages 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9) John Cage Copyright Edition Peters All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 29 MUSIC  Quarter I He became famous for his composition Four Minutes and 33 Seconds (4’33"), a chance musical work that instructed the pianist to merely open the piano lid and remain silent for the length of time indicated by the title. The work was intended to convey the impossibility of achieving total silence, since surrounding sounds can still be heard amidst the silence of the piano performance. Cage also advocated bringing real-life experiences into the concert hall. This reached its extreme when he composed a work that required him to fry mushrooms on stage in order to derive the sounds from the cooking process. As a result of his often irrational ideas like this, he developed a following in the 1960s. However, he gradually returned to the more organized methods of composition in the last 20 years of his life. More than any other modern composer, Cage influenced the development of modern music since the 1950s. He was considered more of a musical philosopher than a composer. His conception of what music can and should be has had a profound impact upon his contemporaries. He was active as a writer presenting his musical views with both wit and intelligence. Cage was an important force in other artistic areas especially dance and musical theater. His musical compositions total around 229. Cage died in New York City on August 12, 1992. SUMMARY T he new musical styles created by 20th century classical composers were truly unique and innovative. They experimented with the elements of rhythm, melody, harmony, tempo, and timbre in daring ways never attempted before. Some even made use of electronic devices such as synthesizers, tape recorders, amplifiers, and the like to introduce and enhance sounds beyond those available with traditional instruments. Among the resulting new styles were electronic music and chance music. These expanded the concept of music far beyond the conventions of earlier periods, and challenged both the new composers and the listening public. As the 20th century progressed, so did the innovations in musical styles as seen in the works of these composers. From France, Edgard Varese’s use of new instruments and electronic resources led to his being known as the “Father of Electronic Music” and a description of him as “The Stratospheric Colossus of Sound.” From Germany, there was Karlheinz Stockhausen, who further experimented with electronic music and musique concrete. Stockhausen’s electronic sounds revealed the rich musical potential of modern technology. From the United States, there was John Cage with his truly unconventional composition techniques. Cage’s works feature the widest array of sounds from the most inventive sources. 30 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. Who was the French composer known as the “Father of Electronic Music? What are some of the new musical approaches of Cage? What is meant by musique concrete used by Stockhausen? Give an example of a musical work by Varese, Stockhausen, and Cage. Write your answers in the table below. Composer Musical Work Varese Stockhausen Cage WHAT TO PROCESS Listening Activity: Works of 20th Century Composers 1. Your teacher will play excerpts of any (one) of the following musical examples: Debussy – Ravel – Schoenberg – Bartok – Stravinsky Prokofieff Gershwin – – – Bernstein Glass Poulenc Cage – – – – Stockhausen – Varese – Claire de Lune, La Mer, Children’s Corner Suite Miroirs, Sonatine, Daphnis et Chloe, Jeux d’Eau, Bolero Verklarte Nacht, Violin Concerto, Piano Concerto, Gurrelieder String Quartet no. 4, Allegro, Mikrokosmos, Barbaro, Music for Strings The Rite of Spring, Petrouchka, The Firebird Suite Romeo and Juliet (ballet), Piano Sonatas An American in Paris, Porgy and Bess, Rhapsody in Blue, Someone to Watch Over Me Tonight from West Side Story, Clarinet Sonata Einstein on the Beach, Satyagraha, Akhnaten Concerto for Two Pianos, Dialogues des Carmelites 4’33"; Metamorphosis, for piano; Five Songs, for contralto soloist and piano; Music for Wind Instruments, for wind quintet Etude, Electronic STUDIES I and II, Gesang der Junglinge, Kontakte, Momente, Hymnen Hyperprism for wind and percussion, Octandre for seven wind instruments and double bass, Intégrales for wind and percussion, Ionisation for 13 percussion players All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 31 MUSIC  Quarter I 2. 3. Listen carefully to each excerpt and be able to recognize the distinct musical style of each composer. Choose a composition that you like. Write a short reaction paper on it. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND A. Name the Composer, Title of the Music, Musical Style, and Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. After the Listening Activity, your teacher will prepare selected excerpts of compositions by Debussy, Ravel, Schoenberg, Bartok, Stravinsky, Prokofieff, Poulenc, Stockhausen, Glass, Cage, Bernstein, Varese, and Gershwin. The class will be divided into four teams, with each team forming a line. As your teacher plays a few measures of the first excerpt, the first student in each line goes to the board and writes the name of the composer. The second student will write the title of the music. The third student will write the musical style. Then, the fourth student will write a description of the music in one phrase. The team that writes the correct answers first scores four (4) points. The same procedure goes on until all the students in the line have had their turn. One student will be assigned as the scorer. The team with the highest score is the winner. In case of a tie, the first team to finish is the winner. The scorer will announce the winners and then ask them this question: What was the most significant thing that you have learned from this activity? WHAT TO PERFORM A. 32 Activity 1: Experimentation with the Sounds of 20th Century Music Systems 1. Chance Music – Put small items inside a bag. Include coins, pens, pins, small bells, and other articles with percussive sounds. Pour the bag’s contents on a hard surface and record the sounds that are produced with a cellphone or other available device. Put the items back in the bag, and unload the same while once again recording the sounds being produced. Note the changes between the two sets of sounds recorded. 2. Electronic Music – Create short electronic music pieces using your knowledge of 20th century musical styles. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century B. Performance Activity 2: Original Chance and Electronic Music Rate scores are based on the elements of music such as rhythm, melodic appeal, harmony and texture, tempo and dynamics, timbre, and overall musical structure. 1. The class will be divided into four groups. 2. Each group will create an original five-minute performance of Chance Music and Electronic Music (if available) to be performed in class. 3. Those who are not performing will act as judges for the performance evaluation. 4. Judges will have five placards or score cards or paper marked: BEST, BETTER, GOOD, FAIR, NEEDS FOLLOW UP. 5. Judges will display a score card after evaluating the performance. 6. One student may be assigned to tabulate the scores after the performance. 7. Your teacher will announce the “Best Performance” award. 8. What was the role of the audience in the performance of Chance music? Explain your answers. C. Performance Activity 3: Group Activity Video Clips 1. You will be divided into four groups by counting off from 1 to 4. 2. Create and explore other arts (multi- media) that portray 20th century musical style (chance, electronic, jazz, avant garde) through a 10-minute video clip or MTV using your digital cameras or mobile phones. 3. Show and discuss your video works in class. Live / TV Performances 1. Watch live performances of musical concerts, if available in your area or watch live concerts recorded on TV. 2. Re-enact in class what you watched. 3. Make a 10-minute audio video presentation while you re-enact what you have seen on live concerts and on TV. 4. Show and discuss your video works in class. D. Performance Activity 4: Singing or Humming Musical Fragments 1. 2. Your teacher will play several musical excerpts of selected 20th century composers and will briefly discuss the title, composer, musical style, and brief description of how he or she feels about the music. Listen carefully to each excerpt and be able to recognize the distinct musical style of each composer. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 33 MUSIC  Quarter I 3. 4. 5. Sing or hum some melodic fragments (portion only) of any of the following excerpts of 20th century music, together with the recordings: a. Claude Debussy’s Claire de Lune b. Leonard Bernstein’s West Side Story c. George Gershwin’s Rhapsody in Blue d. Ravel’s Bolero e. Any work of minimalist composers, Philip Glass or Meredith Monk f. Any work of nationalist composers, Erik Satie or Bela Bartok. Based on the melodic fragments of the excerpts that you sang or hummed, you should be able to aurally identify the different selected works of the composers of the 20th century. Choose a composition that you like. Write a brief profile about the composer and give your personal reaction about the music on a 1/2 sheet of paper. Submit it in class next meeting. Evaluation Activity: “Drawing Lots” 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. Performance Activity 5: Film Showing or Video Watching 1. 2. 3. 34 After the above singing or humming activity, your teacher will prepare a box containing slips of paper with the names of Debussy, Ravel, Gershwin, Bernstein, Glass, Monk, Satie, and Bartok written on them. The class will be divided into four groups. Each group will choose four representatives who will be assigned as contestants. Each contestant will draw out a composer’s name from the box and must say three sentences about his compositional technique or musical style, his major contribution to modern music, and one work that shows his compositional style. The rest of the groups will evaluate each contestant’s answer by flashing a card or paper marked “CORRECT” or “WRONG.” Each correct answer earns a point. The group with the highest number of points wins the contest. Research on the 20th century musical play West Side Story written by Leonard Bernstein. Watch any video clip of West Side Story on the internet or You Tube. Write a reaction paper explaining the following elements of the performance: a. Setting b. Musical compositions c. Role of composer and lyricist d. Role of performers (actors, actresses) e. Role of audience (yourself) All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Music of the 20th Century f. g. h. 4. F. Did you like what you watched? Why or why not? Explain your answers. Performance Activity 6: Singing Songs from West Side Story 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. G. Sound and musical direction Script / screenplay Props, costumes, lighting You may opt to do this as an individual or group activity. Groups will be divided into four. Listen to the songs Tonight, Maria, Somewhere, and America from video or recordings of West Side Story. You will be asked to draw lots for the song to sing. Sing and perform the song in class with or without accompaniment. You may also sing with the recordings. Those who are not performing will act as judges for the performance evaluation. Judges will have five placards or score cards or paper marked: BEST, BETTER, GOOD, FAIR, NEEDS FOLLOW UP. Judges will display a score card after evaluating the performance. One student may be assigned to tabulate the scores after the performance. Your teacher will announce the “Best Performance” award. Performance Activity 7: Live Concert or Recording or Music Video Choose the activity that you are interested in. 1. Class Concert – Live Performance a. You will be grouped into two. You choose your group if you will be doing the following: singing, dancing, choreography, musical directing, playing an instrument (either as accompaniment to the song or dance or solo performance or as a band). Use props and costumes, if needed. b. Perform the concert in class in your own original interpretation of the songs from West Side Story. 2. Recording or Music Video: Individual or Group Activity a. You will be grouped into two and you will choose your group members. b. Record the performance of your classmates using a cassette recorder or make a music video using your cellular phone, digital camera, or video camera All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 35 MUSIC  Quarter I c. Play the recorded performance or show the music video to your classmates and choose the “Best Performers.” Evaluation of Performing Activities Rating scale: 5 4 3 2 1 = = = = = Very Good Good Fair Poor Needs Follow-up Rate scores are based on your performance quality. 1. 2 3. 4. How well did I perform the songs from West Side Story? ____________ How well can I identify the different musical genres based on instrumentation, text, and purpose? ____________ How well can I describe the characteristics of each through listening to their melody, harmony, rhythm, text, and mass appeal? ____________ How well did I participate in the performance of the different activities? ____________ Teacher’s Rating of the Student’s Performance 1. 36 Musicianship (60%) a. compositional concepts presented b. musical elements c. technique ____________ ____________ ____________ 2. Ensemble coordination (20%) ____________ 3. Ensemble organization (20%) ____________ All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Quarter II: AFRO-LATIN AMERICAN AND POPULAR MUSIC CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of... 1. Characteristic features of Afro-Latin American music and Popular music. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner... 1. Performs vocal and dance forms of Afro-Latin American music and selections of Popular music. LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner... 1. Observes dance styles, instruments, and rhythms of Afro Latin American and popular music through video, movies and live performances. 2. Describes the historical and cultural background of Afro-Latin American and popular music. 3. Listens perceptively to Afro-Latin American and popular music. 4. Dances to different selected styles of Afro-Latin American and popular music. 5. Analyzes musical characteristics of Afro-Latin American and popular music. 6. Sings selections of Afro-Latin American and popular music in appropriate pitch, rhythm, style, and expression. 7. Explores ways of creating sounds on a variety of sources suitable to chosen vocal and instrumental selections. 8. Improvises simple vocal/instrumental accompaniments to selected songs. 9. Choreographs a chosen dance music. 10. Evaluates music and music performances using knowledge of musical elements and style. From the Department of Education curriculum for MUSIC Grade 10 (2014) 37 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II MUSIC OF AFRICA M usic has always been an important part in the daily life of the African, whether for work, religion, ceremonies, or even communication. Singing, dancing, hand clapping and the beating of drums are essential to many African ceremonies, including those for birth, death, initiation, marriage, and funerals. Music and dance are also important to religious expression and political events. However, because of its wide influences on global music that has permeated contemporary American, Latin American, and European styles, there has been a growing interest in its own cultural heritage and musical sources. Of particular subjects of researches are its rhythmic structures and spiritual characteristics that have led to the birth of jazz forms. African music has been a collective result from the cultural and musical diversity of the more than 50 countries of the continent. The organization of this continent is a colonial legacy from European rule of the different nations up to the end of the 19 th century, whose vastness has enabled it to incorporate its music with language, environment, political developments, immigration, and cultural diversity. TRADITIONAL MUSIC OF AFRICA African traditional music is largely functional in nature, used primarily in ceremonial rites, such as birth, death, marriage, succession, worship, and spirit invocations. Others are work related or social in nature, while many traditional societies view their music as entertainment. It has a basically interlocking structural format, due mainly to its overlapping and dense textural characteristics as well as its rhythmic complexity. Its many sources of stylistic influence have produced varied characteristics and genres. Some Types of African Music Afrobeat Afrobeat is a term used to describe the fusion of West African with black American music. Apala (Akpala) Apala is a musical genre from Nigeria in the Yoruba tribal style to wake up the worshippers after fasting during the Muslim holy feast of Ramadan. Percussion instrumentation includes the rattle (sekere), thumb piano (agidigbo), bell (agogo), and two or three talking drums. Yoruba Apala Musicians 38 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music Axe Axe is a popular musical genre from Salvador, Bahia, and Brazil. It fuses the AfroCaribbean styles of the marcha, reggae, and calypso. Jit Jit is a hard and fast percussive Zimbabwean dance music played on drums with guitar accompaniment, influenced by mbira-based guitar styles. Jive Jive is a popular form of South African music featuring a lively and uninhibited variation of the jitterbug, a form of swing dance. Juju Juju is a popular music style from Nigeria that relies on the traditional Yoruba rhythms, where the instruments in Juju are more Western in origin. A drum kit, keyboard, pedal steel guitar, and accordion are used along with the traditional dun-dun (talking drum or squeeze drum). 39 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II Kwassa Kwassa Kwassa Kwassa is a dance style begun in Zaire in the late 1980’s, popularized by Kanda Bongo Man. In this dance style, the hips move back and forth while the arms move following the hips. Marabi Marabi is a South African three-chord township music of the 1930s-1960s which evolved into African Jazz. Possessing a keyboard style combining American jazz, ragtime and blues with African roots, it is characterized by simple chords in varying vamping patterns and repetitive harmony over an extended period of time to allow the dancers more time on the dance floor. LATIN AMERICAN MUSIC INFLUENCED BY AFRICAN MUSIC Reggae Reggae is a Jamaican sound dominated by bass guitar and drums. It refers to a particular music style that was strongly influenced by traditional mento and calypso music, as well as American jazz, and rhythm and blues. The most recognizable musical elements of reggae are its offbeat rhythm and staccato chords. Salsa Salsa music is Cuban, Puerto Rican, and Colombian dance music. It comprises various musical genres including the Cuban son montuno, guaracha, chachacha, mambo and bolero. 40 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music Samba Samba is the basic underlying rhythm that typifies most Brazilian music. It is a lively and rhythmical dance and music with three steps to every bar, making the Samba feel like a timed dance. There is a set of dances—rather than a single dance—that define the Samba 4 dancing scene in Brazil. Thus, 4 no one dance can be claimed with certainty as the “original” Samba style. Soca Soca is a modern Trinidadian and Tobago pop music combining “soul” and “calypso” music. Were This is Muslim music performed often as a wake-up call for early breakfast and prayers during Ramadan celebrations. Relying on pre-arranged music, it fuses the African and European music styles with particular usage of the natural harmonic series. Zouk Zouk is fast, carnival-like hythmic music, from the Creole slang word for ‘party,’ originating in the Carribean Islands of Guadaloupe and Martinique and popularized in the 1980’s. It has a pulsating beat supplied by the gwo ka and tambour bele drums, a tibwa rhythmic pattern played on the rim of the snare drum and its hi-hat, rhythm guitar, a horn section, and keyboard synthesizers. 41 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II VOCAL FORMS OF AFRICAN MUSIC Maracatu Maracatu first surfaced in the African state of Pernambuco, combining the strong rhythms of African percussion instruments with Portuguese melodies. The maracatu groups were called “nacoes” (nations) who paraded with a drumming ensemble numbering up to 100, accompanied by a singer, chorus, and a coterie of dancers. Maracatu dance Musical instruments used in Maracatu The Maracatu uses mostly percussion instruments such as the alfaia, tarol and caixa-deguerra, gongue, agbe, and miniero. The alfaia is a large wooden drum that is rope-tuned, complemented by the tarol which is a shallow snare drum and the caixa-de-guerra which is a war-like snare. Providing the clanging sound is the gongue, a metal cowbell. The shakers are represented by the agbe, a gourd shaker covered by beads, and the miniero or ganza, a metal cylindrical shaker filled with metal shot or small dried seeds called “Lagrima fre Nossa Senhora.” Alfaia Drum Caixa Tarol Miniero or Ganza Agbe Sakere Gongue 42 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music Blues The blues is a musical form of the late 19th century that has had deep roots in AfricanAmerican communities. These communities are located in the so-called “Deep South” of the United States. The slaves and their descendants used to sing as they worked in the cotton and vegetable fields. The notes of the blues create an expressive and soulful sound. The feelings that are evoked are normally associated with slight degrees of misfortune, lost love, frustration, or loneliness. From ecstatic joy to deep sadness, the blues can communicate various emotions more effectively than other musical forms. Noted performers of the Rhythm and Blues genre are Ray Charles, James Brown, Cab Calloway, Aretha Franklin, and John Lee Hooker; as well as B.B. King, Bo Diddley, Erykah Badu, Eric Clapton, Steve Winwood, Charlie Musselwhite, Blues Traveler, Jimmie Vaughan, and Jeff Baxter. Examples of blues music are the following: Early Mornin’, A House is Not a Home and Billie’s Blues. Ray Charles Soul Soul music was a popular music genre of the 1950’s and 1960’s. It originated in the United States. It combines elements of African-American gospel music, rhythm and blues, and often jazz. The catchy rhythms are accompanied by handclaps and extemporaneous body moves which are among its important features. Other characteristics include “call and response” between the soloist and the chorus, and an especially tense and powerful vocal sound. James Brown Etta James Some important innovators whose recordings in the 1950s contributed to the emergence of soul music included Clyde McPhatter, Hank Ballard, and Etta James. Ray Charles and Little Richard (who inspired Otis Redding) and James Brown were equally influential. Brown was known as the “Godfather of Soul,” while Sam Cooke and Jackie Wilson are also often acknowledged as “soul forefathers.” Examples of soul music are the following: Ain’t No Mountain High Enough, Ben, All I Could Do is Cry, Soul to Soul, and Becha by Golly, Wow. 43 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II Spiritual The term spiritual, normally associated with a deeply religious person, refers here to a Negro spiritual, a song form by African migrants to America who became enslaved by its white communities. This musical form became their outlet to vent their loneliness and anger, and is a result of the interaction of music and religion from Africa with that of America. The texts are mainly religious, sometimes taken from psalms of Biblical passages, while the music utilizes deep bass voices. The vocal inflections, Negro accents, and dramatic dynamic changes add to the musical interest and effectiveness of the performance. Examples of spiritual music are the following: We are Climbing Jacob’s Ladder, Rock My Soul, When the Saints Go Marching In, and Peace Be Still. Call and Response The call and response method is a succession of two distinct musical phrases usually rendered by different musicians, where the second phrase acts as a direct commentary on or response to the first. Much like the question and answer sequence in human communication, it also forms a strong resemblance to the verse-chorus form in many vocal compositions. Examples of call and response songs are the following: Mannish Boy, one of the signature songs by Muddy Waters; and School Day - Ring, Ring Goes the Bell by Chuck Berry. WHAT TO KNOW 1. Which African music is usually heard on the radios today? 2. Among the types of African music, which is usually known as a type of music that has originated from Brazil? 3. Which type of music was popularized by Bob Marley? 4. What is the music that is a New York Puerto Rican adaptation of Afro-Cuban music? 5. What are the different musical instruments included in the maracatu? 44 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF AFRICA A frican music includes all the major instrumental genres of western music, including strings, winds, and percussion, along with a tremendous variety of specific African musical instruments for solo or ensemble playing. Classification of Traditional African Instruments A. Idiophones These are percussion instruments that are either struck with a mallet or against one another. 1. Balafon - The balafon is a West African xylophone. It is a pitched percussion instrument with bars made from logs or bamboo. The xylophone is originally an Asian instrument that follows the structure of a piano. It came from Madagascar to Africa, then to the Americas and Europe. 2. Rattles - Rattles are made of seashells, tin, basketry, animal hoofs, horn, wood, metal bells, cocoons, palm kernels, or tortoise shells. These rattling vessels may range from single to several objects that are either joined or suspended in such a way as they hit each other. 3. Agogo - The agogo is a single bell or multiple bells that had its origins in traditional Yoruba music and also in the samba baterias (percussion) ensembles. The agogo may be called “the oldest samba instrument based on West African Yoruba single or double bells.” It has the highest pitch of any of the bateria instruments. 4. Atingting Kon - These are slit gongs used to communicate between villages. They were carved out of wood to resemble ancestors and had a “slit opening” at the bottom. In certain cases, their sound could carry for miles through the forest and even across water to neighboring islands. A series of gong “languages” were composed of beats and pauses, making it possible to send highly specific messages. 45 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II 5. Slit drum - The slit drum is a hollow percussion instrument. Although known as a drum, it is not a true drum but is an idiophone. It is usually carved or constructed from bamboo or wood into a box with one or more slits in the top. Most slit drums have one slit, though two and three slits (cut into the shape of an “H”) occur. If the resultant tongues are different in width or thicknesses, the drum will produce two different pitches. 6. Djembe - The West Africandjembe (pronounced zhem-bay) is one of the best-known African drums is. It is shaped like a large goblet and played with bare hands. The body is carved from a hollowed trunk and is covered in goat skin. Log drums come in different shapes and sizes as well: tubular drums, bowl-shaped drums, and friction drums. Some have one head, others have two heads. The bigger the drum, the lower the tone or pitch. The more tension in the drum head, the higher the tone produced. These drums are played using hands or sticks or both; and sometimes have rattling metal and jingles attached to the outside or seeds and beads placed inside the drum. They are sometimes held under the armpit or with a sling. 7. Shekere - The shekere is a type of gourd and shell megaphonefrom West Africa, consisting of a dried gourd with beads woven into a net covering the gourd. Theagbe is another gourd drum with cowrie shells usually strung with white cotton thread. The axatse is a small gourd, held by the neck and placed between hand and leg. Gourd shekere 8. Rasp - A rasp, or scraper, is a hand percussion instrument whose sound is produced by scraping the notches on a piece of wood (sometimes elaborately carved) with a stick, creating a series of rattling effects. Antique wooden rasp 46 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music B. Membranophones Membranophones are instruments which have vibrating animal membranes used in drums. Their shapes may be conical, cylindrical, barrel, hour-glass, globular, or kettle, and are played with sticks, hands, or a combination of both. African drums are usually carved from a single wooden log, and may also be made from ceramics, gourds, tin cans, and oil drums. Examples of these are found in the different localities – entenga (Ganda), dundun (Yoruba), atumpan (Akan), and ngoma (Shona), while some are constructed with wooden staves and hoops. 1. Body percussion - Africans frequently use their bodies as musical instruments. Aside from their voices, where many of them are superb singers, the body also serves as a drum as people clap their hands, slap their thighs, pound their upper arms or chests, or shuffle their feet. This body percussion creates exciting rhythms which also stir them to action. Moreover, the wearing of rattles or bells on their wrists, ankles, arms, and waists enhances their emotional response. 2. Talking drum - The talking drum is used to send messages to announce births, deaths, marriages, sporting events, dances, initiation, or war. Sometimes it may also contain gossip or jokes. It is believed that the drums can carry direct messages to the spirits after the death of a loved one. However, learning to play messages on drums is extremely difficult, resulting in its waning popularity. An example of the talking drum is the luna. Luna 47 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC C.  Quarter II Lamellaphone One of the most popular African percussion instruments is the lamellaphone, which is a set of plucked tongues or keys mounted on a sound board. It is known by different names according to the regions such as mbira, karimba, kisaanj, and likembe. Mbira (hand piano or thumb piano) - The thumb piano or finger xylophone is of African origin and is used throughout the continent. It consists of a wooden board with attached staggered metal tines (a series of wooden, metal, or rattan tongues), plus an additional resonator to increase its volume. It is played by holding the instrument in the hands and plucking the tines with the thumbs, producing a soft plucked sound. D. Chordophones Chordophones are instruments which produce sounds from the vibration of strings. These include bows, harps, lutes, zithers, and lyres of various sizes. 1. Musical bow - The musical bow is the ancestor of all string instruments. It is the oldest and one of the most widely-used string instruments of Africa. It consists of a single string attached to each end of a curved stick, similar to a bow and arrow. The string is either plucked or struck with another stick, producing a per-cussive yet delicate sound. The earth bow, the mouth bow, and the resonator-bow are the principal types of musical bows. The earth bow, ground bow, or pit harp consist of a hole in the ground, a piece of flexible wood and a piece of chord. The musician plucks the taut string to accompany his singing. When the half gourd is not buried, the performer holds the instrument very tightly under his knee flat side down, so that the chord puts enough tension on the wood to bend it into the shape of a hunting bow. 48 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music A more advanced form of ground bow is made from a log, half a gourd, a flat piece of wood, and cord. The wooden strip is driven firmly into one end of the log and the half gourd is fastened to the log about 2 feet away from the wooden strip. The cord, fastened from the wooden strip to the gourd, is stretched so tightly into the shape of a bow. The player holds the instrument on the ground by placing one leg across the log between the resonating gourd and the wooden strip. 2. Lute (konting, khalam, and the nkoni ) - The lute, originating from the Arabic states, is shaped like the modern guitar and played in similar fashion. It has a resonating body, a neck, and one or more strings which stretch across the length of its body and neck. The player tunes the strings by tightening or loosening the pegs at the top of the lute’s neck. Nkoni 3. West African plucked lutes include the konting, khalam, and the nkoni. Kora - The kora is Africa's most sophisticated harp, while also having features similar to a lute. Its body is made from a gourd or calabash. A support for the bridge is set across the opening and covered with a skin that is held in place with studs. The leather rings around the neck are used to tighten the 21 strings that give the instrument a range of over three octaves. The kora is held upright and played with the fingers. African kora 4. Zither - The zither is a stringed instrument with varying sizes and shapes whose strings are stretched along its body. Among the types of African zither are the raft or Inanga zither from Burundi, the tubular or Valiha zither from Malagasy, and the harp or Mvet zither from Cameroon. Raft zither 49 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II 5. E. Zeze - The zeze is an African fiddle played with a bow, a small wooden stick, or plucked with the fingers. It has one or two strings, made of steel or bicycle brake wire. It is from Sub-Saharan Africa. It is also known by the names tzetze and dzendze, izeze and endingidi; and on Madagascar is called lokanga (or lokango) voatavo. Aerophones Aerophones are instruments which are produced initially by trapped vibrating air columns or which enclose a body of vibrating air. Flutes in various sizes and shapes, horns, panpipes, whistle types, gourd and shell megaphones, oboe, clarinet, animal horn and wooden trumpets fall under this category. 1. Flutes - Flutes are widely used throughout Africa and either vertical or side-blown. They are usually fashioned from a single tube closed at one end and blown like a bottle. Atenteben (Ghana) Fulani Flutes Panpipes consist of cane pipes of different lengths tied in a row or in a bundle held together by wax or cord, and generally closed at the bottom. They are blown across the top, each providing a different note. 2. Horns - Horns and trumpets, found almost everywhere in Africa, are commonly made from elephant tusks and animal horns. With their varied attractive shapes, these instruments are end-blown or side-blown and range in size from the small signal whistle of the southern cattle herders to the large ivory horns of the tribal chiefs of the interior. One trumpet variety, the wooden trumpet, may be simple or artistically carved, sometimes resembling a crocodile’s head. 50 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music Kudu horn - This is one type of horn made from the horn of the kudu antelope. It releases a mellow and warm sound that adds a unique African accent to the music. This instrument, which comes in a set of six horns, reflects the cross of musical traditions in Africa. Today, the kudu horn can also be seen in football matches, where fans blow it to cheer for their favourite teams. 3. Reed pipes - There are single-reed pipes made from hollow guinea corn or sorghum stems, where the reed is a flap partially cut from the stem near one end. It is the vibration of this reed that causes the air within the hollow instrument to vibrate, thus creating the sound. There are also cone-shaped double-reed instruments similar to the oboe or shawm. The most well-known is the rhaita or ghaita, an oboe-like double reed instrument from northwest Africa. It is one of the primary instruments used by traditional music ensembles from Morocco. The rhaita was even featured in the Lord of the Rings soundtrack, specifically in the Mordor theme. 4. Whistles - Whistles found throughout the continent may be made of wood or other materials. Short pieces of horn serve as whistles, often with a short tube inserted into the mouthpiece. Clay can be molded into whistles of many shapes and forms and then baked. Pottery whistles are sometimes shaped in the form of a head, similar to the Aztec whistles of Central America and Mexico. African whistle 5. Trumpets - African trumpets are made of wood, metal, animal horns, elephant tusks, and gourds with skins from snakes, zebras, leopards, crocodiles and animal hide as ornaments to the instrument. They are mostly ceremonial in nature, often used to announce the arrival or departure of important guests. In religion and witchcraft, some tribes believe in the magical powers of trumpets to frighten away evil spirits, cure diseases, and protect warriors and hunters from harm. 51 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II African Musical Instruments from the Environment M any instruments of Africa are made from natural elements like wood, metal, animal, skin and horns, as well as improvised ones like tin cans and bottles. These are mainly used to provide rhythmic sounds, which are the most defining element of African music. Africans make musical instruments from the materials in the environment, like forest areas from where they make large wooden drums. Drums may also be made of clay, metal, tortoise shells, or gourds. Xylophones are made of lumber or bamboo, while flutes can be constructed wherever reeds or bamboo grow. Animal horns are used as trumpets while animal hides, lizard skins, and snake skins can function as decorations as well as provide the membranes for drum heads. Laces made of hides and skins are used for the strings of harps, fiddles, and lutes. On the other hand, bamboo was used to form the tongues of thumb pianos, the frames of stringed instruments, and stamping tubes. Strips of bamboo are even clashed together rhythmically. Gourds, seeds, stones, shells, palm leaves, and the hard-shelled fruit of the calabash tree are made into rattles. Ancient Africans even made musical instruments from human skulls decorated with human hair while singers use their body movements to accompany their singing. Modern Africans make use of recycled waste materials such as strips of roofing metal, empty oil drums, and tin cans. These people, bursting with rhythm, make music with everything and anything. At present, new materials that are more easily accessible, such as soda cans and bottles, are becoming increasingly important for the construction of percussion instruments. Some rhythmic instruments like scrapers, bells, and rattles also provide the pitch and timbre when played in an ensemble to provide contrasts in tone quality and character. WHAT TO KNOW 1. What are the classifications of African music? 2. What are the characteristics of each classification of African music? 3. Name some African musical instruments under the following categories: a. idiophones b. chordophones c. membranophones d. aerophones 4. Describe how African musical instruments are sourced from the environment. Give examples. 52 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music MUSIC OF LATIN AMERICA T he music of Latin America is the product of three major influences – Indigenous, Spanish-Portuguese, and African. Sometimes called Latin music, it includes the countries that have had a colonial history from Spain and Portugal, divided into the following areas: a. Andean region (a mountain system of western South America along the Pacific coast from Venezuela to Tierra del Fuego) – Argentina, Bolivia, Chile, Ecuador, Peru, and Venezuela b. Central America – Belize, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, and Panama c. Carribean – Cuba, Dominican Republic, Guadeloupe, Haiti, Martinique, and Puerto Rico d. Brazil At the same time, because of the inter-racial cross breeding and migration, the abovenamed countries were also somewhat commonly populated by five major ancestral groups as follows: a. Indian descendants of the original native Americans who were the inhabitants of the region before the arrival of Christopher Columbus b. African descendants from Western and Central Africa c. European descendants mainly from Spain and Portugal but also including the French, Dutch, Italian, and British d. Asian descendants from China, Japan, India, and Indonesia/Java e. Mixed descendants from the above-named groups INFLUENCES ON LATIN AMERICAN MUSIC 1. Indigenous Latin-American Music Before the arrival of the Spanish, Portuguese, and other European colonizers, the natives were found to be using local drum and percussion instruments such as the guiro, maracas, and turtle shells, and wind instruments such as zampona (pan pipes) and quena (notched-end flutes) remain popular and are traditionally made out of the same aquatic canes, although PVC pipe is sometimes used due to its resistance to heat, cold, and humidity. Generally, quenas only are played during the dry season. Materials came from hollow tree trunks, animal skins, fruit shells, dry seeds, cane and Quena clay, hardwood trees, jaguar claws, animal and human bones, and specially-treated inflated eyes of tigers. 53 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II Zampona Guiro Turtle shells Maracas The indigenous music of Latin America was largely functional in nature, being used for religious worship and ceremonies. The use of instruments as well as singing and dancing served to implore the gods for good harvest, victory in battles, guard against sickness and natural disasters, and of course provide recreation. 2. Native American/Indian Music The ethnic and cultural groups of the principal native Americans share many similar yet distinctive music elements pertaining to melody, harmony, rhythm, form, and dynamics. Short musical motives from descending melodic lines were a common feature, where tempo, rhythm, and tone colors vary with the specific occasion or ritual. Many dance forms were repetitious, while songs had a wide range of volume levels. Some of the Native American music includes courtship songs, dancing songs, and popular American or Canadian tunes like Amazing Grace, Dixie, Jambalaya, and Sugar Time. Many songs celebrate themes like harvest, planting season or other important times of year. 3. Afro-Latin American Music The African influence on Latin American music is most pronounced in its rich and varied rhythmic patterns produced by the drums and various percussion instruments. Complex layering of rhythmic patterns was a favorite device, where 54 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music fast paced tempos add to the rhythmic density. Vocal music was often deepchested while instrumental music greatly relied on resonant drums and sympathetic buzzers to produce rich sounds and occasional loud volume levels to reflect their intensity. 4. Euro-Latin American Music The different regions of Latin America adopted various characteristics from their European colonizers. Melodies of the Renaissance period were used in Southern Chile and the Colombian Pacific coasts, while step-wise melodies were preferred in the heavily Hispanic and Moorish-influenced areas of Venezuela and Colombia. 6 4 Alternating dual meters, such as 8 and 4 , known as “sesquialtera” found in Chile and adopted in Cuba and Puerto Rico, were immortalized in the song I Wanna Be in America from Leonard Bernstein’s Broadway hit West Side Story. Other European influences were manifested in the texture of Euro-Latin American music, from unaccompanied vocal solos to those accompanied by stringed instruments. 5. Mixed American Music The diversity of races and cultures from the Native Americans, Afro-Latin Americans, and Euro-Latin Americans account for the rich combinations of musical elements including the melodic patterns, harmonic combinations, rhythmic complexities, wide range of colors and dynamics, and various structural formats. This musical fusion of Latin America combining native instruments with European counterparts and musical theories was further enriched by the instruments brought by the African slaves. The result of the massive infusion of African culture also brought about the introduction of other music and dance forms such as the AfroCuban rumba, Jamaican reggae, Colombian cumbia, and the Brazilian samba. 6. Popular Latin American Music Latin America has produced a number of musical genres and forms that had been influenced by European folk music, African traditional music, and native sources. Much of its popular music has in turn found its way to the many venues and locales of America, Europe, and eventually the rest of the world. Its danceable rhythms, passionate melodies, and exotic harmonies continue to enthrall music and dance enthusiasts worldwide even as the forms themselves undergo constant modifications that are more relevant to the times. Some of these Latin American popular music forms are tango, bossa nova, samba, son, and salsa. 55 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II a. Samba The samba is a dance form of African origins around 1838 which evolved into an AfricanBrazilian invention in the working class and slum districts of Rio de Janeiro. Its lively rhythm, consisting of a 24 meter but containing three steps each that create a feeling of a 34 meter instead, was meant to be executed for singing, dancing, and parading in the carnival. Samba has a number of variations, so that there is no clear-cut definition of a single samba form. Its most adventurous kind is known as the batucada, referring at once to a large percussion ensemble of up to a hundred players, a jam session, or an intensely polyrhythmic style of drumming. b. Son The son is a fusion of the popular music or canciones (songs) of Spain and the African rumba rhythms of Bantu origin. Originating in Cuba, it is usually played with the tres (guitar), contrabass, bongos, maracas, and claves (two wooden sticks that are hit together). Although the son is seldom heard today, its most important legacy is its influence on present-day Latin American music, particularly as the forerunner of the salsa. c. Salsa The salsa is a social dance with marked influences from Cuba and Puerto Rico that started in New York in the mid 1970’s. Its style contains elements from the swing dance and hustle as well as the complex Afro-Cuban and Afro-Carribean dance forms of pachanga and guaguanco. The execution of the salsa involves shifting the weight by stepping sideways, causing the hips to move while the upper body remains level. The arms and shoulders are also incorporated with the upper body position. In each, a moderate tempo is used while the upper and lower bodies act in seeming disjoint as described above. 56 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF LATIN AMERICA T he varied cultures developed in Latin America gave rise to different types of wind and percussion instruments. As with the African continent, their rich history dating back thousands of years ago with the Aztec, Maya, and other prehistoric cultural groups in Latin America understandably generates their own brands of creativity in making music. In Central America, the ancient civilizations of the Aztec and Maya peoples used various instruments mainly for religious functions and usually by professional musicians. As some instruments were considered holy and it was further believed that music was supposed to glorify the gods, mistakes in playing these instruments were considered offensive and insulting to them. Some of their instruments include the following: Tlapitzalli The tlapitzalli is a flute variety from the Aztec culture made of clay with decorations of abstract designs or images of their deities. Teponaztli The teponaztli is a Mexican slit drum hollowed out and carved from a piece of hardwood. It is then decorated with designs in relief or carved to represent human figures or animals to be used for both religious and recreational purposes. Conch The conch is a wind instrument made from a seashell usually of a large sea snail. It is prepared by cutting a hole in its spine near the apex, then blown into as if it were a trumpet. Rasp The rasp is a hand percussion instrument whose sound is produced by scraping a group of notched sticks with another stick, creating a series of rattling effects. 57 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II Huehueti The huehueti is a Mexican upright tubular drum used by the Aztecs and other ancient civilizations. It is made of wood opened at the bottom and standing on three legs cut from the base, with its stretched skin beaten by the hand or a wooden mallet. Whistles Whistles are instruments made of natural elements such as bone from animals. The eagle-bone whistle is the most common whose function is to help symbolize the piece’s purpose. Incan Instruments Among the Incas of South America, two instrumental varieties were most common: a. Ocarina The ocarina was an ancient vessel flute made of clay or ceramic with four to 12 finger holes and a mouthpiece that projected from the body. b. Panpipes (Zamponas) The zamponas were ancient instruments tuned to different scalar varieties, played by blowing across the tubetop. Typical models were either in pairs or as several bamboo tubes of different lengths tied together to produce graduated pitches of sound. 58 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music Andean Instruments The Andean highlands made use of several varieties of flutes and string instruments that include the following: a. Pitus The pitus are side-blown cane flutes that are played all year round. b. Wooden Tarkas The tarkas are vertical duct flutes with a mouthpiece similar to that of a recorder, used during the rainy season. c. Quenas The quenas are vertical cane flutes with an end-notched made from fragile bamboo. They are used during the dry season. d. Charango The charango is a ten-stringed Andean guitar from Bolivia. It is the size of a ukulele and a smaller version of the mandolin, imitating the early guitar and lute brought by the Spaniards. It produces bright sounds and is often used in serenades in Southern Peru. 59 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II Mariachi The Mariachi is an extremely popular band in Mexico whose original ensemble consisted of violins, guitars, harp, and an enormous guitarron (acoustic bass guitar). Trumpets were later added, replacing the harp. Mariachi music is extremely passionate and romantic with their blended harmonies and characterized by catchy rhythms. Its musicians are distinctly adorned with wide-brimmed hats and silver buttons. WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. What are the different musical instruments of Latin American music? What are the characteristics of each instrument? VOCAL AND DANCE FORMS OF LATIN AMERICAN MUSIC L atin American instruments are extremely useful in adding life, color, and variety to their many vocal and dance forms which have captured the world’s attention and affectionate adoption. In the Philippines, many of these characteristics have been taken in, particularly in the Brazilian bossa nova, cha cha, rumba, and the Argentine tango. Other dance forms became locally popular especially in the 1960’s and 1970’s until the arrival of disco and rock music. However, the original Latin dance forms have been experiencing constant revivals of their popularity especially in “ballroom dancing” as the trendier modern styles also fade almost as quickly as they come. 1. Cumbia Originating in Panama and Colombia, the cumbia became a popular African courtship dance with European and African instrumentation and characteristics. It contained varying rhythmic meters among the major locations – 24 meter in Colombia; 24 , 44 , and 68 meters in Panama, and 22 meter in Mexico. Instruments used are the drums of African origin, such as the tabora (bass drum), claves, 60 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music which are hard, thick sticks that sets the beat, guitar, accordion, clarinet, modern flute, and caja, a type of snare drum. 2. Tango The word tango may have been of African origin meaning “African dance” or from the Spanish word taner meaning “to play” (an instrument). It is a foremost Argentinian and Uruguayan urban popular song and dance that is related to the Cuban contradanza, habanera, and Cuban tango, and remains a 20th century nationalistic Argentinian piece of music that is most expressive. Its main development was in the slum areas of Buenos Aires, and eventually became fashionable in Parisian society in the early part of the 20th century, as well as in England and other parts of Western Europe. During the 1890’s, the working class of Buenos Aires, Argentina came across a new kind of rhythm known as the tango, whose choreographic steps followed the dance trend of the Viennese Waltz and the polka involving close contact between the male and female dancers. Tango later became more intellectual in the 1940’s when more poetic lyrics were inserted and allowed little freedom. Later in the 1960’s, more improvisation and movement were incorporated into the form, allowing the singers and dancers more room for creative expressions. 61 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC 3.  Quarter II Cha Cha The cha cha is a ballroom dance the originated in Cuba in 1953, derived from the mambo and its characteristic rhythm of 2 crochets – 3 quavers – quaver rest, with a syncopation on the fourth beat. The cha cha may be danced with Cuban music, Latin Pop, or Latin Rock. The Cuban cha cha, considered more sensual that may contain polyrhythmic patterns, has a normal count of ‘two-three-chachacha’ and ‘four and one, two, three’. 4. Rumba The rumba popular recreational dance of Afro-Cuban origin, performed in a complex duple meter pattern and tresillo, which is a dotted quaver – dotted quaver – dotted semiquaver rhythm. It is normally used as a ballroom dance where a solo dancer or couple would be in an embrace though slightly apart, with the rocking of the hips to a fast-fast-slow sequence and often containing cross rhythms. There is a repetitive melody with an ostinato pattern played by the maracas, claves, and other Cuban percussion instruments. It contains jazz elements that became a model for the cha cha, mambo, and other Latin American dances. It was also used for concert music, as it appeared in the Second Piano Concerto of the French composer Darius Milhaud. 5. Bossa nova Bossa nova originated in 1958-59 as a movement effecting a radical change in the classic Cuban samba. The word bossa comes from the Brazilian capital of Rio de Janeiro, which means either “trend” or “something charming,” integrating melody, harmony, and rhythm into a swaying feel, where the vocal style is often nasal. The nylon-stringed classical guitar is the most important instrument of this style. Bossa nova contains themes centering on love, women, longing, nature, and youthfulness. Bossa nova emerged in the 1950’s when a slower, gentler version of the samba became popular with the upper and middle class sectors of society. It was music for easy and relaxed listening, conducive to romantic dates and quiet moments at the lounges. 62 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music A foremost figure of bossa nova is Antonio Carlos Jobim, who became famous with his song Desafinado (1957). He collaborated with Vincius de Moraes in the play Orfeu da Conceicao (1956), musical recording of Cancao do Amor Demais (1958), and the song Garota de Ipanema or Girl from Ipanema (1962) that turned bossa nova’s popularity into a worldwide phenomenon. Antonio Carlos Jobim In the Philippine pop music scene, Sitti Navarro is a singer who has become known as the “Philippines’ Queen of Bossa Nova.” Some of her bossa nova songs include Para sa Akin, Hey Look at the Sun, Lost in Space, and Kung Di Rin Lang Ikaw. Sitti Navarro 6. Reggae Reggae is an urban popular music and dance style that originated in Jamaica in the mid 1960’s. It contained English text coupled with Creole expressions that were not so familiar to the non-Jamaican. It was a synthesis of Western American (Afro-American) popular music and the traditional Afro-Jamaican music, containing a western-style melodic-harmonic base with African sounds and characteristics, American pop and rock music mannerisms, and a preference for a loud volume in the bass. The best-known proponent of reggae music is Bob Marley, a Jamaican singer-songwriter, musician, and guitarist. He achieved international fame and acclaim for songs such as: One Love, Three Little Birds; No Woman, No Cry; Redemption Song; and Stir It Up. Bob Marley 63 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC 7.  Quarter II Foxtrot The foxtrot is a 20th century social dance that originated after 1910 in the USA. It was executed as a one step, two step and syncopated rhythmic pattern. The tempo varied from 30 to 40 bars per minute and had a simple duple meter with regular 4-bar phrases. There was no fixed step pattern, instead borrowing from other dance forms and having a simple forward/backward sequence. The foxtrot gave rise to other dances such as the black bottom, Charleston, and shimmy. 8. Paso Doble The paso doble (meaning “double step”) is a theatrical Spanish dance used by the Spaniards in bullfights, where the music was played as the matador enters (paseo) and during passes just before the kill (faena). The dance is arrogant and dignified with a duple meter, march-like character, where the dancer takes strong steps forward with the heels accompanied by artistic hand movements, foot stomping, sharp and quick movements, with the head and chest held high. WHAT TO KNOW 1. What are the different vocal and dance forms of Latin American music? 2. What are the characteristics of each vocal and dance form of Latin American music? 3. Which type of music was popularized by Bob Marley? 4. Which type of music was popularized by Antonio Carlos Jobim? 5. Who is known as the “Philippines’ Queen of Bossa Nova”? 64 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music JAZZ T he arrival of the jazz genre did not come overnight. It was an offshoot of the music of African slaves who migrated to America. As music is considered a therapeutic outlet for human feelings, the Africans used music to recall their nostalgic past in their home country as well as to voice out their sentiments on their desperate condition at that time. Since then, these melancholy beginnings have evolved into various more upbeat jazz forms which the world has adopted and incorporated into other contemporary styles. RAGTIME Ragtime is an American popular musical style mainly for piano, originating in the AfroAmerican communities in St. Louis and New Orleans. Its style was said to be a modification of the “marching mode” made popular by John Philip Sousa, where the effect is generated by an internally syncopated melodic line pitted against a rhythmically straightforward bass line. Its music is written unlike jazz which is mainly improvised, and contains regular meters and clear phrases, with an alternation of low bass or bass octaves and chords. Scott Joplin Jelly Roll Morton Foremost exponents of ragtime were Jelly Roll Morton who was an American ragtime and early jazz pianist and composed Frog I More Rag. Scott Joplin, who also composed the popular Maple Leaf Rag, Solace, and The Entertainer. Joplin is also knows as the “King of Ragtime.” Ragtime also influenced a number of classical composers, among them Erik Satie, Claude Debussy, and Igor Stravinsky, who injected ragtime rhythmic elements in their compositions. BIG BAND The term ‘Big Band” refers to a large ensemble form originating in the United States in the mid 1920’s closely associated with the Swing Era with jazz elements. Relying heavily on percussion (drums), wind, rhythm section (guitar, piano, double bass, vibes), and 65 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II brass instruments (saxophones), with a lyrical string section (violins and other string instruments) to accompany a lyrical melody. A standard big band 17-piece instrumentation consists of the following musical instruments percussion, brass, and woodwind instrruments: five saxophones (most often two altos, two tenors, and one baritone), four trumpets, four trombones (often including one bass trombone), and a four-piece rhythm section (composed of drums, acoustic bass or electric bass, piano and guitar). Some big bands use additional instruments. Big band music originated in the United States and is associated with jazz and the swing. Glenn Miller Orchestra Among the great big bands were the Glenn Miller Orchestra (A String of Pearls, Moonlight Serenade, In The Mood, American Patrol, and Smoke Gets in Your Eyes); the Count Basie Orchestra (April in Paris); and the Benny Goodman Orhcestra (Sing, Sing, Sing); while some solo signers such as Cab Calloway (Minnie the Moocher) Doris Day (Stardust, I’m in the Mood for Love); Roy Eldridge, and others also collaborated with big bands. BEBOP Bebop or bop is a musical style of modern jazz which is characterized by a fast tempo, instrumental virtuosity, and improvisation that emerged during World War II. The speed of the harmony, melody, and rhythm resulted in a heavy performance where the instrumental sound became more tense and free. Dizzy Gillespie Its main exponents were trumpeter Dizzy Gillespie, alto sax player Charlie Parker, drummers Max Roach and Roy Haynes, pianists Bud Powell and Thelonius Monk; guitarist Charlie Christian; tenor sax players Dexter Gordon and Sonny Rollins, who was also a composer; and trombonist JJ Johnson. 66 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music JAZZ ROCK Jazz rock is the music of 1960’s and 1970’s bands that inserted jazz elements into rock music. A synonym for “jazz fusion,” jazz rock is a mix of funk and R&B (“rhythm and blues”) rhythms, where the music used amplification and electronic effects, complex time signatures, and extended instrumental compositions with lengthy improvisations in the jazz style. Popular singer/songwriters Joni Mitchell, Tim Buckley, and Van Morrison were among those who adopted the jazz rock style. Joni Mitchell Some popular groups that emerged using the above music styles were the following:            Grateful Dead Cream Blood, Sweat, and Tears Santana Traffic Chicago Steely Dan Lighthouse Frank Zappa Soft Machine Hatfield and the North WHAT TO KNOW 1. What are the different jazz forms? 2. What are the characteristics of each jazz form? 3. Name one of the Big Bands that became popular. 4. Which type of music was adopted by singer-songwriter Joni Mitchell? 5. Name three of the popular groups that used the jazz rock style. 67 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II POPULAR MUSIC P opular music literally means “music of the populace,” similar to traditional folk music of the past. As it developed in the 20th century, pop music (as it has come to be called) generally consisted of music for entertainment of large numbers of people, whether on radio or in live performances. From the standard songs and ballads of the legendary Cole Porter, George Gershwin, and Frank Sinatra to the rock and roll craze of Elvis Presley and the Beatles and the present day idols in the alternative music and disco modes, popular music is now shared by the entire world. BALLADS The ballad originated as an expressive folksong in narrative verse with text dealing typically about love. The word is derived both from the medieval French “chanson balladee” and “ballade” which refers to a dancing song. Used by poets and composers since the 18th century, it became a slow popular love song in the 19th century. Today, the term ballad now refers to a love song in a slightly pop or rock style, with the following characteristics: 1. Blues Ballads This is a fusion of Anglo-American and Afro-American styles from the 19th century that deals with the anti-heroes resisting authority. The form emphasizes the character of the performer more than the narrative content, and is accompanied by the banjo or guitar. 2. Pop Standard and Jazz Ballads This is a blues style built from a single verse of 16 bars ending on the dominant or half-cadence, followed by a refrain/chorus part of 16 or 32 bars in AABA form. The B section acts as the bridge, and the piece normally ends with a brief coda. Some enduring pop standard and jazz ballads include The Man I Love (George Gershwin, above left), Always (Irving Berlin, above center), and In a Sentimental Mood (Duke Ellington, above right). 68 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music 3. Pop and Rock Ballads A pop and rock ballad is an emotional love song with suggestions of folk music, as in the Beatles’ composition “The Ballad of John and Yoko” and Billy Joel’s “The Ballad of Billy.” This style is sometimes applied to strophic story-songs, such as Don McLean’s “American Pie.” Don McLean STANDARDS In music, the term “standard” is used to denote the most popular and enduring songs from a particular genre or style, such as those by Irving Berlin, Cole Porter, and Rodgers and Hart. Its style is mostly in a slow or moderate tempo with a relaxed mood. It also features highly singable melodies within the range and technical capacity of the everyday listener. Among the foremost proponents of this style was Frank Sinatra, also known as “Ol Blue Eyes,” “Chairman of the Board,” or “The Voice.” His genre was categorized as traditional pop and jazz. He was a successful singer, actor, producer, director, and conductor. His hit singles include My Way and Strangers in the Night. Frank Sinatra (far left) and Nat King Cole (left) Another well-loved standards singer was American balladeer Nat King Cole. Although an accomplished pianist, he owes most of his popular musical fame to his soothing baritone voice, which he used to perform in big band, vocal jazz, swing. traditional pop, and jump blues genres. He was the first black American to host his own television show and maintained worldwide popularity over 40 years past his death. He is widely considered “one of the most important musical personalities in United States history.” His hit songs include Unfogettable, Mona Lisa, and Too Young. Matt Monroe was an English singer who became one of the most popular entertainers in the international music scene during the 1960s. Throughout his 30-year career, he filled cabarets, nightclubs, music halls, and stadia in Australia, Japan, the Philippines, and Hong Kong to Africa, the Middle East, Europe, and the Americas. Among his hit singles 69 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II included Portrait of My Love, Softly as I Leave You, the James bond theme From Russia with Love, Born Free, which became his signature song, and Walk Away. Other popular singers of standards were Perry Como, Bing Crosby, Andy Williams, Sammy Davis Jr., Doris Day, Patti Page, Barbra Streisand, and Paul Anka. Matt Monroe ROCK AND ROLL Rock and roll was a hugely popular song form in the United States during the late 1940’s to the 1950’s. It combined Afro-American forms such as the blues, jump blues, jazz, and gospel music with the Western swing and country music. The lead instruments were the piano and saxophone, but these were eventually replaced by modern instruments. In its classic form, rock and roll employed one or two electric guitars (lead, rhythm), a string bass or bass guitar, and a set of drums that provided the rhythmic pattern. This form came during the age of technological change when electric guitars were supplemented by amplifiers and microphones to raise the volume. It derived its name from the mot of a sonhip on the ocean, “rock and roll.” The greatest exponent of the rock and roll style was the legendary Elvis Presley. His hit songs such as Heartbreak Hotel and Blue Suede Shoes were complemented by his good looks and elaborate movements that included hugging the microphone as he sang. Elvis Presley The Beatles Presley’s style was the precursor of the British band known as The Beatles, whose compositions further boosted rock and roll as the favorite genre of the times. Examples of The Beatles’ songs in this genre are I Saw Her Standing There, Get Back, While My Guitar Gently Weeps, Rock and Roll Music, and Ticket to Ride. 70 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music The Beatles’ John Lenon and Paul McCartney as Composers/Songwriters John Lennon (1940-1980) was an English musician, singer, performer, songwriter and co-songwriter. He was born and raised in Liverpool, England. He rose to worldwide fame as a founder member of the rock band The Beatles, which was considered as “the most commercially successful band in the history of popular music.” Lennon formed as songwriting partnership with Paul McCartney, which is considered as “one of the most celebrated songwriting partnerships of the 20th century.” Lennon’s hit compositions for the Beatles include Strawberry Fields Forever, Help, In My Life, Tomorrow Never Knows, Rain, Norwegian Road, I am the Walrus, Come Together, You’ve Got to Hide Your Love Away, and Happiness is a Warm Gun. When The Beatles disbanded in 1970, Lennon embarked on a solo career. Among his solo top billboard hits include Imagine, Mind Games, Power to the People, Dream, Nobody Told Me, Watching the Wheels, Woman, Whatever Gets You Through the Night, and Instant Karma. In 2002, according to a BBC poll on the 100 Greatest Britons, John was voted in eighth place. In 2008, Rolling Stone Magazine ranked him the “fifth-greatest singer of all time.” He was posthumously inducted into the Songwriters Hall of Fame in 1987; and into the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame twice as a member of The Beatles in 1988 and as a solo artist in 1994. Sir James Paul McCartney (1942- ) is an English singer, songwriter, multi-instrumentalist, co-writer, and composer. Paul gained worldwide popularity and fame as a member of The Beatles, which included John Lennon, George Harrison, and Ringo Starr. Beatles was one of the most influential groups in the history of pop music. The songwriting partnership with Lennon for the Beatles is one of the most celebrated of the 20th century. McCartney has been “recognized as one of the most successful composers and performers of all time, with 60 gold discs and sales of over 100 million albums and 100 million singles of his work with the Beatles and as a solo artist.” It has been known that more than 2,200 artists have covered his Beatles song Yesterday, which is more than any other copyrighted song in history. McCartney was a two-time inductee into the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame as a member of The Beatles in 1988, and as a solo artist in 1999. He is a 21-time Grammy Award winner 71 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II having won both individually and with The Beatles. He has written or co-written 32 songs that have reached number one on the Billboard Hot 100. As of 2014, McCartney had sold more than “15.5 million RIAA-certified units” in the United States. He was knighted in England for his services to music. His top hit compositions for The Beatles include Hey Jude; Fool on the Hill; I’ll Follow the Sun; I Will; I Saw Her Standing There; All My Loving; Paperback Writer; Michelle; Eleanor Rigby; We Can Work It Out; And I Love Her; Here, There, and Everywhere; Penny Lane; and others. DISCO The 1970s saw the rise of another form of pop music known as “disco.” Disco music pertained to rock music that was more danceable, thus leading to the establishment of venues for public dancing also called discos. The term originated from the French word “discotheque” which means a library for phonograph records. The disco style had a soaring and reverberating sound rhythmically controlled by a steady beat (usually44 meter) for ease of dancing, and accompanied by strings, horns, electric guitars, and electric pianos or synthesizers. Famous figures of the The Bee Gees disco genre include ABBA, Donna Summer (“The Queen of Disco”), The Bee Gees; Earth, Wind, and Fire; KC and the Sunshine Band; The Village People; and Gloria Gaynor, bringing us such hits as Dancing Queen, Stayin’ Alive, Boogie Wonderland, and Hot Stuff. ABBA Donna Summer Earth, Wind, and Fire 72 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music POP MUSIC Parallel with the disco era, other pop music superstars continued to emerge. Among them were Neil Sedaka (Laughter in the Rain), Diana Ross and the Supremes (Stop in the Name of Love), Olivia Newton John (Hopelessly Devoted to You), Stevie Wonder (You Are the Sunshine of My Life), Elton John (Skyline Pigeon), The Carpenters (We’ve Only Just Begun), and Barry Manilow (Mandy). Pop superstars in more recent years include solor artists Celine Dion (My Heart Will Go On), Madonna (Material Diana Ross and the Girl), Whitney Houston (I Will Always Love You), Mariah Supremes Carey (Hero), Justin Timberlake (Justified), Britney Spears (Oops, I Did It Again), Beyonce (Irreplaceable), Lady Gaga (Bad Romance), and Bruno Mars (Just The Way You Are); as well as vocal groups such as Boyz II Men (Four Seasons of Loneliness), The Backstreet Boys (I Want It That Way), N’Sync (This I Promise You), Destiny’s Child (Survivor), among many others. Michael Jackson, “The King of Pop” Perhaps the most popular solo performer of all time is Michael Joseph Jackson who was born on August 29, 1958 and died on June 25, 2009. He was an American recording artist, entertainer, singer-songwriter, record producer, musical arranger, dancer, choreographer, actor, businessman, and philanthropist. The seventh child of the Jackson family, he made his debut as an entertainer in 1968 as a member of The Jackson 5. He then began a solo career in 1971 while still a member of the group and was referred to as the "King of Pop" in subsequent years. Jackson's 1982 album Thriller remains the world's best-selling album of all time, and four of his other solo studio albums are among the world's best-selling records: Off the Wall (1979), Bad (1987), Dangerous (1991), and HIStory (1995). In the early 1980s, he became a dominant figure in American popular music and culture. He was the first African American entertainer to amass a strong crossover following on MTV. The popularity of his music videos airing on MTV, such as Beat It, Billie Jean, and Thriller—widely credited with transforming the music video from a promotional tool into an art form—helped bring the relatively new channel to fame. Videos such as Black or White and Scream made Jackson an enduring staple on MTV in the 1990s. 73 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II With stage performances and music videos, Jackson popularized a number of physically complicated dance techniques, such as the “robot” and the “moonwalk.” His distinctive musical sound and vocal style influenced many hip hop, pop music, and contemporary R&B artists across several generations world-wide. Jackson donated and raised millions of dollars for beneficial causes through his “Heal the World Foundation,” charity singles, and support of 39 charities. One of the few artists to have been inducted into the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame twice, his other achievements include “Multiple Guinness World Records”—including one for "Most Successful Entertainer of All Time"—13 Grammy Awards, 13 number one singles in his solo career, and the sale of 750 million records worldwide. Jackson is one of the world’s most famous artists because of his highly successful career which made him a part of popular culture for nearly four decades. At the time of his death, Jackson was preparing for “This Is It,” a series of 50 concerts that would have been held at The O2 arena in London beginning July 13, 2009, and a world tour to follow after the series of concerts. After Michael Jackson's death, Billboard's entire top nine positions on Billboard's Top Pop Catalog Albums chart housed Jacksonrelated titles on July 1, 2009. Today’s Pop Music Idols One Direction Rihanna Ed Sheeran As the 21st century continues to unfold, more and more pop groups emerge spanning an entire range of musical styles and genres. There are music groups like Black Eyed Peas, K Pop (Korean), My Chemical Romance, Fall Out Boys, The Red Jumpsuit Apparatus, Souja Boy, Train, Maroon 5, and One Direction. While solo performers include Adele, Taylor Swift, Ed Sheeran, Rihanna, Chris Brown, Ariana Grande, Justin Beiber, Miley Cyrus, Katy Perry, Nikki Minaj, Selena Gomez, and others. HIP HOP AND RAP Hip hop music is a stylized, highly rhythmic type of music that usually (but not always) includes portions of rhytmically chanted words called “rap.” In rapping, the artist speaks 74 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music along with an instrumental or synthesized beat. Hip hop arose in the 1970s within the Afro-American and Latino youth in the Bronx area of New York City. But by the 1980s, it had spread to many other countries. It has since evolved into a subculture that encompasses music (rapping, DJing, scratching, and beatboxing); a nearly acrobatic style of dancing, called break dancing; a distinct manner of dress; and graffiti-style artwork. Among the early hip hop artists were LL Cool J and Run-D.M.C. While more recent popular names in this genre have been Beastie Boys, Eminem, and Kanye West. Eminem Kanye West ALTERNATIVE MUSIC Alternative music was an underground independent form of music that arose in the 1980’s. It became widely popular in the 1990’s as a way to defy “mainstream” rock music. Thus, it was known for its unconventional practices such as distorted guitar sounds, oppressive lyrics, and defiant attitudes. It was also characterized by high energy levels that bred new styles such as new wave, punk rock, post-punk, indie rock, gothic rock, jangle pop, noise pop, C86, Madchester, Industrial Rock, and Shoegazing. Examples of alternative music are You Belong with Me, Shake It Off. WHAT TO KNOW 1. Briefly describe the historical and cultural background of African, Latin American, jazz, and popular music. 2. Analyze the musical characteristics of African, Latin American, jazz, and popular music. 3. How did the following music reflect life in their respective cultures and the conditions at that time? a. African music – maracatu, blues, soul, spiritual, call and response b. Latin American Music – cumbia, tango, cha cha, rumba, bossa nova, reggae, foxtrot, paso doble c. Jazz – ragtime, big band, bebop, jazz rock d. Popular music – ballads, standards, rock and roll, disco, pop, hip hop and rap, alternative music 75 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II PHILIPPINE POPULAR MUSIC T he one word that comes to mind when we think of contemporary Philippine music is the type commonly termed as Original Pinoy Music or Original Philippine Music, or OPM for short. It was originally used to refer only to Philippine pop songs, particularly ballads, such as those popular after the collapse of its predecessor, the Manila Sound, in the late 1970s up until the present. In the 1960s to 1970s, Nora Aunor, Pilita Corrales, Eddie Peregrina, Victor Wood, Asin, APO Hiking Society, and others were highly popular OPM singers. In the 1970s to 1980s, the major commercial Philippine pop music artists were Claire dela Fuente, Didith Reyes, Rico Puno, Ryan Cayabyab, Basil Valdez, Celeste Legaspi, Hajji Alejandro, Rey Valera, Freddie Aguilar, Imelda Papin, Eva Eugenio, Nonoy Zuñiga, and many others. ORIGINAL PILIPINO MUSIC (OPM) The 1980s to 1990s are also regarded as the golden era of Philippine ballads. Among the classics that emerged were those created by:  Ryan Cayabyab (Kay Ganda ng Ating Musika, Kahit Ika’y Panaginip Lang)  George Canseco (Kapantay ay Langit, Kastilyong Buhangin, Tubig at Langis)  Willie Cruz (Sana’y Wala Nang Wakas, Bituing Walang Ningning)  Jose Mari Chan (Beautiful Girl, Please Be Careful With My Heart, Constant Change)  Gary Valenciano (Sana Maulit Muli) George Canseco Ryan Cayabyab Most of these compositions made use of Western-type melody and harmony, while expressing uniquely Filipino emotions in movingly poetic lyrics. These came to be known as OPM, and were popularized by solo artists like Pilita Corales, Nora Aunor, Basil Valdez, Celeste Legaspi, Hajji Alejandro, Leah Navarro, Sharon Cuneta, Martin Nievera, Gary Valenciano, ZsaZsa Padilla, Regine Velasquez, and Ogie Alcasid. At the start, OPM was centered in Manila, where Tagalog and English are the dominant languages. However, other ethno-linguistic groups such as the Visayan, Bikol, Kapampangan, and Ilocano also began to sing and record their songs in their native dialects. 76 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music Gary Valenciano Martin Nievera Between the 1980s and 1990s, OPM was led by artists such as Martin Nievera, Gary Valenciano, Lea Salonga, Regine Velasquez, Sharon Cuneta, Vina Morales, Raymond Lauchengco, Francis Magalona, Pops Fernandez, José Mari Chan, Dingdong Avanzado, Janno Gibbs, Ogie Alcasid, Joey Albert, Manilyn Reynes, among many others. In the 1990s, the famous solo artists and bands included The Eraserheads, Smokey Mountain, Donna Cruz, Jessa Zaragoza, Ariel Rivera, Southborder, Afterimage, Andrew E., Jaya, Rivermaya, Parokya ni Edgar, among many others. Underground bands emerged and along with them were their perceptions of idealism and self-expression. More recently, OPM stars have included Yeng Constantino, Sarah Geronimo, Aisa Seguerra, and international singers Arnel Pineda (of the international rock group, Journey), Charice Pempengco, and others. Sarah Geronimo Arnel Pineda Charice PHILIPPINE POP MUSIC P op music in the Philippines started as an adaptation or translation, if not complete imitation, of Western hits. It started with Bobby Gonzales’ Hahabol-habol (Hot Pursuit), a local version of the rock and roll songs of the 1950s, and Rico Puno’s Luneta, a local adaptation of The Way We Were. This immediately clicked with the youth and eventually gained wide acceptance even among the “burgis” (bourgeois or elite) crowd. Rico J. Puno 77 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II The start of the “Manila Sound” in the mid-1970s gave rise to songs using a colloquial language called Taglish, a combination of Tagalog and English. These Filipino lyrics sung to pop melodies resulted in highly singable songs with contemporary appeal. Hotdog (above) and The Apo Hiking Society (right) Among the proponents of the Manila Sound were the Hotdog, Cinderella, The Rainmakers, and the Apo Hiking Society. After waning briefly in the 1990’s, this sound regained popularity in recent years with remakes of the 1970’s originals by contemporary rock bands. PHILIPPINE JAZZ P hilippine musicians have also been inspired by jazz music. Among them are jazz pianist and recording artist Boy Katindig, who comes from the well-known clan of musicians that includes jazz piano legend Romy Katindig and saxophonist Eddie Katindig. The Katindig family pioneered Latin jazz in Manila. Lito Molina and the Jazz Friends Eddie Katindig Bobby Enriquez Other notable Filipino jazz musicians include Lito Molina, Angel Peña, Emil Mijares, and internationally known jazz pianist Bobby Enriquez. 78 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music PHILIPPINE ALTERNATIVE FOLK MUSIC Freddie Aguilar The Philippines also saw the rise of alternative folk music which was different from the traditional and popular form. This new form combined ethnic instrumentation with electronic accompaniment, while presenting themes or issues of society and the environment. Some of the Filipino composers who championed this style were Joey Ayala, Grace Nono, and Edru Abraham of Kontragapi (“Kontemporaryong Gamelan Pilipino”). Among other Filipino composers whose styles ranged from folk to semi-ethnic werewere Freddie Aguilar, best known for his song Anak; Yoyoy Villame, composer of Magellan; Florante, composer of Ako’y Isang Pinoy; and Gary Granada, composer of Ka Bayani. PHILIPPINE ROCK T he year 1973 saw the birth of Philippine or “Pinoy” rock music which successfully merged the rock beat with Filipino lyrics. This new sound was introduced by the legendary Juan de la Cruz Band (with their song Ang Himig Natin) which had for its members Joey “Pepe” Smith, Wally Gonzales, and the originator of Jeproks, Mike Hanopol, who later became a major symbol of Pinoy rock. Juan de la Cruz Band Other early exponents of Pinoy rock included the band Maria Cafra; Sampaguita, the female rocker; and folk-rock singer Heber Bartolome and his Banyuhay band, whose songs expressed strong messages of nationalism. Continuing this legacy of Pinoy rock today are vocal groups and bands that include River Maya, The Dawn, True Faith, The Eraserheads, Wolfgang, Bamboo, Parokya ni Edgar, Hale, Sandwich, SugarFree, Sponge Cola,and others. Parokya ni Edgar Bamboo 79 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II PINOY RAP I n the Philippines, rap was also made popular by such composers and performers as Francis Magalona (Mga Kababayan Ko and Watawat) and Andrew E (Humanap Ka ng Pangit). Francis Magalona was born on October 4, 1964 and died on March 6, 2009. He is also known as FrancisM, “Master Rapper,” and “The Man From Manila.” He was a Filipino rapper, songwriter, producer, actor, director, television host, and photographer. He is often hailed as the “King of Pinoy Rap” and is considered a legend in the Philippine music community. With the success of his earliest albums, Magalona was the Francis Magalona first Filipino rapper to cross over to the mainstream. He is also credited for having pioneered the merging of rap with Pinoy rock, becoming a significant influence on artists in that genre as well. He was later awarded a posthumous Presidential Medal of Merit “for his musical and artistic brilliance, his deep faith in the Filipino, and his sense of national pride that continue to inspire us.” Pop Music Collaborations Philippine pop artists have also collaborated with classical artists and orchestras in a number of their recordings and concerts. Some of the concerts of Martin Nievera, Gary Valenciano, Regine Velazquez, Lea Salonga, and Sharon Cuneta have featured the Philippine Philharmonic Orchestra, the ABS-CBN Orchestra, and the Manila Philharmonic Orchestra in performances at the Cultural Center of the Philippines (CCP) and the Philippine International Convention Center (PICC), both known venues for classical music, as well as at the Araneta Coliseum and Folk Arts Theater (FAT). Classical musicians have also performed in malls and other commercial venues to popularize classical music, popular music, and OPM. SUMMARY From theater tunes to rock and roll, pop, standards, hip hop, rap, and contemporary ballads—whether in the West, in the Philippines, or anywhere else in the world—these all provided a rich and diverse musical background in the development of Philippine contemporary music. The development of Philippine music was also influenced by the history of the country—from its pre-Spanish roots, through the Spanish and American periods, up to the present. It has since evolved to have its own rich and distinct identity. 80 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. How did the different forms of popular music reflect life in the 20th century? Differentiate the characteristics of Philippine pop, rock, and rap music. What role did media like radio, television, and recordings play in the development of these different musical genres? Describe the “Manila Sound” in Philippine pop music. Name some well-known OPM performers. WHAT TO PROCESS Class Activity 1. Your teacher will play one recording of each of the following: African Music, Latin American Music, Jazz, Popular Music (standards, rock and roll, disco), and OPM (ballad, Pinoy rock, Pinoy rap). Listen carefully to each recording. 2. Participate in a class discussion on the distinctive features and qualities of each musical genre and style. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND Activity 1: Making Improvised African and Latin American Instruments Individual or Group Activity 1. Make improvised African or Latin American instruments using dried vegetables, animal hide, wood, strips of roofing metal, tin cans, bamboo, etc. 2. Create a rhythmic/harmonic accompaniment for any song you know using these improvised African or Latin American instrument. 3. How did you relate in making improvised African or Latin American musical instruments found in the environment? Activity 2: Choreography to Express the Music Individual or Group Activity 1. Conceptualize a choreography to show some dance steps set to the following music: a. African b. Latin American 81 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II c. d. e. 2. Jazz Popular (Pop) Music OPM How does it feel to conceptualize the dance movements in each music category? WHAT TO PERFORM Group Activities 1. 2. 3. Class Singing Concert – live performance a. Your teacher will divide the class into four groups. b. Each group will be asked to draw lots to sing a song from one of the following musical genres: For African Music - choose from Kumbaya, Waka Waka, or Mbube For Latin-American music - One Note Samba For Jazz - choose from Someone to Watch Over Me by Ella Fritzgerald or All That Jazz from the movie Chicago For Pop and OPM - choose your own song. c. Decide among your group members which of you will sing, plan the choreography or movements to accompany the song, play a musical instrument, and record the group’s performance on video. d. Learn your assigned song, using the lyrics on the following pages. Practice it, with the choreography and accompaniment. Then, perform it in class. Dance Interaction a. As your group performs in class, invite the other class members to join you in the dance movements or choreography that you have prepared. b. Do an impromptu selection of “Best Dance Performance” among your classmates. Music Video Award a. During the class performance, the assigned group member(s) will record your group’s performance using a mobile phone, tablet, or video camera. 82 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music b. Simulate a “Music Video Award” event by joining the other groups in presenting your respective videos in class. c. The class members will choose the “Best Song Performance” based on how well the group presented their assigned music genre. Kum-ba-ya Kum-bay-ya is a spiritual song that was first recorded in the 1920s. It became a popular standard campfire song in Girl or Boy Scouting and during summer camps. The song is originally a simple petition to God to come and help those in need. This inspiring hymn is heard in many countries of Central Africa. It has great personal meaning and the singer often creates his own words as he works or pray. The words “Kum Bay Ya” mean “come by here” or “stay nearby.” Kum bay ya, my Lord, kum bay ya; Kum bay ya, my Lord, kum bay ya; Kum bay ya, my Lord, kum bay ya O Lord, kum bay ya. Someone’s laughing, my Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s laughing, my Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s laughing, my Lord, kum bay ya O Lord, kum bay ya. Someone’s crying, my Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s crying, my Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s crying, my Lord, kum bay ya O Lord, kum bay ya. Someone’s praying, Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s praying, Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s praying, Lord, kum bay ya O Lord, kum bay ya. Someone’s singing, my Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s singing, my Lord, kum bay ya Someone’s singing, my Lord, kum bay ya O Lord, kum bay ya. 83 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II Waka Waka (This Time for Africa) FIFA World Cup 2010 Official Anthem "Waka Waka (This Time for Africa)" or in Spanish, "Waka Waka (Esto es África)" is a song by Colombian singer-songwriter Shakira. It feautures South African band, Freshlyground, and pairs an African Colombian rhythm with a Soca-inspired beat. Its lyrics encourage one to aim for one’s goals, like a soldier on a battlefield. The song was used as the official song of the 2010 FIFA World Cup held in South Africa. You're a good soldier Choosing your battles Pick yourself up And dust yourself off And back in the saddle You're on the frontline Everyone's watching You know it's serious We're getting closer This isn’t over The pressure is on You feel it But you've got it all Believe it One Note Samba Samba de Uma Nota Só ("One-Note Samba") is a song composed by Antonio Carlos Jobim, with Portuguese lyrics by Newton Mendonça and English lyrics by Jobim. The song title refers to the main melody line, which at first consists of a long series of notes of a single tone. This is just a little samba Built upon a single note Other notes are bound to follow But the root is still that note Now this new note is the consequence Of the one we've just been through As I'm bound to be The unavoidable consequence of you There's so many people Who can talk and talk, and talk And just say nothing Or nearly nothing 84 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music I have used up all the scale I know and at the end I've come to nothing I mean nothing So I come back to my first note As I come back to you I will pour into that one note All the love I feel for you Any one who wants the whole show Re mi fa so la ci do He will find himself with no show Better play the note you know So I come back to my first note I must come back to you I will pour into that one note All the love I feel for you Any one who wants the whole show Re mi fa so la ci do He will find himself with no show Better play the note you know Someone To Watch Over Me There's a saying old, says that love is blind Still we're often told, "Seek and ye shall find" So I'm going to seek a certain lad I've had in mind Looking everywhere, haven't found him yet He's the big affair I cannot forget Only man I ever think of with regret I'd like to add his initial to my monogram Tell me, where is the shepherd for this lost lamb? 85 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter II There's a somebody I'm longin' to see I hope that he, turns out to be Someone who'll watch over me I'm a little lamb who's lost in the wood I know I could, always be good To one who'll watch over me Although he may not be the man some Girls think of as handsome To my heart he carries the key Won't you tell him please to put on some speed Follow my lead, oh, how I need Someone to watch over me Won't you tell him please to put on some speed Follow my lead, oh, how I need Someone to watch over me Someone to watch over me Evaluation of Performing Activities Rating scale: 5 = Very Good 4 = Good 3 = Fair 2 = Poor 1 = Needs Follow-up Rate scores are based on the groups’ performance quality. 1. 2 How well did our group perform our assigned music? a. African Music b. Latin American Music c. Jazz d. Pop Music / OPM _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ How well can I identify the different musical genres based on instrumentation, melody, rhythm, text, timbre, harmony, and purpose? _______________ 86 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Afro-Latin American and Popular Music 3. 4. 5. How well can I describe the characteristics of each genre as I listened to the melody, harmony, rhythm, and lyrics? _______________ How well did our group perform the different dance moves for our assigned song? _______________ How well can I (individually) sing the following musical genres? a. African Music b. Latin American Music c. Jazz d. Popular / Pop Music e. OPM _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ Teacher’s Rating of the Performance 1. Musicianship (60%) (musical elements, technique) _______________ 2. Presentation impact and showmanship (20%) _______________ 3. Ensemble coordination and organization (20%) _______________ 87 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III Quarter III: CONTEMPORARY PHILIPPINE MUSIC CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of... 1. Characteristic features of contemporary music. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner... 1. Sings contemporary songs. LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Listens perceptively to excerpts of major contemporary works. Describes characteristics of traditional and new music. Gives a brief biography of selected contemporary Philippine composers. Sings selections of contemporary music with appropriate pitch, rhythm, style, and expression. Explores ways of creating sounds on a variety of sources. Improvises simple vocal/instrumental accompaniments to selected songs. Creates a musical on the life of a selected contemporary Philippine composer. Evaluates music and music performances using knowledge of musical elements and style. From the Department of Education curriculum for MUSIC Grade 10 (2014) 88 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music CONTEMPORARY PHILIPPINE MUSIC A ccording to National Artist Ramon Santos, PhD, “contemporary music in the Philippines refers to compositions that have adopted ideas and elements from 20th century art music in the west, as well as the latest trends and musical styles in the entertainment industry.” The modern Filipino repertoire consists of musical pieces that have been written in 20th century idioms that have evolved out of such stylistic movements as impressionism, expressionism, neo-classicism, as well as avant garde and new music. New music are compositions which are improvisational works such as the early compositions of Dr. Ramon Santos, Radyasyon and Quadrasyon; Josefino “Chino” Toledo’s Samut-Sari, Pintigan and Terminal Lamentations, and Jonathan Baes’ Wala and Banwa. 20th CENTURY TRADITIONAL COMPOSERS W ith Spain and then America having colonized the Philippines from the early 1500s to the late 1800s, it was unavoidable that Western compositional techniques found their way into the works of Filipino composers. Yet, even 20th century Filipino composers have managed to retain some traditional elements in their assimilation of Western techniques. In fact, they have become the strongest foundations of what we now know as Philippine music. Among the major Philippine contemporary composers are Francisco Buencamino Sr., Francisco Santiago, Nicanor Abelardo, Antonio Molina, Hilarion Rubio, Col. Antonino Buenaventura, Rodolfo Cornejo, Lucio San Pedro, Rosendo Santos Jr., Alfredo Buenaventura, and Ryan Cayabyab. 89 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III FRANCISCO B. BUENCAMINO SR. (1883 – 1952) Francisco Beltran Buencamino Sr. was born on November 5, 1883 in Bulacan. He was the son of a musically inclined couple. His father was Fortunato Buencamino, a church organist and band master. His mother was Luisa Beltran, a noted singer. He studied music composition and harmony at Liceo de Manila. Unfortunately, he was not able to finish. He taught at the Ateneo de Manila, and at Centro Escolar de Señoritas whose Conservatory of Music he founded. He also created the Buencamino Music Academy in 1930 where Nicanor Abelardo was one of his students. Expanding his career, he ventured into musical directing and scoring, and composing film music for Sampaguita Pictures, LVN, and Excelsior. Buencamino’s compositions include Harana, Pandanggo ni Neneng, Collar de Sampaguita, Dulces las Horas, Mayon (Fantasia de Concierto), My Soul’s Lament, Larawan, Mazurka, Boholana, Mi Bandera, Princesa ng Kumintang, Maligayang Bati, Ang Bukang Liwayway, Pandanggo ni Neneng, Ang Bagong Balitaw, Himig ng Nayon, Damdamin (Romance), and Pizzicato Caprice. Many of his piano works have become a staple part of the Philippine repertoire of today’s young students, especially Mayon, Larawan, and Maligayang Bati. He also wrote several zarzuelas and kundimans. He passed away on October 16, 1952 after which a posthumous award honored him with the title “Outstanding Composer.” LARAWAN Francisco Buencamino Sr. 90 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music Francisco Santiago (1889 – 1947) Francisco Santiago is known as the “Father of the Kundiman” and belongs to the “Triumvirate of Filipino Composers.” He finished his music specialization at the American Conservatory of Music in Chicago, where he obtained his Doctorate Degree in 1924. Santiago’s music was Romantic in style, incorporating Western forms and techniques with folk materials. He composed several works such as kundiman, symphonies, piano concertos, and other music pieces for the piano, violin, and voice. Among his famous works are Pakiusap, Madaling Araw, Sakali Man, Hibik ng Pilipinas, Ano Kaya ang Kapalaran, and Kundiman (Anak Dalita). This piece was sung before the Royal Court of Spain upon the request of King Alfonso II. He was also a musical director for films. Among the films whose music he supervised are Kundiman, Leron Leron Sinta, Madaling Araw, Manileña, and the movie inspired by his own composition Pakiusap. He became the first Filipino Director of the UP Conservatory of Music. PILIPINAS KONG MAHAL Francisco Santiago 91 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III NICANOR ABELARDO (1893 – 1934) Nicanor Abelardo is one of the “Triumvirate of Filipino Composers” which includes Antonio Molina and Francisco Santiago. He studied music at the Chicago Music College and was influenced by the musical styles of Schoenberg, Hindemith and Stravinsky. Abelardo developed a style that combined European romanticism with chromaticism. His compositions contain hazy tones, dissonance and unusual chordal combinations found in such works as Cinderella Overture, Panoramas, and a violin sonata. Although a 20th century modern composer in style, he is also considered a composer in the Romantic style. His best-known compositions include Mutya ng Pasig, Nasaan Ka Irog, Cavatina for Violoncello, and Magbalik Ka Hirang. ANTONIO J. MOLINA (1894 – 1980) National Artist for Music Antonio Molina, the first National Artist for Music, is considered one of the “Triumvirate of Filipino Composers” which includes Nicanor Abelardo and Francisco Santiago. He began his music career as an orchestral soloist at the Manila Grand Opera House. He served as Dean of the Centro Escolar University Conservatory of Music from 1948 to 1970. He was also a faculty member of the University of the Philippines’ Conservatory (now College) of Music. Molina was a product of both the Romantic and Impressionist schools of thought. He was fascinated by the dynamics and harmonies of Debussy, but retained much of the Romantic style in his melody. A characteristically impressionist work is his piano work Malikmata (Transfiguration). The mysteriously exotic chords of this piece gradually lead to a lyrical melody, with the traditional harmonies abruptly returning to the initial mood. Molina wrote several compositions for piano, violin, and voice as well as a Spanish-style opera form known as the zarzuela. 92 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music He is best known for his poignantly romantic serenade for violin and piano Hatinggabi. Subsequent transcriptions of this piece were written for the cello, flute, piano, and guitar. Other works by Molina include orchestral music - Misa Antoniana Grand Festival Mass, Ang Batingaw, Kundiman-Kundangan; chamber music - String Quartet, Kung sa Iyong Gunita, Pandangguhan; and vocal music - Amihan, Awit ni Maria Clara, and Larawan Nitong Pilipinas. He received the National Artist for Music award in 1973. He passed away on January 29, 1980. MUTYA NG PASIG Music and Lyrics by Nicanor Abelardo 93 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III HATINGGABI (Excerpt) Antonio J. Molina (Music) / Levi Celerio (Lyrics) SA UGOY NG DUYAN (Excerpt) Lucio San Pedro (Music) / Levi Celerio (Lyrics) PANDANGGO SA ILAW (Excerpt) Antonino Buenaventura (Music) / Levi Celerio (Lyrics) 94 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music HILARION RUBIO Y FRANCISCO (1902 – 1985) Hilarion Rubio was born on October 21, 1902 in Bacoor, Cavite. A composer, music teacher, conductor, and clarinetist, he created substantial works for the orchestra. He served as conductor for opera, ballet, dance recitals, and movie music. His early interest in music came from the influence of his uncle who was then playing with the Bacoor Band. His first music lessons in music theory and clarinet were with Fr. Amando Buencamino who taught him solfeggio and some musical instruments. When he was eight years old, he was accepted as a member of the Bacoor Band as a clarinetist. At that time, he made his first composition Unang Katas for his concert with the band.In his high school years at the North High School (now Arellano High School), Rubio became a member of several orchestras. He performed with various movie house bands and orchestras. He was also a member of the Lyric Theater Orchestra, Trozo Band in Benavides Street, and the Band Moderna in Tondo. After he graduated from high school in 1930, he co-founded the Anak Zapote Band. He later became a bandleader and conductor of the ROTC Band of the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines (UP) and played the violin and timpani with the UP Junior Symphony Orchestra. After his student years, Rubio became a conductor of opera at the Manila Music School in 1936. He became the choirmaster and choral conductor of the Choir Islanders. Also, he assumed the position of instructor at the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines. He was also a lecturer at the Buencamino Music Academy, La Concordia College, College of the Holy Spirit, Santa Isabel College, Laperal Music Academy, Manila Music School, St. Theresa’s College, and the Valencia Academy of Music. He became full professor of the UP Conservatory of Music from 1936-1937. He was appointed director of the Conservatory of Music, Centro Escolar University in 1944-1945. During the Second World War, Rubio composed and arranged many works and conducted many military and civilian brass bands. After the war, he was appointed conductor of the Manila Municipal Symphony Orchestra. He held various positions, including as Vice President of the PASAMBAP (Pambansang Samahan ng mga Banda sa Pilipinas), the National Band Association, board and charter member of the League of Filipino composers, and the first President of the Philippine Bandmaster’s Association. He was conductor of the National Opera Company for 23 years from 1937 to 1960. Rubio’s compositions include: Bulaklaken, Theme and Variations for Band, Dance of the Nymphs Rondo, Florente at Laura (overture), Halik, Danza, Unang Katas, Twopart Invention (piano), Ang Konsyerto (ballet), Ang Magsasaka, Bukang Liwayway, Concertino in C (marimba and piano), Filipinas Kong Mahal, Hatulan Mo Ako, Ginintuang Araw, In a Tropical Sea, Light, Narra, Mutya ng Silangan, To the Filipino Youth, Nela, National Heroes Day Hymn, and Salamisim. He passed away on December 28, 1985. 95 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III COL. ANTONINO BUENAVENTURA (1904 – 1996) National Artist for Music Col. Antonino Ramirez Buenaventura was a renowned composer, conductor, and teacher. His father Lucio was the chief musician of the Spanish artillery band in Intramuros and founder of Banda Buenaventura. As a young boy, he had already demonstrated a passion for music while learning the rudiments of music and solfeggio and becoming a proficient clarinet player. Col. Buenaventura further developed his musical abilities at the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines (UP) at the age of 19. He received a Teacher’s Diploma in Science and Composition at UP. Nicanor Abelardo and Francisco Santiago were among his famous mentors. At the University, Buenaventura led the UP ROTC Band and established the UP Junior Orchestra which was the first collegiate orchestra in the country. He pursued further studies at the Institute of International Education in New York. He was also awarded a study grant by the UNESCO in 1949. He was a delegate to the general assembly of the International Society for Music Education held in Montreux, Switzerland in 1976. He represented the country at the general meetings of the International Music Council (IMC) in Rome (1962) and Hamburg (1964). Buenaventura was actively involved with the various military bands which ultimately earned him his military rank of Colonel. He was a music instructor and band conductor of the Philippine Military Academy (PMA). Later, he restored the Philippine Constabulary Band in 1945, which was reputedly likened to a symphony orchestra. It was considered as “one of the best military bands in the world.” It would later be renamed the Philippine Army Band. He also founded the San Pablo Music Academy in Laguna. Buenaventura was a faculty member of the UP Conservatory of Music. Later, he became the music director of the Conservatory of Music, University of Santo Tomas (UST) in 1961. After retiring from the military, he became the music director at the School of Music and Arts, University of the East (UE) in 1964. He promoted Philippine music through his extensive use of folk materials which he had recorded around the country with Ramon Tolentino and National Artist for Dance Francisca Reyes Aquino. Buenaventura composed the music and folk dance notations for the dance researches of Aquino. As a multi-awarded musician, he composed Minuet, Mindanao Sketches, Divertimento for Piano and Orchestra, Variations and Fugue, and Greetings based on Philippine folk music. Pandanggo sa Ilaw, one of his most popular compositions, remains a favorite performance repertoire of many folk dance companies. He was declared National Artist for Music in 1988 and passed away in 1996. 96 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music RODOLFO S. CORNEJO (1909 – 1991) was born on May 15, 1909 in Singalong, Manila. Inspired by his mother’s genuine support, the young Cornejo started formal music lessons at the age of six. He performed on stage after only two years of music studies. During this time, he was also invited as organist of the Pasay Catholic Church. His first composition at age 10 was a piano piece entitled Glissando Waltz. It was followed three years later by a military march entitled Salute. At the age of 14, 26 of Cornejo’s compositions were already listed by the United Publishing Company Inc. R o d o l f o S . C o r n e j o Cornejo graduated with a Teacher’s Diploma in Pianoforte and a Teacher’s Diploma in Science and Composition at the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines (UP) in 1930. He received his Bachelor of Music degree major in piano and theory from the Chicago Musical College of Roosevelt University, USA in 1932. He received a Master of Music degree major in composition and conducting at the Chicago Musical College of Roosevelt University, USA in 1933. He was conferred a Doctor of Music degree honoris causa in 1954. He received his Doctor of Philosophy degree major in composition from the Neotarian College of Philosophy in Kansas City, USA in 1947. Cornejo taught at the UP Conservatory of Music and became the researcher and official composer of the Philippine government-in-exile. He was appointed by then President Manuel L. Quezon. He was commissioned to write a symphony and an opera and compose the music for the documentary film on President Quezon’s funeral. He served as pianistdirector of a USO concert unit that entertained the Allied Forces at the E.T.O., the Marianas, and the Hawaiian Islands during World War II. Cornejo was the soloist of the Manila Symphony Orchestra, Filipinas Youth Symphony Orchestra, and UP Symphony Orchestra. Later on, he became the musical director of the Sampaguita and Vera-Perez Movie Companies. Since 1978, he held concerts in the United States. He appeared as composer-conductor at the Seattle Opera House and the Seattle Playhouse. He is listed in “The International Who’s Who in Music.” Cornejo was also known for his extemporaneous thematic improvisations based on the letters of people’s names. His compositional output includes A la Juventud Filipina, Bailes de Ayer, Caprice on a Folksong, Cello Sonata, Ibong Adarna, Kandingan, Malakas at Maganda, Overture, Okaka, Oriental Fantasy, Ibong Adarna, Piano Concerto Nos. 1,2,3, Ruby, and Song of the Miners. He passed away on August 11, 1991. 97 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III FELIPE PADILLA DE LEON SR. (1912 – 1992) National Artist for Music Felipe Padilla de Leon was born on May 1, 1912 in Barrio Papaya (now General Tinio) in Penaranda, Nueva Ecija. He is the son of Juan de Leon and Natalia Padilla. Felipe de Leon married pianist Iluminada Mendoza with whom he had six children. Bayani and Felipe Jr., are two of his children. Bayani is a well-known composer, and Felipe Jr. is a writer and the chairman of the National Commission for Culture and the Arts (NCCA). De Leon’s talent in painting and drawing was discovered during his school days and admired by his uncle, peers. People asked him to make illustrations and sketches and was paid for them. When he was studying at the Nueva Ecija High School, he went on trips with his hometown band and wrote short pieces for them. He took up Fine Arts at the University of the Philippines in 1927, but he had to stop schooling in order to make a living. He played the trombone in dance orchestras which performed in cabarets, circuses and bodabil (vaudeville). Then, he worked as an assistant conductor of the Nueva Ecija High School Orchestra where he started doing musical arrangements. Later on, he wrote music for the zarzuela. He decided to study formally and enrolled at the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines, where he studied under National Artists Col. Antonio Buenaventura and Antonio Molina. He contributed articles to the school paper and vernacular magazines. Later, he wrote music columns for the Manila Times (then known as Manila Tribune) and Taliba. He graduated with a music teacher's diploma, major in conducting in 1939. Much later, he took advanced studies in composition under Vittorio Giannini of the Julliard School of Music in New York, USA. De Leon received many awards, such as Composer of the Year (1949), Manila Music Lovers Society, Musician of the Year (1958), UP Conservatory of Music, and others. He was conferred an honorary degree, doctor of philosophy in the humanities, by the University of the Philippines in 1991. De Leon wrote piano compositions, hymns, marches, art songs, chamber music, symphonic poems, overtures, band muic, school songs, orchestral works, operas, kundiman, and zarzuelas. He was known as a nationalist composer who expressed the Philippines' cultural identity through his compositions. Two operas which are considered his masterpieces are the Noli Me Tangere (1957) and El Filibusterismo (1970). These two operas have been staged in the Philippines and abroad. He also wrote a march during the Japanese regime entitled Tindig, Aking Inang Bayan, and another march Bagong Lipunan during the martial law. He wrote the popular Christmas carols Payapang Daigdig (1946), Noche Buena, and Pasko Na Naman, both in 1965. Felipe de Leon received a posthumous award as National Artist for Music in 1997. He died on December 5, 1992. 98 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music LUCIO SAN PEDRO (1913 – 2002) National Artist for Music Lucio San Pedro was born on February 11, 1913 in Angono, Rizal. Since his elementary days, he started composing. He studied the banjo which inspired him to become a serious musician. He later pursued his music degree at the University of the Philippines and the Juilliard School in New York, USA. Upon returning to the Philippines, he became a professor of theory and composition at the University of the Philippines’ College of Music. San Pedro is known as a “romantic nationalist.” He incorporated Philippine folk elements in his compositions with Western forms and harmony. His chords have a rich expressive tonality, as represented in his well-loved Sa Ugoy ng Duyan, a lullaby melody sung by his mother. His orchestral compositions are best represented by the Suite Pastorale (1956), a poetic aural description of his hometown Angono, and his nationalistic symphonic poem Lahing Kayumanggi (1962). Other compositions include songs, pieces for violin, cello, and chorus. His works for the symphonic band was where he was most prolific and productive both as composer and conductor. His musical prowess was internationally recognized when he was invited to be a judge at the prestigious Van Cliburn International Piano Competition in 1980. He was declared National Artist for Music in 1991 and passed away on March 31, 2002. ROSENDO E. SANTOS JR. (1922 – 1994) . was born on September 3, 1922 in Cavite City. At age 11, he started composing band marches, instrumental, and vocal scores, as well as music for Catholic masses. R o s e n d o E . S a n t o s J r He studied in Cavite schools and later graduated from the UP Conservatory of Music where he eventually became a faculty member. He also pursued a Master of Music degree in theory and composition from the Catholic University of America in Washington, D.C. After which, he also served on its faculty as well as in West Virginia University and Howard University. 99 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III As a UNESCO scholar, Santos was awarded the “Philippine Composer of the Century” after receiving the “Composer of the Year Award” in Manila in 1956 and 1957. He joined the faculty at Wilkes University, Pennsylvania in 1968. He performed as timpanist, pianist, and conductor with several orchestral groups. He conducted church choirs in Maryland, New Jersey, Lehman, Huntsville, and Shavertown United Methodist Churches in Pennsylvania, USA. He composed the background music for J. Arthur Rank Films at Pinewood Studios in London, England, where he worked with British composers Malcolm Arnold and Muir Mathieson. Among Santos’ teachers were famous composers Aaron Copland, Irving Fine, Humphrey Searle, and conductor Norman Del Mar. A prolific composer, he had composed several piano concerti, sonatas, symphonies, symphonic poems, five operas in Filipino, numerous band overtures, and more than 200 marches. He had also written 50 masses in Latin and 20 in English. He has more than 1,000 musical compositions in the library of the University of the Philippines. Santos’ last musical work and only ballet composition, Melinda’s Masquerade, was performed in 1995, a year after his death. Santos passed away on November 4, 1994 in Swoyersville, Pennsylvania, USA. ALFREDO BUENAVENTURA (1929 – ) Dr. Alfredo Santos Buenaventura, composer, conductor and teacher, was born in Sta. Maria, Bulacan on October 14, 1929. He grew up in a musical environment and became a band member in his hometown at a young age. He was drawn by his fascination with trumpets and trombones and became one of its arrangers and conductors. He was one of twenty boy sopranos of Tiples at Sto. Domingo Church from where he received his first significant musical training. At that time, he also wrote his first composition, Danza. A prolific composer, Buenaventura has composed over 50 major works including five full-length operas, operettas, dance dramas, cantatas, symphonies, concertos, ballets, overtures, prelude, fugues, and chamber music. His compositions and other creative works have transcended territorial, racial, and language barriers as these have been performed abroad by international virtuosi and religious groups. Many of his compositions are based on Filipino heroes, legends, and epics. He uses native songs, both tribal and folk, as themes of his music compositions. A number of his compositions are accompanied by Filipino indigenous instruments. Some of his major works include the operas Maria Makiling (1961), Diego Silang (1966), Prinsesa Urduha (1969), cantatas Ang Ating Watawat (1965), Pasko ng Barangay (1964), three piano concertos subtitled Celebration, Determination, and Exultation, and 100 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music symphonies such as Dakilang Lahi (1971), Gomburza (1981), and Rizal, the Great Malayan Antagonist (1990). His minor works numbering more than 50 cover mostly religious songs and hymns for specific celebrations such as the Sixteenth Centenary of St. Augustine, Mass for the 400th Year of the Augustinian Recollect, and the Philippine Music Festival. His other creative musical works have been commissioned by the Cultural Center of the Philippines, Metropolitan Theater, and the National Music Competitions for Young Artists (NAMCYA). Buenaventura’s compositional style rests mainly on his own set of musical ideas, wherein he creates a combination of contemporary and conventional materials. He keeps his melodies simple and understandable but with contemporary harmonies that enhance their complexity. He became an official organist of the Manila Cathedral in 1960. He became the Dean of the College of Music, Centro Escolar University. He is a member of the League of Filipino Composers. He received a number of awards in the music industry. He was twice an awardee of the Republic Cultural Heritage Award and the The Outstanding Filipino Award (TOFIL) for Music in 1995. CIPRIANO “RYAN” CAYABYAB (1954 – ) Ryan Cayabyab is a popular contemporary composer who also has classical compositions to his credit, such as Misa, Four Poems for Soprano and Piano, and Te Deum. His compositional style makes much use of syncopation, extended chords, and chromatic harmony. Among his numerous compositions are the award-winning Kay Ganda ng Ating Musika (1978), as well as the modern zarzuela Alikabok (2003), the opera Spoliarium with libretto by Fides Cuyugan-Asensio, and a variety of choral pieces and song cycles. He also produced a number of recordings, including the memorable album One, where he personally sang the unaccompanied songs on different tracks to produce 16 voices. Cayabyab was born on May 4, 1954 in Manila. He obtained his Bachelor of Music degree at the University of the Philippines’ College of Music. After which, he became a faculty member for Composition at the same University. He also served as the Executive and Artistic Director of the San Miguel Foundation for the Performing Arts, which oversaw the operations and programming of the San Miguel Philharmonic Orchestra and the San Miguel Master Chorale. At present, he continues to be a much sought-after professor, musical director, composer, arranger, and conductor in the Philippine concert and recording scenes. 101 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III SUMMARY With the European and American influences brought by our colonizers, it was inevitable that the musical styles of 20th century Western composers found their way into Philippine compositions. Francisco Buencamino founded the Centro Escolar de Señoritas, Conservatory of Music. He also created the Buencamino Music Academy in 1930. Nicanor Abelardo was one of his students. Expanding his career, Buencamino also ventured into musical direction and scoring, composing music for Sampaguita Pictures, LVN, and Excelsior. He also wrote several zarzuelas and kundiman. Francisco Santiago is known as the “Father of the Kundiman” and belongs to the “Triumvirate of Filipino Composers.” Nicanor Abelardo developed a style that combined European romanticism with chromaticism. He belongs to the “Triumvirate of Filipino Composers” together with Francisco Santiago and Antonio Molina. The Tanghalang Nicanor Abelardo (Main Theater) of the Cultural Center of the Philippines and the Abelardo Hall of the College of Music, University of the Philippines are named after him. Antonio Molina came to be known as the “Father of Philippine Impressionist Music,” while composer Lucio San Pedro integrated indigenous musical forms, conventions, and instruments in his works in the modern nationalistic style. Hilarion Rubio was a Filipino composer, music teacher, conductor, and clarinetist. His name was closely identified with his works for the orchestra, conductor for opera, ballet, dance recitals, and music for movies. Col. Antonino Buenaventura promoted Philippine music by extensively using folk materials in his works. He recorded folk and dance music around the country with Ramon Tolentino and National Artist for Dance Francisca Reyes Aquino. Buenaventura composed the music and did the notations for the folk dances as researched by Aquino. Rodolfo S. Cornejo was considered “the first Filipino composer who received an honory degree from a government recognized music school in the United States.” He was known for his “pianistic and compositional talent” by extemporizing a piano composition at the spur of the moment. Felipe P. de Leon wrote piano compositions, hymns, marches, art songs, chamber music, symphonic poems, overtures, band muic, school songs, orchestral works, operas, kundimans and zarsuelas. He was known as a nationalist composer who expressed the Philippines' cultural identity through his compositions. Lucio San Pedro is known as a “romantic nationalist.” He incorporated Philippine folk elements in his compositions with Western forms and harmony. His chords have a rich expressive tonality, as represented in his well-loved Sa Ugoy ng Duyan, a lullaby melody sung by his mother. Rosendo Santos Jr. is listed in the “New Groves Dictionary of Music and Musicians.” A prolific composer, his works include concerti, sonatas, symphonies, symphonic poems, five operas in Philippine dialect, numerous band overtures, 102 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music and more than 200 marches. He wrote 50 masses in Latin and 20 in English. He has more than 1,000 musical compositions in the library of the University of the Philippines. Alfredo Buenaventura is among the few composers in the Philippines who composed five full-length operas. He has his own set of ideas about music and composition. He created a combination of contemporary and conventional, kept his melodies simple and understandable, but he used contemporary harmonies to suit the intellectuals. Contemporary composer and conductor Ryan Cayabyab spans both popular and classical worlds with his pop, ballads, operas, zarzuela, orchestral, and choral compositions. WHAT TO KNOW 1. Discuss the lives and musical contributions of the following 20th century Filipino composers: a. Francisco Buencamino Sr. g. Rodolfo Cornejo b. Francisco Santiago h. Felipe Padilla de Leon Sr. c. Nicanor Abelardo i. Lucio San Pedro d. Antonio Molina j. Rosendo Santos Jr. e. Hilarion Rubio k. Alfredo Buenaventura f. Col. Antonino Buenaventura l. Ryan Cayabyab 2. Point out the characteristics of the musical style of the above-mentioned Filipino composers. Composer Characteristics of the Musical Style ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ 103 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III WHAT TO PROCESS A. Listening Activity 1. Your teacher will play excerpts of recordings of any (one composition) of the following works by Filipino song composers: a. Antonio Molina b. c. d. e. f. g. - Hatinggabi, Misa Antoniana, Grand Festival Mass, Ang Batingaw, Kundiman- Kundangan; String Quartet, Kung sa Iyong Gunita, Pandangguhan, Amihan, Awit ni Maria Clara, Larawan Nitong Pilipina Lucio San Pedro - Sa Ugoy ng Duyan, Suite Pastorale, Lahing Kayumanggi Ryan Cayabyab - Misa, Four Poems for Soprano and Piano, Te Deum, Kay Ganda ng Ating Musika, Limang Dipang Tao, Da Coconut Nut, Alikabok, Spoliarium, Kumukuti-kutitap Col. Antonino Buenaventura - Minuet, Mindanao Sketches, Divertimento for Piano and Orchestra, Variations and Fugue, and Greetings, Pandanggo sa Ilaw, Princesa ng Kumintang, Pandanggo ni Neneng Alfredo Buenaventura - Maria Makiling (1961), Diego Silang(1966), Prinsesa Urduha (1969); Ang Ating Watawat (1965), Pasko ng Barangay (1964); Dakilang Lahi (1971), Gomburza (1981), and Rizal, the Great Malayan Antagonist (1990. Rodolfo Cornejo - A la Juventud Filipina, Bailes de Ayer, Caprice on a Folksong, Cello Sonata, Cello Sonata, Ibong Adarna, Kandingan, Malakas at Maganda Overture, Okaka, Oriental Fantasy, Ibong Adarna, Piano Concerto Nos. 1,2,3, Ruby, Song of the Miners, Hilarion Rubio - Bulaklaken, Dance of the Nymphs Rondo, Florente at Laura, Halik, Danza, Ang Konsyerto (ballet), Ang Magsasaka, Bukang Liwayway, Concertino in C (Marimba and piano), Filipinas Kong Mahal, Hatulan Mo Ako, Ginintuang Araw, In a Tropcal Sea, Filipino Youth, Nela, Light, Narra, Mutya ng Silangan 104 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music h. Rosendo Santos Jr. Melinda’s Masquerade i. Nicanor Abelardo - Nasaan Ka Irog?, Bituing Marikit, Mutya ng Pasig, Paskong Anong Saya, Cavatina, Kundiman ng Luha, Magbalik Ka Hirang j. Francisco Santiago- Kundiman (Anak Dalita), Himutok, Pakiusap, Madaling Araw, Sakali Man, Pilipinas Kong Mahal, Ano Kaya ang Kapalaran? k. Felipe de Leon Sr. - Bulaklak Alitaptap, Bagong Lipunan, Payapang Daigdig, Pasko na Naman, Noche Buena, Kay Tamis ng Buhay, Sapagkat Mahal Kita l. Francisco Buencamino - Harana, Pandanggo ni Neneng, Collar de Sampaguita, Dulces las Horas, Mayon (Fantasia de Concierto), My Soul’s Lament, Larawan, Mazurka, Boholana, Mi Bandera, Princesa ng Kumintang, Maligayang Bati, Ang Bukang Liwayway, Pandanggo ni Neneng, Ang Bagong Balitaw, Himig ng Nayon, Damdamin (Romance), and Pizzicato Caprice. 2. 3. 4. B. Listen carefully to each excerpt and recognize the different musical styles of the composers. Analyze the music. Take note of the elements of music present: rhythm, melody, tempo, dynamics, texture, harmony, form, and timbre. Choose a composition that you like. Write a short reaction paper on it in relation to its musical elements. Evaluation of Listening Activity “Name the Composer, Title of the Music, Musical Style, and Description” 1. 2. 3. 4. After the above Listening Activity, your teacher will prepare selected excerpts of compositions by Lucio San Pedro, Antonino Buenaventura, Alfredo Buenaventura, Antonio Molina, Rodolfo Cornejo, Francisco Buencamino, Hilarion Rubio, Rosendo Santos Jr, Francisco Santiago, Nicanor Abelardo, Felipe Padilla de leon Sr., and Ryan Cyabyab. The class will be divided into four teams, with each team forming a line. As your teacher plays a few measures of the first excerpt, the first student in each line goes to the board and writes the name of the composer. The second student will write the title of the music. The third student will write the musical style. Then, the fourth student will write a description of the music in one phrase. The team that writes the correct answers first, scores four (4) points. 105 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III 5. 6. 7. The same procedure goes on until all the students in the line have had their turn. One student will be assigned as the scorer. The team with the highest score is the winner. In case of a tie, the first team to finish is the winner. The scorer will announce the winners and then asks them this question: What was the most significant thing that you have learned from this activity? WHAT TO UNDERSTAND: SOLO, DUET, TRIO, QUARTET, QUINTET 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compose a simple song. Write the lyrics and the music. You may adapt a certain melody from the compositions of the traditional composers that you like. Write the new lyrics to fit the music. You may include an accompaniment such as guitar, flute, recorder, keyboard, drums, tambourine, maracas or improvise musical instruments from the environment. You may sing it a capella (without accompaniment) or with accompaniment. Perform your composition or your song adaptation in class. What motivated you to compose or adapt the music of that song? WHAT TO PERFORM A. Singing Activity Individual or in groups: Sing any of the compositions of Lucio San Pedro, Col. Antonino Buenaventura, Alfredo Buenaventura, Antonio Molina, Rodolfo Cornejo, Francisco Buencamino Sr., Hilarion Rubio, Rosendo Santos Jr., Nicanor Abelardo, Francisco Santiago, Felipe Padilla de Leon, and Ryan Cayabyab. If individual activity, choose one composition that you will perform. If group activity, do the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Your teacher will divide the class into four groups. Your group will choose any traditional composer. Research further on his compositions, if needed. Select one composition that you like best or you are familiar with, or you may learn a new song. Choose your group’s musical director. Sing the song in class with your groupmates interpreting the music with appropriate pitch, rhythm, style, timbre, dynamics, melody, texture, harmony, and expression. You may add instrumental accompaniment like guitar, flute, recorder, maracas, tambourine, or keyboard. 106 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music 6. You may bring a minus one music in CD, or from your mobile phone or on USB. 7. You may improvise simple vocal or instrumental accompaniment/s to the songs you have chosen. 8. You may explore ways of creating sounds as instrumental accompaniment to the song from a variety of sources or from the environment. 9. Your teacher will choose the “Best Singing Group” based on musicianship (musical elements) 60%, presentation impact and showmanship 20%, ensemble coordination and organization 20%. 10. All students will evaluate by rating each other’s performance and their own performance. Evaluation of Singing Activity Rating Scale: 5 - Very Good 4 - Good 3 - Fair 2 - Poor 1 - Needs Follow up Rating the other performers (if individual activity): 1. 2. 3. How well did the performers express the message of the songs? How well did the performers pronounce the lyrics of the songs? How well did the performers sing based on musical elements and style: a. pitch b. rhythm c. style d. expression e. dynamics f. melody g. timbre h. texture i. harmony __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ Rating the group members (if group activity): 1. 2. 3. How well did the group members express the message of the songs? How well did the group members sing? How well did the group members participate? __________ __________ __________ 107 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC B.  Quarter III Creating and Performing Activities: Musical 1. Your teacher will divide the class into four groups. Each group choose a traditional composer that was discussed in class. Research further on his life and works. 2. Create a contemporary musical on the life of your chosen composer. Incorporate some of his compositions (melodic fragments) in the musical and story. 3. Improvise simple vocal or instrumental accompaniments (example: guitar, keyboard, percussion) for the songs that you have chosen. 4. Explore ways of creating sounds as accompaniment on a variety of sources or from the environment for the creation of the musical. 5. Perform the musical in class. Your teacher will choose the “Best Group Musical Performance” based on musicianship (musical elements) 50%, audience impact and showmanship 20%, ensemble coordination and organization 20%, stage discipline or deportment 10%. Evaluation of Creating and Performing Activities: Musical Rating Scale: 5 - Very Good 4 - Good 3 - Fair 2 - Poor 1 - Needs Follow up Rating the other performers / groups: 1. 2. How well did the performers express the message of the musical? __________ How well did the performers act in the musical based on the following: a. voice quality b. expression c. stage presence d. audience impact e. mastery of the musical g. musical elements (rhythm, melody, dynamics) h. technique i. showmanship __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ 108 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music Rating your own group members: 1. 2. 3. 4. How well did your group members express the message of the musical? How well did your group members perform? How well did your group members coordinate with each other during the performance in the ensemble? How well did your group organize yourselves in the ensemble? __________ __________ __________ __________ Rating myself: 1. 2. 3. 4. How well did I express the message of the musical? How well did I perform with my group? How well did I coordinate with the other members during the performance in the ensemble? How well did I cooperate in the ensemble? __________ __________ __________ __________ 109 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III NEW MUSIC COMPOSERS C omposers of experimental New Music in the Philippines include Jose Maceda, Lucrecia Kasilag, Ramon Santos, Manuel Maramba, Jerry Dadap, Francisco Feliciano, Josefino “Chino” Toledo, and Jonas Baes. They retained the Filipino spirit by incorporating traditional music forms as well as indigenous rhythms and instruments in their compositions. JOSE MACEDA (1917 – 2004) National Artist for Music Jose Maceda was born in Manila on January 17, 1917. He started his music studies at the Academy of Music in Manila. Later, he went to Paris to study with Alfred Cortot. He eventually pursued advanced studies in the USA with E. Robert Schmitz and earned a Doctorate Degree in Ethnomusicology from UCLA. Maceda’s musical style changed when he encountered the music of the indigenous tribes of Mindoro in 1953. He then embarked on his life’s work, dedicated to the understanding and preservation of Filipino traditional music. His extensive research and fieldwork resulted in an immense collection of recorded music taken from the remote mountain villages and far-flung inland communities in the Philippines. Although his compositional approach tended to be Western in style, Maceda combined sounds of the environment with ethnic instruments. His compositions were usually for large groups of musicians. Among his works are Ugma-Ugma (1963), a work for voice and ethnic instruments; Agungan (1975), a piece for six gong families; Pagsamba (1968), a musical ritual for a circular auditorium using several ethnic percussion instruments; Cassettes 100 (1971), a composition for 100 cassette tape recorders; and Ugnayan (1974), an ethnic piece played at the same time over several radio stations. Considered as the first Filipino avant garde composer, he also worked at a recording studio in Paris in 1958 which specialized in musique concrète. During this period, he met Pierre Boulez, Karlheinz Stockhausen, and Iannis Xenakis, considered the musical giants of this musical genre.Maceda served as Professor of Piano and Musicology at the College of Music, University of the Philippines from 1952 to 1990. He was appointed Executive Director of its Center for Ethnomusicology in 1997. In the same year, he was conferred the honor of National Artist for Music. He passed away in Manila on May 5, 2004. 110 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music UDLOT-UDLOT (Excerpt) Jose Maceda LUCRECIA R. KASILAG (1918 – 2008) National Artist for Music Lucrecia R. Kasilag was born in San Fernando, La Union on August 31, 1918. She went to Manila to pursue a degree in Music at the Philippine Women’s University. She then obtained her Master’s degree from the Eastman School of Music in New York, USA. Her compositions were influenced by her professors Irving McHose and Wayne Barlow. Kasilag’s compositions demonstrated a fusion of Eastern and Western styles in using instruments, melody, harmony, and rhythm. She is particularly known for incorporating indigenous Filipino instruments into orchestral productions. 111 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III Among Kasilag’s many compositions are Toccata for Percussion and Winds (1959), composed for indigenous Muslim instruments and Western instruments; The Legend of the Sarimanok (1963), composed for chamber orchestra and Philippine ethnic instruments; Divertissement and Concertante (1960), compositions for piano and orchestra combining Western and Eastern forms, harmonies, and intervals; and Dularawan (1969), a musical drama combining a dance solo with a chorus and an ethnic orchestra. Her other works include compositions for piano, instrumental ensemble, and chorus. She was equally admired in the academe as a former Dean of the College of Music and Fine Arts, Philippine Women’s University. In the cultural field, she was the President of the Cultural Center of the Philippines. In the dance circles, she was the President and Music Director of the Bayanihan Dance Company. She also served as Chairman of the Asian Composers’ League and the League of Filipino Composers. She is credited for having written more than 200 musical works, ranging from folksongs to opera to orchestral works, which she continued to compose for the rest of her life. For all these outstanding achievements, she was conferred the title of National Artist for Music in 1989. She passed away in Manila in August 2008. DIVERTISSEMENT (Excerpt) Lucrecia R. Kasilag Edited 112 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music RAMON P. SANTOS (1941 – ) National Artist for Music Ramon P. Santos was born in Pasig on February 25, 1941. He completed his Bachelor of Music degree at the College of Music, University of the Philippines. He finished his Master of Music degree at Indiana University, USA. He received his Doctor of Philosophy degree in Composition at the State University of New York, USA. He had also pursued graduate studies in Ethnomusicology at the University of Illinois, USA. Santos’ compositional style features chromaticism, music seria, and electronic components, combined with indigenous Philippine music elements. His works include Ding Ding Nga Diyawa, Nabasag na Banga at Iba’t iba pang Pinag-ugpong-ugpong na Pananalita sa Wikang Pilipino para sa Labing Anim na Tinig, and L’BAD. He had done extensive research on the gamelan music of Java as well as the traditional music of the Ibaloi, Maranao, Mansaka, Bontoc, Yakan, and Boholano tribes in the Philippines. Santos held the position of Dean of the UP College of Music from 1978 to 1988. At present, he is the head of the UP Center of Ethnomusicology and was appointed Professor Emeritus of the same institution. He was conferred the title of National Artist for Music in 2014. L’BAD Ramon P. Santos 113 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III FR. MANUEL MARAMBA, OSB (1936 – ) Fr. Manuel Perez Maramba, OSB is one of the most accomplished musicians and liturgists in the Philippines emerging during the second half of the 20th century. He was born on July 4, 1936 in Pangasinan. When he was 11 years old, he gave his first public performance at the Bamboo Organ in Las Piñas. He became the official accompanist of the Las Piñas Boys Choir at 14 years old. He was the youngest finalist to participate in the National Music Competitions for Young Artists (NAMCYA) piano competition in 1978. Immediately after high school, he was sent on full scholarship to the University for Music and Performing Arts in Graz, Austria. There, he earned with distinction the degree of Master of Arts in Church Music. He also received a Teacher’s Certificate in Organ. His musical career led him to the United States, where he performed at Carnegie Hall at the age of 19. After finishing his Bachelor of Music degree major in Piano at the Conservatory of Music, University of Sto. Tomas (UST), Fr. Maramba pursued his studies abroad where he received his Master of Music degree, Artist Diploma, Bachelor of Music degree in Composition, and Teacher’s Certificate in Theory from the Peabody Conservatory of Johns Hopkins University, USA. He received a Master’s degree of Musical Arts in Performance from Yale University’s School of Music, USA. He also studied sacred music at the Kirchenmusikschule in Regensburg, Germany. He took further lessons in piano, organ, and the harpsichord at the Hochschule fur Musik in Vienna, Austria. Fr Maramba is a monk at Our Lady of Montserrat Abbey in Manila. He was the former director of the Paul VI Institute of Liturgy in Malaybalay, Bukidnon during which he composed the music for the papal mass. A prominent canon lawyer, he served on the National Appellate Matrimonial Tribunal. He was also a faculty member at the UST Conservatory of Music, St. Scholatica’s College, and Sta. Isabel College. He has composed operas like Aba!, Sto. Nino, La Naval, and Lord Takayama Ukon. His other major compositions are the music for Awakening which was commissioned by Ballet Philippines and music for Philippine Ballet Theater’s production of Seven Mansions; three masses – Papal Mass for World Youth Day, 1995; Mass in Honor of St. Lorenzo Ruiz, and the Mass in Honor of the Sto. Nino; three cantatas – St. Lorenzo Ruiz, St. Benedict, and St. Scholastica; Three Psalms; A hymn in honor of St. Lorenzo Ruiz, and the official hymn of the 1996 National Eucharistic Congress; a zarzuela entitled Ang Sarswela sa San Salvador, and three orchestral works – Pugad Lawin, The Virgin of Naval, and Transfiguration. 114 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music JERRY DADAP (1935 – ) Jerry Dadap, the first Filipino composer to conduct his own works at the Carnegie Recital Hall in New York City, was born on November 5, 1935 in Hinunangan, Southern Leyte. He earned his Bachelor’s Degree in Music, major in Composition at the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines (UP) in 1964. In 1968, he went to the USA on a study-observation grant from the Music Promotion Foundation of the Philippines. While there, he received a full scholarship grant from the United Presbyterian Church of USA from 1969 to 1971. During that time, he obtained his Postgraduate Diploma in Composition at the Mannes College of Music in New York, USA. Upon his return to the Philippines in 1971, he taught composition, ear training, and orchestration at the Sta. Isabel College of Music in Manila. Dadap started composing when he was still studying at Silliman University in the southern city of Dumaguete. Among his numerous compositions are The Passionate and the Wild (1960), Mangamuyo I (1976) and Mangamuyo II (1977), The Redemption (1974), Five Little Fingers (1975), Tubig ng Buhay (1986), Dakilang Pagpapatawad (1986), Andres Bonifacio, Ang Dakilang Anak Pawis, Ang Pag-ibig ng Diyos, Balitaw Nos. 1-7, Lamang Epic, Lorenzo Ruiz, Chorale Symphonic Ode Nos. 1 and 2, Aniway at Tomaneg, Song Cycle, Nos. 1-4, Choral Cycle Nos. 1-3, and Diyos Ama ay Purihin. His major works as composer-conductor were performed at the concert “LAHI” that featured works by local major composers. FRANCISCO F. FELICIANO (1942 – 2014) National Artist for Music Francisco F. Feliciano, avant garde composer and conductor for band and chorus, was born on February 19, 1942 in Morong, Rizal. His first exposure to music was with the Morriz Band, a brass ensemble established and owned by his father, Maximiano Feliciano. He started his music career in the high school band where he had played the cymbals and the clarinet. Feliciano obtained his Teacher’s Diploma in Composition and Conducting at the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines (UP) in 1964, and a Bachelor of Music degree 115 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III major in Composition in 1967. Subsequent degrees include a Master in Music Composition from the University of the Philippines, a Diploma in Music Composition from the Hochschule der Kunst in Berlin, Germany, and a Master of Musical Arts and Doctorate in Music Composition from Yale University School of Music, USA. He studied composition with Jacob Druckman, Isang Yun, H.W. Zimmerman and Krystof Penderecki. Feliciano became the choir conductor and instructor in music fundamentals at St. Andrews Seminary in Quezon City. He became an instructor at the UP Conservatory of Music and conducted the UP Symphony Orchestra. He was the musical director of the movie Ang Bukas ay Atin and provided orchestration for a number of musical productions including My Fair Lady and various Philippine productions. Feliciano composed more than 30 major works, including the musical dramas Sikhay sa Kabila ng Paalam, Ashen Wings, and the monumental three-act opera La Loba Negra (1984). He also wrote music for the orchestra such as Prelude and Toccata (1973), Fragments (1976), Life of Wartime Filipino Hero Jose Abad Santos, and the ballet Yerma (1982). Among his other large works are Transfiguration and Missa Mysterium for orchestra and large chorus. He has composed several prize winning works such as Pokpok Alimpako, (a favorite piece of choirs in international choral competitions), Salimbayan, Umiinog, and Walang Tinag (Perpetuum I mobile) which was premiered at the ISCM Festival in New York City, USA. His latest choral works, Pamugún and Restless, have been performed by Filipino choirs in various choral festivals in Europe. In 1977, he was given a John D. Rockefeller III Award in Music Composition. Feliciano composed hundreds of liturgical pieces, mass settings, hymns, and songs for worship. He founded the Asian Institute for Liturgy and Music (AILM) in Quezon City, a school for church musicians, and supervised the publication of a new Asian hymnal containing mostly works of Asian composers. He was conferred the title of National Artist for Music in 2014. He died on September 19, 2014. JOSEFINO TOLEDO (1959 – ) Josefino “Chino” Toledo is a recognized figure in the Asian contemporary art music scene. He received his Master of Music degree from the Cleveland Institute of Music, USA. Among his awards are the following: “Ten Outstanding Young Men” (TOYM); “International Award for the Arts”; “Civitella Ranieri Fellowship in Italy”; and the “Chancellor Awards for Outstanding Musical Works,” University of the Philippines. 116 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music Toledo served at the Pangkat Kawayan (a bamboo orchestra) from 1966 to 1979 and the Philippine Youth Orchestra (PYO) in 1977-1978. A principal percussionist of the Manila Symphony Orchestra in 1980-1983, he later became music director and principal conductor in 1985. He attended the 1984 International Computer Music Conference in France. He was the country’s representative to the 1980 Young Composers Conference in HongKong, the ASEAN Composers Forum on Traditional Music in 1989 (Philippines) and 1993 (Singapore), the 1995 ASEAN Composers Workshop (Indonesia), and the 1996 International Composers Workshop (Gaudeamus, Amsterdam). He was also a fellow at the 1990 Pacific Music Festival and Pacific Composers Conference (Japan). Toledo is a Music Professor at the College of Music, University of the Philippines (UP). He is the founding music director of the Metro Manila Community Orchestra, the UP Festival Orchestra, and the Crosswave Symphony Orchestra. He is noted for conducting the premiere performances of the works of Filipino composers as well as other Asian composers. His own music, including works for chorus, orchestra, chamber ensemble, solo instrument, and music theater have been performed by well-known international artists and ensembles. AUIT (Excerpt) Josefino Toledo 117 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III JONAS BAES (1961 – ) Jonas Baes was born in Los Baños, Laguna in 1961. He enrolled at the College of Music, University of the Philippines (UP) in 1977 as a student of Ramon P. Santos.While at UP, he encountered the works of Jose Maceda and attended several seminar-workshops of visiting lecturers. He researched on the music of the Iraya-Mangyan people of Mindoro, which later became the inspiration for his compositions. From 19921994, he studied with Mathias Spahlinger in Freiburg, Germany. Baes is known for writing music utilizing unorthodox musical instruments such as beanpod rattles, leaves, iron-nail chimes, and various Asian instruments such as bamboo scrapers, bamboo flutes, and vocal music using Asian vocal techniques. His early works in the 1980s were influenced by Maceda in the use of large numbers of performers. In the 1990s, he experimented with various methods by which the audience became integral in the performance. It was also typical for social theory to influence the work of Baes who has made a mark on contemporary music and cultural politics in the Asian region. Some of Baes’ musical compositions include: Imagined Community, after Benedict Anderson for four bamboo scrapers, bamui trail caller, sarunai for oboe, khaen for mouth organ, and about a hundred iron nail chimes distributed among the audience; 1997/2001; WALA (Nothingness) for seven or hundreds of men’s voices 1997/2001; DALUY (Flow)interval music for five animator-percussionists and about a hundred bird whistles distributed among the audience, 1994; IBO-IBON (birdwoman) for dancer wearing small bells, two large wind chimes passed around the audience, four animatorcallers, and iron nail chimes played by the audience (1996); SALAYSAY, for solo voice, three percussionists, and pairs of pebbles distributed among the audience; PATANGISBUWAYA (and the crocodile weeps) for four sub-contrabass recorders or any blown instruments 2003; PANTAWAG (music for calling people) for 15 bamboo scrapers, 15 palm leaves, and 20 muffled “forest” voices 1981; and BASBASAN (blessing) for 20 bean-pod rattles and 20 muffled men’s voices 1983. Baes received the Gawad Chancellor para sa Pinakamakusay na Mananaliksik (Hall of Fame, 2003) from the University of the Philippines. He is currently an Associate Professor in Composition and Theory at the UP College of Music as well as an ethnomusicologist, cultural activist, and writer. 118 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music SUMMARY Jose Maceda’s musical style shifted when he encountered the music of the indigenous tribes of Mindoro in 1953. He then embarked on his life’s work, dedicated to the understanding and preservation of Filipino traditional music. His extensive research and fieldwork resulted in an immense collection of recorded music taken from the remote mountain villages and far-flung inland communities in the Philippines. Lucrecia Kasilag’s compositional style demonstrated a fusion of Eastern and Western styles in using instruments, melody, harmony, and rhythm. She is particularly known for incorporating indigenous Filipino instruments into orchestral productions. Ramon Santos’ compositional style features chromaticism, music seria, and electronic components, combined with indigenous Philippine music elements. Fr. Manuel Maramba OSB, one of the most accomplished musicians in the Philippines, is best known as a liturgical composer whose body of works lean towards religious figures and events. His versatility as a pianist, composer, arranger, theorist, and teacher is widely recognized in the local musical scene. Jerry Dadap, the first Filipino composer to conduct his own works at the Carnegie Recital Hall in New York City, Francisco Feliciano is one of Asia’s leading figures in liturgical music, having composed hundreds of liturgical pieces, mass settings, hymns, and songs for worship. At the Asian Institute for Liturgy and Music, a school for church musicians which he founded, he supervised the publication of a new Asian hymnal containing mostly works of Asian composers. Josefino Toledo is the founding music director of the Metro Manila Community Orchestra, the UP Festival Orchestra, and the Crosswave Symphony Orchestra. He is noted for conducting the premiere performances of the works of Filipino composers as well as other Asian composers. His own music has been performed by well-known international artists and ensembles. Jonas Baes, Associate Professor in Composition and Theory, ethnomusicologist, cultural activist, and writer, has explored innovative territories and unusual musical treatments in his works. 119 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III WHAT TO KNOW 1. Research and describe the characteristics of New Music. 2. Discuss the lives and works of following 20th century Filipino composers and performers: a. b. c. d. 3. Jose Maceda Lucrecia Kasilag Ramon Santos Fr. Manuel Maramba, OSB e. f. g. h. Jerry Dadap Francisco Feliciano Josefino Toledo Jonas Baes Point out the characteristics of the musical style of the above-mentioned Filipino composers. Composer Characteristics of the Musical Style ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ 120 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music WHAT TO PROCESS A. Listening Activity 1. Your teacher will play excerpts of recordings of any (one composition) of the following works by Filipino new music composers: a. Jose Maceda - Ugma-Ugma; Agungan ; Pagsamba; Ugnayan; Udlot Udlot b. Lucrecia Kasilag - Toccata for Percucssion and Winds; The Legend of the Sarimanok; Divertissement and Concertante; Dularawan c. Josefino Toledo - 2nd Og-og; Abe; Ako ang Daigdig; Alitaptap; Aliwiw; Awiting Bayan; Barasyon; Asia; Kah-non; Humigit Kumulang; Lima; Mi-sa; Missa de gallo; Oyog-Oyog; Musika para sa; Pasyon at Buhay; Pompyang; Pintigan; Pilipino Komiks; Sigaw; Tatluhan; Auit, Ub-og; Ug-nay; Tula-li d. Francisco Feliciano - Sikhay sa Kabila ng Paalam; Ashen Wings; La Loba Negra; Prelude and Toccata ; Fragments; Yerma; The life of wartime Filipino hero, Jose Abad Santos; Transfiguration; Missa Mysterium; Pokpok Alimpako; Salimbayan; Umiinog, Walang Tinag; Pamugún and Restless e. Jerry Dadap - The Passionate and the Wild; Mangamuyo I) and Mangamuyo II; The Redemption; Five Little Fingers; Tubig ng Buhay; Dakilang Pagpapatawad; Andres Bonifacio, Ang Dakilang Anak Pawis; Ang Pag-ibig ng Diyos; Balitaw Nos. 1-7; Lam-ang Epic; Lorenzo Ruiz; Chorale Symphonic Ode Nos. 1 and 2; Aniway at Tomaneg; Song Cycle, Nos. 1-4; Choral Cycle Nos. 1-3; Diyos Ama ay Purihin; Lam-ang Epic; Mangamuyo I and II; Five Little Fingers; Tubig ng Buhay; The Redemption. f. Fr. Manuel Maramba - Aba!, Sto. Nino; La Naval; Lord Takayama Ukon; Awakening ; Seven Mansions; Papal Mass for World Youth Day, 1995; Mass in Honor of St. Lorenzo Ruiz; Mass in Honor of the Sto. Nino; cantatas St. Lorenzo Ruiz, St. Benedict, and St. Scholastica; Three Psalms—A hymn in honor of St. Lorenzo Ruiz, and the official hymn of the 1996 National Eucharistic Congress; Ang Sarswela sa San Salvador; Pugad Lawin; The Virgin of Naval; and Transfiguration. 121 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC B.  Quarter III g. Ramon Santos - Ding Ding ng a Di ya wa ; Nab as ag n a B an ga a t Ib a’t i ba p an g P in ag - ug po ng -u g po ng n a Pananalita sa Wikang Pilipino para sa labing anim na tinig, and L’BAD h. Jonas Baes - WALA (Nothingness); DALUY (flow); IBOIBON (Birdwoman); SALAYSAY; PATANGIS-BUWAYA ; PANTAWAG ; BASBASAN (Blessing). 2. Listen carefully to each excerpt and be able to recognize the different musical elements and styles of the composers. 3. Analyze the music focusing on the elements of music present, such as rhythm, melody, tempo and dynamics, texture and harmony, form, and timbre. 4. Choose a composition that you like. Write a reaction paper on it Evaluation of Listening Activity “Name the Composer, Title of the Music, Musical Style, and Description” 1. After the above ListeningActivity, your teacher will prepare selected excerpts of compositions by the following: Josefino Toledo, Ramon Santos, Jose Maceda, Fr. Manuel Maramba, Lucrecia Kasilag, Francisco Feliciano, Jerry Dadap, and Jonas Baes. 2. The class will be divided into four teams, with each team forming a line. 3. As your teacher plays a few measures of the first excerpt, the first student in each line goes to the board and writes the name of the composer. The second student will write the title of the music. The third student will write the musical style. Then, the fourth student will write a description of the music in one phrase. 4. The team that writes the correct answers first, scores four (4) points. 5. The same procedure goes on until all the students in the line have had their turn. 6. One student will be assigned as the scorer. The team with the highest score is the winner. In case of a tie, the first team to finish is the winner. 7. The scorer will announce the winners and then asks them this question: What was the most significant thing that you have learned from this activity? 122 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music WHAT TO UNDERSTAND: SOLO, DUET, TRIO, QUARTET, QUINTET 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Your teacher will divide you into groups. Compose a simple song incorporating indigenous music and folksongs or you may adapt a certain melody from the compositions of the New Music composers that you like. Write the new lyrics to fit the music. You may include an accompaniment or improvised musical instruments. Sing it a capella (without accompaniment) or with accompaniment. Perform your composition or song adaptation in class. Choreograph dance movements by interpreting the music of the new composer that you have chosen, if needed. Perform in class. Write a reaction papaer on “How did you feel in our incorporating our indigenous music to your compositions or song adaptations.” Submit it in class next meeting. WHAT TO PERFORM Creating and Performing Activities: Musical 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Your teacher will divide the class into four groups. Each group choose a traditional composer that was discussed in class. Research further on his life and works. Create a contemporary musical on the life of your chosen composer. Incorporate some of his compositions (melodic fragments) in the musical and story. Improvise simple vocal or instrumental accompaniments (example: guitar, keyboard, percussion) to the songs that you have chosen. Explore ways of creating sounds as accompaniment on a variety of sources or from the environment for the creation of the musical. Perform the musical in class. Your teacher will choose the “Best Group Musical Performance” based on musicianship (musical elements) 50%, audience impact and showmanship 20%, ensemble coordination and organization 20%, stage discipline or deportment 10%. 123 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III Evaluation of Creating and Performing Activities: Musical Rating Scale: 5 - Very Good 4 - Good 3 - Fair 2 - Poor 1 - Needs Follow up Rating the other performers / groups: 1. 2. How well did the performers express the message of the musical? How well did the performers sing and act in the musical based on the following: a. voice quality b. expression c. stage presence d. audience impact e. mastery of the musical f. pitch g. rhythm h. style i. acting __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ Rating your own group members: 1. 2. 3. How well did your group members express the message of the musical? How well did your group members perform? How well did your group members participate? __________ __________ __________ Rating myself: 1. 2. 3. 4. How well did I express the message of the musical? __________ How well did I perform with my group? __________ How well did I coordinate with the other members during the performance in the ensemble? __________ How well did I cooperate in the ensemble? __________ 124 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music SONG COMPOSERS T he 20th century Filipino song composers/lyricists include Levi Celerio, Constancio de Guzman, Mike Velarde Jr., Ernani Cuenco, Restie Umali, George Canseco, Angel Peña, Leopoldo Silos Sr., Santiago Suarez. Together, they had produced a memorable output of traditional Filipino love songs, music for the movies, and materials for contemporary arrangements and concert repertoire. LEVI CELERIO (1910 – 2002) National Artist for Literature and Music Prolific lyricist and composer Levi Celerio was named National Artist for Music and Literature in 1997. Also a violinist, he had written the lyrics for over 4,000 songs in his lifetime, including many for film. A great number of kundimans and Filipino love songs have lyrics written by him, most notable of which are Dahil sa Iyo, Buhat, and Ang Pasko ay Sumapit. Celerio was known for creating music with a mouth-blown leaf Celerio was born in Tondo on April 30, 1910. He studied at the Academy of Music in Manila under a scholarship. Later, he went on to join the Manila Symphony Orchestra. Aside from writing his own lyrics, he also translated and re-wrote the lyrics of folksongs to traditional melodies like Maliwanag Na Buwan from Ilocos, Ako ay May Singsing from Pampanga, and Alibangbang from the Visayas. His achievements include a citation in the Guinness Book of World Records for being the only person to make music with a mouth-blown leaf. He will forever be remembered through his lyrics for songs such as Ang Pipit (music by Lucio D. San Pedro); Bagong Pagsilang (music by Felipe Padilla de Leon); Sa Ugoy ng Duyan (music by Lucio D. San Pedro); Misa de Gallo (music by J. Balita); Itik-itik (folk song); Tinikling (folk song), among others. Celerio passed away on April 2, 2002. 125 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III CONSTANCIO DE GUZMAN (1903 – 1982) Constancio Canseco de Guzman was born on November 11, 1903 in Guiguinto, Bulacan. He grew up in Manila where he studied piano and composition under Nicanor Abelardo. At the prodding of his father, he went to law school but switched to pursue and finish a BS Commerce degree at Jose Rizal College in 1928. He passed the certified public accountants (CPA) board examinations in 1932. After he took the CPA board exam, he started working for the movies. Acknowledged as the “Dean of Filipino Movie Composers and Musical Directors,” De Guzman became the music director of movie production companies like Sampaguita, LVN, Royal, Excelsior, Lea, and Tagalog Ilang-Ilang Productions. His “unexpected” hit music, Panaginip, paved the way for him to record hundreds of songs, principally under Villar and Columbia Records. In 1948, his song Ang Bayan Ko and Kung Kita’y Kapiling won the gold medal at the Paris International Fair. Bayan Ko was later adopted as the symbolic song of the People Power Movement of 1986. The same song won for him the Awit Award for Best Filipino Lyricist. Some of De Guzman’s notable compositions include Babalik Ka Rin, Ang Tangi Kong Pag-ibig, Birheng Walang Dambana, Maalaala Mo Kaya, and Sa Piling Mo. De Guzman passed away on August 16, 1982. MIGUEL “MIKE” VELARDE JR. (1913 – 1986) Miguel “Mike” Guison Velarde Jr, composer, conductor, movie actor, and musical director was born in Manila on October 23, 1913 as the second of two children of Dr. Miguel Velarde, Sr. and Dolores Guison. His family moved to Zamboanga when he was only one year old and where he spent the succeeding eighteen years of his life. His exposure to the unaffected and unpretentious environment of Basilan and Zamboanga had influenced his creative imagination, mainly nurtured by his mother who became his first music teacher in piano and violin when he was six years old. Velarde studied at the Zamboanga Normal School, where he became a member of the school orchestra and graduated as valedictorian. He then went to Manila to pursue medicine at the University of the Philippines, but later realized that it was music that he truly loved. He learned the basics of harmony and composition from Antonio Molina and Ariston Avelino as he further deepened his musical knowledge through self-study. 126 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music Later, when his father however objected to his plans to pursue a music career, he went on to support himself as a bus conductor to realize his dream. He later got a job at a radio station where he was featured as singer and jazz composer in its morning and evening programs. He also opened a jazz school and became song editor for the Philippines Free Press. Velarde eventually went into writing Tagalog songs, composing the song Ugoy-Ugoy Blues which opened opportunities for him in the movies. He had a jazz band known as “Mike Velarde’s Jazztocrats.” He became editor of the Literary Song Movie Magazine. Velarde composed musical scores for Sampaguita Films’ movie productions and managed its advertising department. Among his most important works were Luksang Tagumpay, which received the FAMAS (Filipino Movie Arts and Sciences) Award for Best Picture (1960) and for which he wrote its story and screenplay, and Alaala Kita for Best Director (1961). He attributes substantive influence from American composer and songwriters Irving Berlin and Cole Porter. In subsequent years, Velarde created his own style as he composed highly melodious and romantic songs such as Ikaw, Lahat ng Araw, Habang Buhay, Minamahal Kita , Ikaw ay Akin, and Dahil Sa Iyo. In 1970, he won the Best Conductor award at the First International Popular Song Contest in Japan with his composition As Long as Forever. He received the Cultural Achievement Award in Popular Music from the Philippine Government Cultural Association in 1975 and the Gawad CCP Para Sa Sining in 1986. His other compositions include Buhat, Ikaw, Bituing Marikit, Minamahal Kita, Dating Sumpaan, Dalisay, Eternally Yours, and Gabi at Araw. Velarde passed away in 1986. SANTIAGO SUAREZ (1901 – 1964) Santiago Suarez was born in Sampaloc, Manila. He learned how to play the piano from his grandmother who was also a competent harpist, while his grandfather played the flute. He attended the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines and the Ateneo de Manila in Intramuros. He took private music lessons from Caetano Jacobe, Pedro Floriaga, and Nicanor Abelardo. Suarez’s compositions are a mixture of the soulful kundiman style and the lively strains of the countryside. The melodies are tonal and catchy, while the rhythms follow the regular meter with minimal tempo changes. His harmonies follow the traditional classical progression, making his compositions easy to understand without the complexities of form and structure. Some of his works are quite popular and heard even with today’s classical singers, pop singers, and choral groups. They include the following: Ligaya Ko, Pandanggo ni Neneng, Dungawin mo Hirang, Bakya Mo Neneng, Caprichosa, Sa Libis ng Nayon, Harana, Kataka-taka, Labandera Ko, Lakambini, Kamia, Ikaw ang Buhay 127 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III Ko!, Kay Lungkot nitong Hating-Gabi, and Mutya Niyaring Puso. Suarez passed away in 1964. RESTITUTO “RESTIE” UMALI (1916 – 1998) Restituto Aquino Umali was born in Paco, Manila on June 16, 1916. His early exposure to music was due to the influence of his father who taught him violin as well as his exposure to the regular family rondalla. He was also taught solfeggio and score reading at the Mapa High School where he became an active member of the school glee club and orchestra. Umali played the E-flat horn, trombone, and tuba when he was part of the UST (University of Santo Tomas) Band. He also taught choral arranging and orchestration at the UST Conservatory of Music. He majored in Composition and Conducting at the Conservatory of Music, University of the Philippines (UP) and Commerce at the Jose Rizal College. He even passed an electrician’s course at the Philippine School of Arts and Trades before embarking on a rewarding career as musical scorer for movies. During World War II, Umali took lessons in harmony from Felipe Padilla de Leon. Shortly after the war, he performed with the Manila Symphony Orchestra. He continued his studies in composition and conducting even while teaching at the UP Conservatory of Music. He was under the tutelage of noted composers such as Lucrecia Kasilag, Antonio Buenaventura, and Ramon Tapales. Umali arranged the Philippine national anthem and the local classic Kataka-taka for the Boston Pops Orchestra when it performed for the Philippine Independence Night in Boston in 1972. He composed approximately 120 movie theme songs and more than 250 scores for movies. His musical scoring career was capped by a Universal Pictures’ production of No Man Is An Island starred by Jeffrey Hunter and Barbara Perez. His musical scores for the movies Sa Bawat Pintig ng Puso (1964), Pinagbuklod ng Langit (1969), Mga Anghel na Walang Langit (1970), and Ang Alamat (1972) won for him “Best Musical Score” honors at the Filipino Academy of Movies Arts and Sciences (FAMAS Awards). He also garnered the “Best Music Awards” for Bitter-Sweet at the 1969 Manila Film Festival and Ang Agila at Ang Araw at the 1973 Olongapo Film Festival. Among Umali’s most popular songs are Saan Ka Man Naroroon, Alaala ng Lumipas, Ang Pangarap Ko’y Ikaw, Sa Libis ng Barrio, Di Ka Nag-iisa, and Paano Kita Lilimutin. He had arranged the performance of Maestro Federico Elizalde’s Manila Little Symphony aired on radio stations DZRH and DZPI, apart from his stint as musical director fof Sampaguita Pictures. 128 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music BAYAN KO (Excerpt) Constancio de Guzman, music / Corazon de Jesus, lyrics DAHIL SA IYO (Excerpt) Mike Velarde Jr., music / Dominador Santiago, lyrics / BAKYA MO NENENG (Excerpt) Santiago Suarez SAAN KA MAN NAROROON (Excerpt) Restie Umali, music / Levi Celerio, lyrics 129 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III ANGEL PEÑA (1921 – 2014) is a classical and jazz composer, arranger, and bass player. He is widely considered by modern Filipino jazz musicians as “one of the founders of traditional jazz in the Philippines.” A n g e l M a t i a s P e ñ a He was born was born on April 22, 1921 to a musical family. Peña learned solfeggio from his mother Rosario Velarde Matias. His mother was a schoolteacher who studied voice at the University of the Philippines. His father, Gregorio Cid Peña, played the violin. His grandfather was a respected guitar player. He grew up in Malabon which was then famous for its musicians and marching bands. At the age of 11 when his mother passed away, he was discouraged by his father to continue his musical pursuits. But, the boy persisted and proceeded to study music theory and composition. Peña wrote his first original jazz composition just before World War II erupted. He also wrote kundimans for the young women he would be courting. After the war, he became one of the most sought-after musical arrangers in Manila. He had also switched from guitar to bass. This switch led him to write orchestral background music for various musical ensembles. He also wrote musical scores for film companies, most notably LVN Pictures. As his interest in classical composition grew more intense, he formed a big band in 1956 for the Upsilon Sigma Phi’s traditional concert at the University of the Philippines. During that time, he composed Bagbagtulambing, a landmark in Philippine music. In 1959, the University of Santo Tomas launched a national symphonic composition contest open to Filipino composers. Peña’s entry Igorot Rhapsody won first prize the following year. Since then, he moved effortlessly between the jazz and classical idioms. In the mid-1960s during his 3-year stint in Hongkong, he earned a Licentiate with the Royal School of Music in London. Peña auditioned for the Honolulu Symphony Orchestra. He was immediately accepted as bassist and later as arranger in 1969. He would spend the next 28 years in Hawaii, where he continued to write his own music. As farewell homage, the Manila Symphony Orchestra performed his Concerto for Double Bass and Orchestra. In 1981 on the occasion of the 75th anniversary of Filipino presence in Hawaii, the Honolulu Symphony premiered his Concerto for Jazz Quartet and Orchestra with an all-star Filipino jazz quartet. The following year, the Cultural Center of the Philippines performed a concert of his classical works in his honor. Despite of his absence from Manila, local jazz groups 130 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music continued to play his compositions. The seeds that he had sown began to bear fruit. Now, a new generation of Filipino musicians are starting to discover the composer. When he finally came back to the Philippines, he started teaching scholars in Double Bass as an adjunct faculty member of the UP College of Music. He started collaborating with the UP Jazz Ensemble on a number of concerts. In 1998, a House Resolution from the State of Hawaii’s House of Representatives was passed to honor Peña for his contributions in the field of music as a world renowned jazz musician, musical arranger, and Hawaii’s own living classical composer. The Jazz Society of the Philippines-USA further gave him a Lifetime Achievement Award at the Third Annual Fil-Am Jazz Festival in Hollywood. Pena passed away on December 22, 2014. ERNANI CUENCO (1936 – 1988) National Artist for Music Ernani Joson Cuenco, composer, film scorer, musical director and music teacher, was conferred the National Artist Award for Music in 1999. His works embody a Filipino sense of musicality that contain the classical sound of the kundiman. Cuenco was born on May 10, 1936 in Malolos, Bulacan. As a boy, he was encouraged to learn the violin. He was mentored by his mother, his godmother Doña Belen Aldaba Bautista, and his first teacher, Jovita Tantoco. He earned his Bachelor’s Degree in Music, major in Piano at the UST Conservatory of Music in 1956. A UST scholarship grant in the same year enabled him to study the cello under Professor Modesto Marquiz, which he finished in 1965. In 1968, he completed his Master of Music degree at the Sta. Isabel College. From 1960 to 1968, Cuenco was a cellist at the Manila Symphony Orchestra under Dr. Hubert Zipper. Likewise, he played for the Filipino Youth Symphony Orchestra and the Manila Chamber Soloists from 1966 to 1970. His career as a musical director began in 1960 when he was discovered by then actor Joseph Estrada while he was playing as part of a band he had formed with friends at an exclusive restaurant in Makati. In 1963, Cuenco was sent as a delegate to the International Music Conference in Tokyo, Japan. Aside from being a composer and musical director, he was also a faculty member at the UST Conservatory of Music until his death on July 11, 1988. 131 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III To this day, Cuneco’s compositions are popular and well-loved, especially Gaano Ko Ikaw Kamahal and Bato sa Buhangin which he composed for films in honor of his wife. Aside from these signature pieces, Cuenco’s other songs include Nahan, Kahit na Magtiis, Diligin Mo ng Hamog ang Uhaw na Lupa, Pilipinas, Inang Bayan, Isang Dalangin, and Kalesa. GEORGE CANSECO (1934 – 2004) George Masangkay Canseco was born on April 23, 1934 in Naic, Cavite. He graduated with a Liberal Arts degree at the University of the East. After graduation, he worked for the Philippines Herald and the Associated Press as a journalist. He also worked as a “free-lance scriptwriter for hire” in Manila. Canseco was considered as “a nationally acclaimed composer of numerous popular classics.” He was commissioned by Former First Lady Imelda R. Marcos to compose a national tribute hymn entitled Ako Ay Pilipino (I Am A Filipino). He wrote the classic Kapantay Ay Langit, a theme from the awardwinning motion picture of the same title, sung by Amapola. Its English version entitled You’re All I Love containing some Tagalog lyrics was sung by American singer Vic Dana. The song won the Manila Film Festival “Best Song of the Year Award” in 1972. He followed it with an English song entitled Songs exclusively for Songs and Amapola under the Vicor Music Corporation Pioneer Label. One of his best-known compositions was Child, the English-language version of Freddie Aguilar’s signature song Anák. He wrote songs for the country’s top popular singers such as Sharon Cuneta, Basil Valdez, Regine Velasquez, Zsa Zsa Padilla, Pilita Corrales, Martin Nievera, and Kuh Ledesma. Canseco credited film producer and Vicor Music Corporation owner Vic del Rosario for giving him his biggest break in the music industry. He was elected President of the Filipino Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, Inc. (FILSCAP) in 1973. He was also elected as Councilor for the First District of Quezon City in 1988. His legacy as a composer include approximately 120 song titles including Ikaw, Kailangan Kita, Dito Ba, Hiram, Tubig at Langis, Hanggang sa Dulo ng Walang Hanggan, Sinasamba Kita, Kastilyong Buhangin, Minsan Pa Nating Hagkan ang Nakaraan, Ngayon at Kailanman, Saan Darating ang Umaga, Sana Bukas Pa ang Kahapon, Dear Heart, Gaano Kadalas ang Minsan, Paano kita Mapapasalamatan, and Kahapon Lamang. He passed away on November 19, 2004 in Manila. 132 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music GAANO KO IKAW KAMAHAL (Excerpt) Ernani Cuenco, music / Levi Celerio, lyrics DAHIL SA ISANG BULAKLAK (Excerpt) Leopoldo Silos Sr., music / Levi Celerio, lyrics 133 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III LEOPOLDO SILOS Sr. (1925 – 2015) Leopoldo Silos Sr. was born on March 6, 1925. He was a composer, singer, and arranger. He composed and recorded a number of romantic songs, the most famous of which were two of his well known hits, Dahil Sa Isang Bulaklak (Because Of One Flower) and Hindi Kita Malimot (I Can’t Forget You). He was also the award-winning musical director of the longrunning television musical program, Aawitan Kita, which starred Armida Siguion-Reyna. Accordingly, the music of Silos touches the sentiment quite deeply. His lyrical melodies are complemented by exotic harmonies. His melodies were made more appealing through their extended chords, diminished intervals, and secondary dominants. Thus, that enriched the otherwise basic chordal patterns accompanying a tonal melody. Although not as widely performed as other mainstream love songs and kundimans, his music always impresses the listener with its melodic sincerity and elegantly crafted accompaniments. The other notable compositions of Silos include Aling Kutsero, Ay Anong Saklap, Basta’t Mahal Kita, Diyos Lamang ang Nakakaalam, Hindi Ko Malilimutan, Lagi kitang Naaalala, Langit sa Lupa, Halina Halina, Lihim na Pag-ibig, and Mundo Ma’y Mawala. He died on March 10, 2015. SUMMARY Song composers became popular with their musical compositions used as musical background or theme songs in movies and films. Levi Celerio made it to the Guinness Book of World Records for being the only person to make music with a leaf. He received numerous awards for his musical achievements in film. Constancio de Guzman was acknowledged as the “Dean of Filipino movie composers and musical directors.” He is the composer of the nationalistic song Bayan Ko. Mike Velarde Jr. was a composer, conductor, and musical director. He composed the popular song Dahil Sa Iyo in 1938. In 1975 the Philippine Government Cultural Association awarded him the Cultural Achievement Award in Popular Music. He received the Gawad CCP Para Sa Sining in 1986. 134 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music Ernani Cuenco was a composer, film scorer, musical director, and music teacher. He was hailed as a National Artist in Music in 1999. His works embody the Filipino sense of musicality. The classical sound of the kundiman is evident in some of his ballads. Up to this day, his compositions are popular and well-loved. Restie Umali was a composer, teacher, and musical arranger. He arranged the Philippine national anthem and the local classic Kataka-taka for the Boston Pops Orchestra when it performed for the Philippine Independence Night in Boston in 1972. He wrote a total of more or less120 movie theme songs. He composed more than 250 scores for movies which was capped by a Universal Pictures production of No Man Is An Island starred by Jeffrey Hunter and Barbara Perez. George Canseco was considered “a nationally acclaimed composer of numerous popular Filipino classics.” He composed songs for Filipino singers and movie stars. Angel Peña is a classical and jazz composer, musical arranger, and bass player. He is widely considered by modern Filipino jazz musicians as “one of the founders of traditional jazz in the Philippines.” Leopoldo Silos Sr. was a composer, singer, and musical arranger. He composed and recorded romantically soulful songs. He was the award winning musical director of the television musical Aawitan Kita. Santiago Suarez was an accomplished composer of traditional Filipino love songs. His popular works include Dungawin Mo Hirang, Bakya Mo Neneng, Caprichosa, Sa Libis ng Nayon, and Kataka-taka. WHAT TO KNOW 1. Discuss the lives and musical contributions of the following 20th century Filipino song composers a. b. c. d. e. 2. Levi Celerio Constancio de Guzman Mike Velarde Jr. Ernani Cuenco Restie Umali f. g. h. i. George Canseco Angel Peña Leopoldo Silos Sr. Santiago Suarez For each of the composers named above, give the title of any of his compositions. 135 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III Composer Title of Any Composition ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ ________________ _____________________________________________ WHAT TO PROCESS A. Listening Activity 1. Your teacher will play excerpts of recordings of any of the following works by Filipino song composers: a. Levi Celerio b. Constancio de Guzman - Ang Pipit; Sa Ugoy ng Duyan; Misa de Gallo; Itik-itik (folk song); Tinikling (folk song); and Ang Pasko ay Sumapit. - Bayan Ko, Babalik Ka Rin, Ang Tangi Kong Pagibig, Birheng Walang Dambana, Maalaala Mo Kaya, Sa Piling Mo, Ang Langit ko’y Ikaw c. Mike Velarde Jr. - Buhat, Ikaw, Bituing Marikit, Minamahal Kita, Dating Sumpaan, Dalisay, Eternally Yours, Gabi at Araw, Dahil sa Iyo 136 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music d. Ernani Cuenco - Nahan, Kahit na Magtiis, Diligin Mo ng Hamog ang Uhaw na Lupa, Pilipinas, Inang Bayan, Isang Dalangin, Kalesa, Gaano Ko Ikaw Kamahal, Bato sa Buhangin e. Restie Umali - Saan Ka Man Naroroon, Alaala ng Lumipas, Ang Pangarap Ko’y Ikaw, Sa Libis ng Barrio, Di Ka Nag-iisa, Paano Kita Lilimutin f. George Canseco - Ikaw, Kailangan Kita, Dito Ba, Hiram, Langis at Tubig, Hanggang sa Dulo ng Walang Hanggan, Sinasamba Kita, Kastilyong Buhangin, Minsan pa nating hagkan ang Nakaraan, Ngayon at Kailanman, Saan Darating ang Umaga, Sana Bukas Pa ang Kahapon, Dear Heart, Gaano Kadalas ang Minsan g. Angel Peña - Bagbagtulambing, Igorot Rhapsody, Concerto for Double Bass and Orchestra, Concerto for Jazz Quartet and Orchestra h. Leopoldo Silos Sr. Dahil sa Isang Bulaklak, Hindi Kita Malimot, Aling Kutsero, Ay Anong Saklap, Basta’t Mahal Kita, Diyos lamang ang nakakaalam, Hindi ko Malilimutan, Lagi kitang Naaalala, Langit at Lupa, Halina Halina, Lihim na Pag-ibig, Mundo Ma’y Mawala i. Santiago Suarez - Ligaya Ko, Pandanggo ni Neneng, Dungawin Mo Hirang, Bakya Mo Neneng, Caprichosa, Sa Libis ng Nayon, Harana, Kataka-taka, Labandera Ko, Lakambini, Kamia, Ikaw ang Buhay Ko!, Kay Lungkot Nitong Hating-Gabi, Mutya Niyaring Puso 2. Listen carefully to each excerpt and be able to recognize the different musical styles of the composers. 137 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC B.  Quarter III 3. Analyze the music and take note of the elements of music present, such as rhythm, melody, tempo and dynamics, texture and harmony, form, and timbre. 4. Choose a composition that you like. Write a reaction paper on it. Evaluation of Listening Activity “Name the Composer, Title of the Music, Musical Style, and Description” 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. After the above Listening Activity, your teacher will prepare selected excerpts of compositions by the following: Celerio, De Guzman, Velarde, Cuenco, Umali, Canseco, Peña, Silos, and Suarez. The class will be divided into four teams, with each team forming a line. As your teacher plays a few measures of the first excerpt, the first student in each line goes to the board and writes the name of the composer. The second student will write the title of the music. The third student will write the musical style. Then, the fourth student will write a description of the music in one phrase. The team that writes the correct answers first, scores four (4) points. The same procedure goes on until all the students in the line have had their turn. One student will be assigned as the scorer. The team with the highest score is the winner. In case of a tie, the first team to finish is the winner. The scorer will announce the winners and then asks them this question: What was the most significant thing that you have learned from this activity? WHAT TO UNDERSTAND: SOLO, DUET, TRIO, QUARTET, QUINTET 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.. Compose a simple song. Write the lyrics and the music. You may adapt a certain melody from the compositions of the song composers that you like. Write the new lyrics to fit the music. You may include an accompaniment such as guitar, flute, recorder, keyboard, drums, tambourine, maracas or improvise musical instruments from the environment. You may sing it a capella (without accompaniment) or with accompaniment. Do some dance movements of the music. Perform your composition or your song adaptation and the dance movements. What motivated you to compose or adapt the music of that song? How did you feel about this activity? 138 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Philippine Music WHAT TO PERFORM A. Singing Activity: Song Medley Sing any of the compositions of Celerio, De Guzman, Velarde, Cuenco, Umali, Canseco, Peña, Silos, and Suarez. I n d i v i d u a l o r i n g r o u p s : For group work, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Your group will choose any song composers. You research further on his compositions, if needed. Select three compositions that you like best or you are familiar with or you may learn a new song. Choose your musical director. Sing the three (3) minutes medley in class with your groupmates interpreting the music with appropriate pitch, rhythm, style, timbre, dynamics, melody, texture, harmony, and expression. You may bring an instrumental accompaniment like guitar, flute, recorder, maracas, tambourine, or keyboard. You may bring a minus one music in CD, or from your mobile phone, or USB. You may improvise simple vocal or instrumental accompaniment/s to the songs you have chosen. You may explore ways of creating sounds as instrumental accompaniment to the song from a variety of sources or from the environment. Your teacher will choose the “Best Singing Group” based on musicianship (musical elements) 60%, presentation impact and showmanship 20%, ensemble coordination and organization 20%. All students will evaluate by rating each other’s performance and their own performance. Creating and Performing Activities: Musical 1. 2. 3. 4. Your teacher will divide the class into four groups. Each group choose a song composer that was discussed in class. Research further on his life and works. Create a contemporary musical on the life of your chosen composer. Incorporate some of his compositions (melodic fragments) in the musical and story. Improvise simple vocal or instrumental accompaniments (example: guitar, keyboard, percussion) to the songs that you have chosen. Explore ways of creating sounds as accompaniment on a variety of sources or from the environment for the creation of the musical. 139 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter III 5. Perform the musical in class. Your teacher will choose the “Best Group Musical Performance” based on musicianship (musical elements) 50%, audience impact and showmanship 20%, ensemble coordination and organization 20%, stage discipline or deportment 10%. Evaluation of Creating and Performing Activities: Musical Rating Scale: 5 - Very Good 4 - Good 3 - Fair 2 - Poor 1 - Needs Follow up Rating the other performers / groups: 1. 2. How well did the performers express the message of the musical? __________ How well did the performers sing and act in the musical based on the following: a. voice quality __________ b. expression __________ c. stage presence __________ d. audience impact __________ e. mastery of the musical __________ g. musical elements (rhythm, melody, dynamics) __________ h. technique __________ i. showmanship __________ j. acting __________ Rating your own group members: 1. How well did your group members express the message of the musical? 2. How well did your group members perform? 3. How well did your group members coordinate with each other during the performance in the ensemble? 4. How well did your group organize yourselves in the ensemble? Rating myself: 1. How well did I express the message of the musical? 2. How well did I perform with my group? 3. How well did I coordinate with the other members during the performance in the ensemble? 4. How well did I cooperate in the ensemble? __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ 140 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms Quarter IV: 20th AND 21st CENTURY MULTIMEDIA FORMS CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of... 1. Characteristic features of 20th and 21st century opera, musical play, ballet, and other multi-media forms. 2. The relationship among music, technology, and media. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner... 1. Performs selections from musical plays, ballet, and opera in a satisfactory level of performance. 2. Creates a musical work, using media and technology. LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner... 1. Describes how an idea or story in a musical play is presented in a live performance or video. 2. Explains how theatrical elements in a selected part of a musical play are combined with music and media to achieve certain effects. 3. Sings selections from musical plays and opera expressively. 4. Creates/improvises appropriate sounds, music, gestures, movements, and costumes using media and technology for a selected part of a musical play. 5. Presents an excerpt from a 20th or 21st century Philippine musical and highlights its similarities and differences to other Western musical plays. From the Department of Education curriculum for MUSIC Grade 10 (2014) 141 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV OPERA IN THE PHILIPPINES T he emergence of the Filipino opera started to take shape during the middle part of the 19th century. Foreign performers, including instrumental virtuosi, as well as opera singers and Spanish zarzuela performers came to the country to perform for enthusiastic audiences. The opera is an art and music form in which singers and musicians perform a dramatic work combining text (called alibretto) and a musical score, usually in an elaborate theatrical setting. It incorporates many of the elements of spoken theater, such as acting, scenery, costumes, and sometimes includes dance. The performance is typically given in an opera house, cultural center, theater, or auditorium. It is accompanied by an orchestra or smaller musical ensemble. The dialogue is entirely sung and not spoken. Opera is part of the Western classical music form and tradition. It started in Italy at the end of the 16th century and soon spread through the rest of Europe. While English, French, and Italian operas were being presented, it was the Italian opera that captured the creative imagination of composers, librettists, and singers alike. Zorilla Theatre 142 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms Manila Grand Opera House As the locals were being exposed to Western art and music, they were also realizing their inner talents and passion for the opera. The themes were ripe for voicing their own sentiments about love of country and longing for independence from colonial rule. The element of tragedy, emanating from the popular themes of romance, deceit, murder, vendetta, and other elements of human frailty, became a favorite story pattern of the Filipino opera. Some operatic works were based on previous literary creations, such as Rizal’s Noli Me Tangere and El Filibusterismo. The tragic endings and unresolved conflicts made them excellent choices for an operatic production. Local Theaters and Early Philippine Operas Local theaters, including the Zorilla, Principe Alfonso, Variedades, Quiapo and Tondo Theaters, were the choice venues for the mainly Italian operas that came to the country, such as Lucia di Lammermoor, La Boheme, La Traviata, and Aida. Later, other opera venues were established, led by the Manila Grand Opera House and the Metropolitan Theater (Met). The first Filipino opera is said to be to Sandugong Panaginip by Pedro Paterno, a poet, novelist, musician, and government official. This was first presented at the Zorilla Theater on August 2, 1902. It was later translated by the Englishman M.W. Loving with the title The Dreamed Alliance. 143 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV Following this historic development, other prominent figures and ensembles contributed significantly in the promotion of opera. They were composer Bonifacio Abdon as the first Filipino opera conductor, Dr. Ramon Javier as the first Filipino opera impresario who promoted local talents to participate in foreign productions. The Orchestra Molina was known for their interpretation of operatic works as well as other classical compositions. Metropolitan Theater (Met) Subsequent Filipino operas followed sporadically, such as Lakangbini by Patricio Mariano that was staged at the Metropolitan Theater on December 19, 1933. Operatic divas included Nelia Manalo, who portrayed the leading role of Violetta in Giuseppe Verdi’s La Traviata. Mercedes Matias-Santiago portrayed the role as Lucia in Gaetano Donizetti’s Lucia di Lamermoor. National Artist Jovita Fuentes portrayed the role as Mimi in Giacomo Puccini’s La Boheme. The establishment of the Cultural Center of the Philippines (CCP) by then First Lady Imelda Romualdez-Marcos in 1969 paved the way for other Filipino operas to be staged at a legitimate venue of international standard. NOLI ME TANGERE and EL FILIBUSTERISMO Operas based on Rizal’s two novels Noli Me Tangere and El Filibusterismo were composed by National Artist Felipe Padilla de Leon. These were presented at the CCP Main Theater in 1970 and 1975, respectively. Noli Me Tangere and El Filibusterismo were later restaged also at CCP as musical plays with new music composed by Ryan Cayabyab and new creative team. 144 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms Cultural Center of the Philippines LA LOBA NEGRA La Loba Negra (The Black She-Wolf) is a three-act Filipino opera. Acts I and II are based on history. Act III is based on a legend attributed to Fr. Jose Burgos. He was one of the three martyred priests, Gomez, Burgos, and Zamora who were executed in Bagumbayan (now Luneta) in 1872. The music was composed by National Artist Francisco Feliciano, with libretto by soprano Fides Cuyugan Asensio. The premiere was held in 1984 with Lamberto Avellana as director. In 1985 direction was by Peque Gallaga and Jorge V. Ledesma, production design by Don Escudero, costume design by National Artist Salvador Bernal, lighting design by Dennis Marasigan, and choreography by Rene C. Hinojales. La Loba Negra was presented by the Cultural Center of the Philippines in cooperation with the Asian Institute for Liturgy and Music at the CCP Main Theater from August 16 to 25, 1984 and the 2nd season in 1985. Ms. Asensio alternated with Eleanor Calbes as Dona Luisa/La Loba. Jimmy Melendrez alternated with Noel Velasco as Governor-General Fernando Manuel Bustamante. Secondary roles were performed by Nomer Son as Torralba, Gamaliel Viray/Nolyn Cabahug as Fr. Sebastian Totanes, Aileen Espinosa Cura as Florentina Dolores, and Lito Carating/Elmo Makil as Kapitan Macatangay. The composer himself conducted the Philippine Philharmonic Orchestra. Choral support was from the Philippine Madrigal Singers, Singers Harmonics, Tiples de Santo Domingo, Pasyon Singers of Cardona, and the Zarzuela Foundation Librettist and soprano, Chorus. Fides Cuyugan Asensio 145 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV Background of the Opera The story of La Loba Negra takes place during the 17th century of Spanish rule in the Philippines. It revolves around the tragic assassination of Spanish Governor-General Bustamante. His administration was greatly admired for his planned reforms in the colonial administration. It also focused on the bitter reaction and planned vendetta (revenge) by his wife Doña Luisa (La Loba Negra) on the religious perpetrators. As massive corruption and friar abuse were prevalent, the entry of Governor-General Bustamante to institute reforms did not sit well with the powerfully abusive priests, which led to his untimely death. Synopsis The opera begins with a Prologue depicting the scene of a woman dancing around a priest tied to a log. She scolds him in a haunting atmosphere of pitch darkness and a howling wolf from the distance. The scene shifts to the Governor’s Palace Ballroom where a welcome party in honor of the new Governor-General Bustamante is in progress. Upon the arrival of the Governor, lavish gifts are offered to him by the various guests. To their surprise and dismay, the Governor downplays their ostentatious revelry and giftgiving as a sign of potential corruption in his song Makinig Kayo.The entry of Fray (friar/priest) Totanes and his regal posturing further elicits sarcastic remarks from the Governor. As he and his wife Doña Luisa exits the scene, an indio (Spanish term used for a Filipino native) servant named Macatangay enters with a message to the Governor from his employer, Auditor General Torralba. Fray Totanes takes advantage of the Governor’s exit by asserting the power of the church over the state in his song Siya Ba ang Magsasabi Sa Akin? prompting the Governor’s daughter Dolores to chide him for his unbecoming remarks in her father’s house. Fray Totanes apologizes without a trace of sincerity as Dolores exits followed by an “interested” young friar. Meanwhile, Fray Totanes intercepts the gifts meant for the Governor . He got the gifts to add to the Church’s treasury. He blesses the guests as he reassures them of a place in heaven. In the Palace’s family room, Doña Luisa is singing an aria Huizilipochtli about an Aztec god which her daughter Dolores was curiously questioning about its meaning. Their conversation is interrupted by the Governor who was on his way out to investigate the Auditor General’s office on the state of the Treasury. Dolores, suspecting the impending result of the investigation amid the pocketing by the friars, weeps bitterly as her mother tries to comfort her. At the Auditor General’s office, Fray Totanes witnesses Torralba collecting taxes from the various merchants in order to get their trade permits. He then shares the “loot” with Fray Totanes who in turn gives part of his share to his mistress Conchita. The Governor enters shortly, and after a brief confrontation with Torralba, discovers that the Treasury coffers are empty. 146 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms He orders the latter’s immediate imprisonment in Fort Santiago, a most dreaded place for criminals and political prisoners at that time. The scene ends with a duet Anong Saklap Nitong Pangyayari by the two, with Torralba in remorse and shame and Bustamante in pity and disgust over the situation. The chorus sings Sa Haring Pari, O Sa Paring Hari in the distance. The continuing crackdown of Governor Bustamante on the religious officials did not spare even the Archbishop of Manila as they were all detained in Fort Santiago. A religiously-led demonstration ensues in the Town Plaza but is quickly dispelled by the Governor’s soldiers. The priests are exhorted by Fray (friar/priest) Totanes to come out in full-force to plot the assassination of their most hated enemy. A mass is held without the usual service as the altar is covered black to symbolize a coffin, topped by the Spanish flag and a crucifix. As they march toward the Governor’s palace, singing Muerte, Muerte Para El Traidor Bustamante,a messenger forewarns the Governor of the plot. But to no avail, the assassins are able to reach the palace and kill the Governor along with his son Jose. Doña Luisa, witnessing this brutal killing, asks the Lord and the Virgin Mary to forgive the perpetrators. However, her mind snaps at the shock of the moment, wherein she instead invokes the Aztec god to assist her in avenging the murders of her loved ones. With a loud scream filled with pain and anguish, she has renounced her Christian faith. Doña Luisa, now disguised as La Loba Negra (The Black She-Wolf), commences her revenge during the elaborate ceremonies of Palm Sunday. And together with her sexuallyabused daughter, methodically slays the friars she encounters. She killed over 200 priests in a span of two years. Her infamous reputation has spread as the religious clergy cower in fear. Macatangay, who has also become a rebel leader for a different cause of achieving independence, joins forces with La Loba Negra. They continued in their ritual religious murders, singing the songs O Poong Maykapal, Kayong Mga Namumuno, and Hindi Na Malayo Ang Araw. The scene is transported back to the Prologue with Doña Luisa castigating the friar responsible for the seduction and rape of her daughter. Added to her earlier murders of the friars for the deaths of her husband and son, Doña Luisa’s vengeful emotions have now been purged out. When her daughter is wed to Sandugo, she has become one with the indios of her adopted country. Before she dies, Doña Luisa was heard singing Napakahaba ng Gabi. She speaks of a bright tomorrow after the long night as the chorus sings Sulong, Mahal Kong Kababayan. The music and libretto have closely collaborated to portray the dramatic moods in the opera. The dramatic moods are particularly depicted in the murder scenes that are effectively contrasted with the solemn sounds and religious fervor of the liturgical rites. The somewhat debatable moral issue of vengeance may perhaps be explained by the temporary insanity of Doña Luisa. It was caused by the brutal killings of her husband and son, wherein the Aztec god is portrayed as a scapegoat for the Christian purge. As librettist Asensio concluded: “The night is long but the sun will rise… and rise again in the East.” 147 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV NOLI ME TANGERE, THE OPERA The three-act opera Noli Me Tangere was composed by National Artist Felipe Padilla de Leon, with libretto by National Artist Guillermo Tolentino. It premiered in 1957 at the FEU Auditorium. The cast included Juanita Javier Torres as Maria Clara, Don David as Ibarra, Fides Cuyugan Asensio as Sisa, Milo Cristobal as Padre (Father/priest) Damaso, and Morli Daram as the director. A scene from Noli Me Tangere, the opera There were other several productions that followed the premiere production. The performance in 1987 was held at the CCP Main Theater from September 18 to 20, 1987 in cooperation with Music Theatre Foundation of the Philippines. Oscar C. Yatco conducted the Philippine Philharmonic Orchestra. The opera was directed by Jonas Sebastian. The production staff also included National Artist Salvador Bernal for Set and Costume Design, Dennis Marasigan for Lighting, and Sylvia Garcia-Nera for Overall Production. The cast of major characters included Nolyn Cabahug and Sal Myneo (Sal) Malaki alternating as Ibarra, Andion Fernandez/Nanette Moscardon-Maigue as Maria Clara, Fides Cuyugan-Asensio/Luz Morete as Sisa, Elmo Makil/Nomer Son as Elias, and Nomer Son/Jonathan Velasco as Padre Damaso. Jonas Sebastian as the director. The novel of national hero Dr. Jose Rizal, Noli Me Tangere, has been a source of many artistic productions and endeavors. From a silent film adaptation in 1915, it was the subject of a movie in 1961 directed by Gerardo de Leon. It won the 10th FAMAS Award for Best Film. It was first presented as an opera by National Artist for Music Felipe Padilla de Leon in 1957 and in 1987. It was later adapted in 1992 by National Artist for Film Eddie Romero in a 13-episode series for television. The novel also became the subject of musical plays and revivals. The opera had its US production premiered as Noli Me Tangere: The Opera at Harris Theater in Chicago on May 28, 2012. It was also staged at The Kaye Playhouse, Hunter College, New York City, USA last October 2013, and at the Resorts World in Manila in September 2014. 148 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms The Novel Behind the Opera The title of Rizal’s novel Noli Me Tangere (Touch Me Not) was said to have originated from the Latin version of the words, originating from John 20:17. It was spoken by Jesus to Mary Magdalene who recognized Him after His Resurrection, reasoning to her “for I am not yet ascended to the Father.” The novel was written to expose the ills of the Spanish Catholic friars and the ruling government. It was finished in 1886. Rizal initially found it difficult to solicit moral and financial support from his friends, until Maximo Viola helped him with the printing. The printing of Noli was done in Berlin, Germany. The English version was later released to Australian Book Stores. After which, Penguin Books took on the tasks of publishing the novel to have its own translated version. The book was banned in the Philippines by the Spanish authorities for its supposedly subversive elements. This led to Rizal’s exile, imprisonment, and execution. Synopsis of the Opera Act I A scene from Noli Me Tangere, the opera (Ibarra and Maria Clara) The spacious sala of Santiago de los Santos, otherwise known as Kapitan Tiago, in San Diego, is the setting for the welcome reception. It was a gathering honoring the 22-year old student Crisostomo Ibarra after a seven-year stay in Europe. The Gobernadorcillo and his wife Doña Victorina lead the guest list that includes Padre Damaso, vocal in his criticism of the Filipino whom he referred to as “indio” while also blaming the Gobernadorcillo for interfering in their local affairs. He continues this harsh attitude upon the arrival of Ibarra when he ignores the latter as he tries to greet the friar. 149 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV Ibarra is also shaken and shocked by the news of the death of his father, where he confides to Don Filipo his puzzlement surrounding his father’s death. Before Ibarra left for San Diego, Lt. Guevara, a civil guard, revealed to him the circumstances that led to his father’s death. Don Rafael Ibarra, a rich hacendero of the town, was unjustly accused by Padre Damaso of being a heretic and a subversive and subsequently jailed. As the case was almost being resolved, Don Rafael fell sick and died in his cell. His remains, initially interred at the Catholic cemetery, were ordered transferred by Padre Damaso to another location. Ibarra, although lamenting the fateful circumstances, does not hold revenge on his mind. Instead, he starts to reveal plans to build a schoolhouse in memory of his father. He is only partly comforted by the announcement of the immenent arrival of his beloved Maria Clara, the adopted daughter of Kapitan Tiago. She was accompanied by her aunt, Tia Isabel. Ibarra rushes to greet them on their arrival. As the guests move into the dining room, the two lovers are huddled together reminiscing their past moments spent together. Ibarra, still thinking his father’s death, begs to be excused in order to pay respects at his father’s grave while Maria Clara fears disaster. Act II Scene I All roads lead to the cemetery as the people of San Diego observe All Saints’ Day. Pilosopo Tasio meets Crispin and Basilio going to the church to ring the bells. The ringing of the bells will warn the people of a coming storm. He cautions the two brothers to stay away from the bells to avoid being struck by lightning. Ibarra arrives at the cemetery A scene from Noli Me Tangere, the opera to look for his father’s grave. He is angered when one of the gravediggers informs him that he was ordered to transfer his father’s body to another site. When he inquires about the location of the new site, the man confides that he disobeyed the orders. And instead, he threw the body into the lake. This causes Ibarra to jump at him in a fury and leave the cemetery in a rage, 150 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms As evening approaches amidst flashes of lightning and sounds of thunder, the Gobernadorcillo and Pilosopo Tasio are engaged in sarcastic conversation. The scene shifts to Crispin who is suddenly accused of theft and is detained at the convent. His brother Basilio runs to their mother Sisa but is shot in the leg. Sisa, confronted by the guardia civil, arrives and protests her son’s innocence as she breaks down in shock. Meanwhile, the bereaved Ibarra seeks counseling from Pilosopo Tasio who advises the youth to “bend your head with the storm” like a bamboo. Heeding the advice of the wise man, Ibarra realizes though that the authorities he intends to yield to were the same people that imprisoned and caused his father’s death. Scene II The young people of San Diego hold a picnic by the lake to celebrate Ibarra’s return from Europe. Maria Clara is prevailed upon to sing, wherein she renders the famous number Kay Tamis ng Buhay recalling the happy life in her native land. Meanwhile, a group of fishermen arrive to lament the presence of a crocodile that prevented them from catching any fish. Elias, a woodsman, volunteered to drive the crocodile away but is greatly endangered. Ibarra rushes to his rescue and saves Elias. In his gratitude, Elias warns Ibarra of the approaching dangers from the latter’s enemies. As Sisa passes by, she is still lonely over her lost children. Elias assists the insane woman to find the two children. While Ibarra continues to tell of his dream to build a school in his father’s memory, Padre Damaso joins in the conversation and ridicules the plan as a “scheme of the viper.” To which, an enraged Ibarra grabs a knife and attempts to stab him. Only the timely intercession of Maria Clara pacifies the young man. However, this gives Padre Damaso an excellent opportunity to have him excommunicated. Act III Scene I As Ibarra has been exiled from San Diego, Maria Clara is left depressed while her Tia Isabel and friends try to comfort her. Kapitan Tiago enters the bedroom to tell the sad news that inspite of his appeal Padre Damaso has told him to cancel the wedding arrangements between Maria Clara and Ibarra. Actually, Kapitan Tiago had in mind his relative Alfonso Linares to marry Maria Clara instead of Ibarra. Doña Victorina then enters the room and together with Padre Damaso starts planning for the meeting between Maria Clara and Linares. Meanwhile, Ibarra has sought the help of the Gobernadorcillo who manages to cancel his excommunication from the church. He is able to return and visit Maria Clara to propose marriage. The couple’s rejoicing at the house of Kapitan Tiago is interrupted by 151 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV the arrival of the Alferez who arrests Ibarra for being involved in an uprising. Again driven to depression, Maria Clara seeks the help of the Heavenly Mother. A fire is seen from the closed window. Scene II Worried over the fate of Ibarra, Maria Clara ignores Padre Damaso’s advice discouraging her from entering the convent. As she prays to the Heavenly Mother to restore her lost love, Elias appears at the window, taking along Ibarra who has just escaped from prison. Ibarra is desperate at the rumor of Maria Clara’s impending marriage to Linares. She explains that she was forced to accept the marriage agreement to save her mother’s honor after finding out that her real father was in fact Padre Damaso! Nevertheless, she assures Ibarra that her heart will always belong to him. Meanwhile, as Ibarra and Elias sneak out of the window, two gunshots are heard from the guardia civil (civil guard). Maria Clara witnessed the tragic scene. She thinks that Ibarra had been shot and killed. But, it was Elias who was shot while Ibarra had managed to escape. Scene III Sisa is seen wailing her haunting refrain as she rests on a tombstone. Basilio, still nursing the wounds on his leg, arrives and greets his mother. Unable to recognize him at first, Sisa eventually recovers her fragile memory and embraces her son. However, the shock of the moment is too much for her heart and she expires. Meanwhile, a seriously wounded Elias appears and instructs Basilio to build a pyre (funeral fire) for his mother and him as he gives him a stash of hidden gold to fund his education. As the boy started to gather materials for the funeral pyre and the early light of dawn appears, Elias gasps out his last breath of life. 152 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms EL FILIBUSTERISMO, THE OPERA The opera El Filibusterismo was composed by National Artist Felipe Padilla De Leon in 1970, with libretto by Anthony Morli. It was in three acts and written in Tagalog. The casts included Fides Cuyugan Asensio as Paulita, Constancio Bernardo as Simoun, Irma Potenciano as Juli. It was stageds at the Cultural Center of the Philippines. The Novel Behind the Opera El Filibusterismo (The Filibuster) was a novel by Dr. Jose Rizal, a sequel to the earlier Noli Me Tangere. It tells of the continuing struggle of the Filipino people to achieve freedom and emancipation from colonial rule. Through the major characters involved, it reflects the prevailing state of Philippine government and society that has become corrupt and immoral. For which, a revolution was being seen as the only solution for change. It was also perceived as a warning from Rizal, an intellectual of the highest order. Although he favored a peaceful way of instituting reforms, the seemingly hopeless situation to achieve this method points closer and closer to armed rebellion in order to gain independence. A scene from El Filibusterismo, The Opera Rizal considered this second novel as more profound and mature than Noli Me Tangere, revealing his less hopeful outlook on the political and social situation in the country. Written for the Filipinos and not for the Spaniards, it was first distributed to his friends in Europe. However, the book was immediately seized when it arrived in the Philippines. It was later used as a major evidence in the subversion charges against him. Even after his death, it became a source of inspiration for revolutionaries that included Andres Bonifacio. 153 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV Synopsis of the Opera The major character is Crisostomo Ibarra. He had escaped from prison for subversion charges some 13 years before. He was thought to have drowned in the river. He arrives aboard a steamship along with passengers from different walks of life. He disguised himself as Simoun in search of his beloved Maria Clara. Maria Clara had become a nun after learning of Ibarra’s supposed drowning and because of her refusal to marry another man as arranged by her evil father. In an earlier letter to Maria Clara, Simoun tells her of his plan to lead a revolution. He had been sentenced for execution before he had managed to escape. Now, upon his return, he is bent on fulfilling this plan by asking the support of key people. Simoun also comes across a medical student named Basilio while the latter was visiting the grave of his mother Sisa. Basilio recognized the disguised Simoun as Ibarra. Basilio however refuses to join his revolutionary cause. He preferred instead to marry his love Huli and lead a peaceful life devoted to healing the sick. On the eve of the supposed revolt organized by Simoun, when a French vaudeville Les Cloches de Comeville was being attended by Manila’s high society, he hears the news that Maria Clara has just died in the convent. He contemplated to commit suicide. However, Maria Clara’s ghost appears and asks him to stay alive to atone for his destructive spirit. His first revolutionary attempt has failed. In the meantime, his bitterness has jeopardized the love relationship between Juanito Pelaez and Paulita Gomez. Paulita was an orphaned heiress cared for by her aunt Doña Victorina, and Isagani. She was raised by the secular priest Padre Florentino. It also influences Basilio to join Simoun’s cause after his engagement. Huli has died in despair over Basilio’s imprisonment. Actually, this was a betrayal by Simoun by pointing to him and other students for allegedly masterminding a revolution that he himself planned. Still ignoring the warning voice of Maria Clara, Simoun hatches a second plan to be carried out during the wedding of Paulita Gomez to Juanito Pelaez. His plan is to bring a crystal lamp as a wedding gift but which contains deadly explosives that would go off once the lamp’s oil runs out and is relit. This plan Simoun tells Basilio as they are dining in his mansion. However, Basilio has a sudden change of heart and quickly warns Isagani, who is just arriving at the scene to watch the wedding festivities. The shocked Isagani runs away with the lamp and throws it into the river. As Manila is scandalized by the discovery of his plan, Simoun escapes the arrest of the authorities and takes refuge in the house of Padre Florentino near the sea. He again tries to commit suicide by taking poison. 154 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ñ 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms As Simoun lay dying, Padre Florentino scolds him for his plot while assuring him of God’s mercy. He also divests Simoun of his precious stones and hurls them into the waters. He called these evil stones which should remain forever under the sea. From a distance, Isagani contemplates his desolation at a lost love amidst the vastness of the sea while witnessing a passing procession for the Feast of San Diego. SUMMARY La Loba Negra (The Black She-Wolf) is a three-act Filipino opera. Acts I and II are based on history. Act III is based on a legend attributed to Fr. Jose Burgos, one of the three martyred priests Gomez, Burgos, and Zamora who were executed in Bagumbayan (now Luneta) in 1872. The music was composed by National Artist Francisco Feliciano, with libretto by soprano Fides Cuyugan Asensio. The premiere was held in 1984 with National Artist for Theater and Film Lamberto Avellana as director. The three-act opera Noli Me Tangere was composed by National Artist Felipe Padilla de Leon, with libretto by National Artist Guillermo Tolentino. It premiered in 1957 at the FEU Auditorium. The cast included Juanita Javier Torres as Maria Clara, Don David as Ibarra, Fides Cuyugan Asensio as Sisa, Milo Cristobal as Padre Damaso, and Morli Daram as the director. There were several other productions that followed the premiere production. El Filibusterismo is a novel by Dr. Jose Rizal, a sequel to the earlier Noli Me Tangere. It was written four years later. It tells of the continuing struggle of the Filipinos to achieve freedom and emancipation from Spanish colonial rule. The opera El Filibusterismo was composed by National Artist Felipe Padilla de Leon in 1970, with libretto by Anthony Morli. It was in three acts and written in Tagalog. 155 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV BALLET IN THE PHILIPPINES T he medium of dance and ballet to interpret novels, folktales, and stories provides visual excitement as the characters come alive not in spoken dialogue but in body movements. Much of the communication is relayed in pantomime. It is a performance in which a story is told without words by using body movements and facial expressions. The lack of spoken words or sung lyrics is more than made up for by the creative steps and arm gestures of the dancers. Their facial expressions and body movements add more meaning to the story being revealed. The performance is further enhanced by colorful costumes, elaborate sets, visually suggestive music, and synchronized choreography. Together, the dance or ballet production makes for a complete drama by itself without a single word being spoken. Filipino ballets vividly present folktales based on local fables for example, Lola Basyang as well as epics from neighboring regions, such as India’s Ramayana. Highly communicative movements and steps dramatize the actions in the respective stories. The colorful sets and costumes add to the glitter and attraction of the productions. Although not as extensively explored as the other performing genres for local adaptation, Filipino ballet productions have evoked wide enthusiasm from people of all ages. They have been added to the repertory of Philippine dance companies to supplement the Western classical ballets, such as Nutcracker Suite, Swan Lake, Giselle, and Sleeping Beauty. Nutcracker Suite Philippine prima ballerina Lisa Macuja with her daughter in Nutcracker Suite 156 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms TATLONG KUWENTO NI LOLA BASYANG Lola Basyang is a ballet adaptation of Severino Reyes’ folktales Mga Kuwento ni Lola Basyang. It was meant to instill and rekindle the interest of the Filipino youth in the beauty, richness, and heritage of Philippine literature. The typical storytelling scene shows the grandmother (Lola Basyang, the pen name of the author) on a rocking chair with her grandchildren listening to her fascinating tales. Two episodes of such stories were presented by Ballet Manila, with Lisa Macuja-Elizalde as the company’s Executive Director and prima ballerina. Entitled Tatlong Kuwento ni Lola Basyang (2009) and Tatlo Pang Kuwento ni Lola Basyang (2013), the stories were taken from the dozens of stories in the collection of Severino Reyes. Tatlong Kuwento ni Lola Basyang featured the following stories: 1. Ang Kapatid ng Tatlong Marya This is a fantasy story set to neo-ethnic music in a contemporary style. It is about a hero’s fantastic journey to different kingdoms in pursuit of his bewitched sisters. The music is by Joey Ayala, with choreography by Lisa Macuja-Elizalde. 2. Ang Mahiwagang Biyulin This is a local version of the Pied Piper tale where the main character mesmerizes his followers through the music of his violin. The story instills in them the moral lesson that “good triumphs over evil.” The music is by Ryan Cayabyab, arranged by Arnold Buena, and choreography is by Tony Fabella. 157 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC 3.  Quarter IV Ang Prinsipe ng Mga Ibon This is a love story where a princess falls in love with a bird. It was choreographed by Ballet Manila danseur (a male ballet dancer) Osias Barroso. The music is taken from selected musical works of National Artists arranged by Mon Faustino. The second episode, Tatlo Pang Kuwento ni Lola Basyang, included the following stories: 1. Ang Palasyo ng Mga Dwende This is a romantic adventure wherein the heroine Yani is being maltreated by her envious stepmother and stepsisters. The cursed bird is changed back into a prince with the help of Yani. It depicts Mindanao and the ancient Pintados through its neo-ethnic movements. The music and musical arrangements were done by Diwa de Leon using a hegalong, a native boat-like string musical instrument from Mindanao. Illustration was done by Albert Gamos. The choreographer was Gerardo Francisco who collaborated with Kris-belle Mamangun, Naomi Jaena, and Romeo Peralta. 2. Labindalawang Masasayang Prinsesa This is a romantic fantasy of the twelve daughters of the king. In the ballet, the eldest daughter is acted out by Lisa Macuja Elizalde’s daughter Missy. The twelve daughters secretly leave their bedroom at night to travel to an enchanted land and dance with the princes. Choreography was done by Lisa Macuja-Elizalde, in collaboration with Francis Jaena, Sofia Peralta, Rudy de Dios and the Ballet Manila dancers. It featured fairly simple classical ballet steps with the traditional adagios or slow movements for the prince and princess. It also featured the comic variations for the scenes with the king. The colors of the costumes depicted Filipino elements in fiesta combinations. The music used OPM hits such as Kailangan Kita and Ikaw ang Lahat Sa Akin arranged by Arnold Buena. 3. Anting-Anting This is a horror-comedy wherein the cowardly hero Huan tries to overcome his fears in order to win his love. The slapstick comedy is enhanced by exaggerated movements as Huan is later haunted by ghosts that add to his fears for which he looks for an anting-anting (lucky charm) to ward them off. Musical arrangements were done by Juan Carlo Magsalin, with choreography by Osias Barroso in collaboration with Michael Divinagracia. Illustration was done by Hubert Fucio. Costumes featured farmers’ clothing for men and kimona/saya for women. 158 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms These productions of Ballet Manila featuring the six stories in two episodes add visual excitement and colorful sets and costumes to the interesting fables and tales of Lola Basyang. With various choreographers, music composers, music arrangers, and illustrators, the stories were transformed into a wonderland fantasy where the characters come alive. It is not surprising that the productions have attracted a wide audience, especially among the young. The appeal of the ballet production came not only from the tales or stories but also from the dance and music as well. Lola Basyang Stories in Other Media Other stories of Lola Basyang which were presented in ballet were also performed in other media forms, such as movies and television series. Movies (Sampaguita Pictures): 1. Si Pedrong Walang Takot (Fearless Peter), starring Dolphy as the brave hero who scares away a giant by means of an enchanted bell. 2. Ang Mahiwagang Kuba (The Enchanted Hunchback), tale of a princess who marries a hunchback. 3. Ang Dakilang Puso ng Isang Ina (The Noble Heart of a Mother), a family drama. 4. Ang Prinsesang Naging Pulubi (The Princess Who Became a Beggar), a tale of an overly selective princess in her suitors who later finds true love with a beggar. Television Series: 1. Ang Prinsesang Unggoy (The Monkey Princess) 2. Ang Walong Bulag (The Eight Blind Men) 3. Maria Alimango (Maria the Crab) 4. Ang Gwapong Sastre (The Handsome Tailor) 5. Ang Mahiwagang Balabal (The Enchanted Cape) 6. Ang Dragon sa Ilog Lingwa (The Dragon at Lake Lingwa) 7. Ang Kastilyong Bakal (The Iron Palace) 8. Prinsesang Kalbo (The Bald Princess) 9. Ang Pitong Hilo (Seven Idiots) Also included here are a number of stories featured in the movies and Ballet Productions mentioned above. 1. Ang Alamat ng Manok (Legend of the Chicken), originally Ang Parusa ng Higante or The Giant’s Curse 2. Ang Sultan Saif (The Sultan Saif) 3. Parusa ng Dwende (The Dwarf’s Curse) 4. Rosa Mistica (Mystical Rose) 5. Ang Binibining Tumalo Sa Hari (The Maiden Who Defeated the King) 6. Ang Prinsipeng Duwag (The Cowardly Prince) 7. Pandakotyong (Pandakotyong) 8. Ang Prinsipeng Mahaba ang Ilong (The Prince With a Long Nose) 159 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV RAMA HARI Rama Hari, translated as King Rama, is the Philippine adaptation of the Indian epic Ramayana set to music, dance, and drama. Originally presented on February 8 to 17, 1980, the creative team consisted of Ryan Cayabyab (Music), National Artist Alice Reyes (Choreography), National Artist Bienvenido Lumbera (Literature), and National Artist Salvador Bernal (Theater Design), with the CCP Philharmonic Orchestra conducted by Cayabyab. The major roles were performed by Basil Valdez (Rama), Kuh Ledesma (Sita), and Leo Valdez (Ravana). The dancers were Nonoy Froilan as the counterpart of Rama, Effie Nanas/Ester Rimpos as Sita, and Robert Medina as Ravana. The production had the dancers moving alongside the characters to provide the choreographic interpretation of their singing and acting. It also featured the song Magbalik Ka Na Mahal sung by Kuh Ledesma, which was said to be instrumental in launching her music career. DEPED COPY The Indian Epic Behind the Musical Production The Ramayana is one of the two great Indian epics that tell about Indian life around 1000 BC and how dharma was practiced. Later, it became a model of behavior for the whole Hindu population. Dharma is a type of behavior said to be in accordance with the order that makes life and the universe possible. According to its meaning, it explains the expectations in fulfilling duties, respecting rights, observing proper conduct, practicing virtues, and maintaining a rightful way of living. The epic Ramayana consists of 18 books containing approximately 24,000 verses divided into 500 songs. 160 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms The story revolves around Prince Rama, the eldest son of Dasaratha, King of Ayodha, who had three wives and four sons – Rama, Bharata, and the twins Lakshmana and Satrughna. Rama, considered the incarnation of the Hindu god Vishnu. He was in line to the throne after his father decided to retire. But, the intercession from his stepmother prevented this succession. She relied on the king’s promise to her that he would grant any two wishes she desired. She opted to have Rama banished to the forest for 14 years. She wanted to have her own son and Rama’s younger stepbrother, Bharata, to ascend the throne despite the king’s pleadings. Without hesitation and in keeping with the dharma, Rama heeded his stepmother’s wish and moved to the woods of Panchavati. He was accompanied by his wife Sita and younger brother Lakshmana. Both of whom insisted on going with him. When Bharata learned about what happened to Rama, he lamented what his mother had done. He sought Rama in the forest and pleaded with him to return and take his rightful position as king. Rama refused however, citing his father’s command and her stepmother’s wish. However, Bharata requested instead to bring Rama’s sandals. This would be placed on the king’s throne as a symbol of his authority until he returns after 14 years. As the three spent happy years in the forest, they come across Ravana. He was the ten-headed ruler of Lanka and one of the forest’s evil creatures. He abducts Sita and forces her to marry him. After some mighty battles, Rama is able to kill Ravana and rescue Sita. However, in keeping again with the dharma and to set a good example, Rama demanded that she prove her purity first before he could take her back as his wife. To which, Sita did. They eventually return to Ayodha and Rama becomes king. As with Rama, Sita, and Bharata, they also set good examples following the dharma. This epic teaches the Indians to perform their dharma. It t has become a national symbol of divine virtues upon which their great leaders including Mahatma Gandhi found their inspiration. 161 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV A revival production of Rama Hari was presented at the Cultural Center of the Philippines from November 30 to December 9, 2012 based on the 1980 version of the same production. This time, the pop ballet musical featured singers Christian Bautista alternating with OJ Mariano as Rama, Karylle Tatlonghari/Kalila Aguilos as Sita, and Robert Sena as Ravana. The character dances were done by Jean Marc Cordero/Richardson Yadao for Rama, and Carissa Adea/Katherine Trofeo for Sita. Conducting the Manila Symphony Orchestra was Jeffrey Solares. The production made use of jeweled costumes with richly embellished ornaments as headdresses and bangles against a set backdrop that was basically minimalist. The predominantly red colored-based costumes of the principal characters were enhanced by the contrasting white flowing attires of the dancers. A related production entitled Rama at Sita was presented at the University of the Philippines with Ariel Rivera portraying the role of Rama and Lani Misalucha interpreting Sita. Directing the play was Floy Quintos, with choreography by Agnes Locsin. SUMMARY The Filipino ballets vividly present folktales based on local fables (example, Lola Basyang) and epics from neighboring regions (example, India’s Ramayana). Highly communicative movements and steps dramatize the actions in the respective stories. The colorful sets and costumes add to the luster and attraction of the productions. Although not as extensively explored as the other performing genres for local adaptation, Filipino ballets have evoked wide enthusiasm from people of all ages. Lola Basyang is a ballet adaptation of Severino Reyes’ folktales Mga Kuwento ni Lola Basyang. It was meant to instill and rekindle the interest of the Filipino youth in the beauty, richness, and heritage of Philippine literature. Rama Hari, translated as King Rama, is the Philippine adaptation of the Indian epic Ramayana set to music, dance, and drama. 162 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms MUSICAL PLAYS T he musical play is a popular and generally lighter form of musical drama than the opera. The themes are usually more contemporary, and the musical melodies more manageable by the average singer. The acting is less intense and dramatic. The choreography and dance sequences provide visual breaks from the ongoing plots. Musical plays have been associated with the Broadway plays of New York City and West End Productions in London, including My Fair Lady, South Pacific, Camelot, West Side Story, Les Miserables, Phantom of the Opera, Lion King, Beauty and the Beast, Wicked, Mama Mia, Cats, and Miss Saigon. Broadway Musicals The first major Broadway musical was Showboat, which featured the popular mode of transport in the American frontier. Since then, musicals have presented other themes: Siamese royalty in The King and I, English aristocracy in My Fair Lady, Austrian history in The Sound of Music, medieval English tragedy in Camelot, and interracial gang rivalry and romance in West Side Story. Many Broadway musicals were also made into films. Scenes from Westside Story Scene from The Sound of Music 163 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV Broadway musicals are family entertainment with themes and texts which are generally light and easy to understand. These may include the problems of everyday life, such as love and romance, social acceptance, jealousy and intrigue, and adventure. The singing is usually amplified, unlike the operatic quality of classically trained voices. Thus, many songs from Broadway musicals have become popular hits and some have achieved semi-classical status because of their sustained popularity. Among these are Climb Every Mountain from Sound of Music, I Could Have Danced All Night from My Fair Lady, If I Loved You from Carousel, If Ever I Would Leave You from Camelot, Some Enchanted Evening from South Pacific, and Sun Moon from Miss Saigon. These are also widely used for local and school productions because of their popularity, appeal, and generally less demanding style of singing and acting. A number of other musicals were adaptations of classical operas. Among these were Miss Saigon based on Puccini’s Madame Butterfly and Aida from Verdi’s opera with the same title. While with the advent of technology, modern productions like The Phantom of the Opera, Les Misérables, Beauty and the Beast, and Lion King have enthralled audiences with amazing set designs, elaborate costumes, and computer-generated visual and sound effects. Lea Salonga on Broadway Lea Salonga in Miss Saigon One Filipino artist who attained international status on both London’s West End and Broadway is Lea Salonga. She is best known for her portrayal of Kim in the musical Miss Saigon, a role for which she won the prestigious Tony Award for theater in the USA and the Laurence Olivier Award in London. She also garnered the Drama Desk and Outer Critics Circle Awards for the same role in the USA. Salonga is the first Filipina to have won various international awards for a single role. 164 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms Miss Saigon is a musical by Claude-Michel Schönberg and Alain Boublil, with lyrics by Richard Maltby, Jr. It is a modern adaptation of Giacomo Puccini’s opera Madame Butterfly, which also tells the tragic tale of a doomed romance wherein an Asian woman is abandoned by her Caucasian lover. The setting of the plot is relocated to the 1970s’ Saigon during the Vietnam War, with Madame Butterfly’s love story between an American Lieutenant and a Japanese geisha modified into a romance between an American soldier and a Vietnamese bar girl. Miss Saigon first opened at West End in London in 1989 and closed in 1994. The London production became one of the Theatre Royal’s (Drury Lane) longest running musicals. Thereafter, it was successfully produced in many cities around the world. The USA production opened at the Broadway Theatre in New York on April 11, 1991 and closed on January 28, 2001 after 4,092 performances. It was again re-staged in London in 2014 with a diffrent cast. Lea Salonga in Les Miserables And as Mei-Li in Flower Drum Song Following Miss Saigon, Salonga was the first Asian to play the role of Eponine in the musical Les Misérables, based on the novel of the same title written in 1862 by the French author Victor Hugo. She also played the role of Mei-Li in Flower Drum Song. 165 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV The Phantom of the Opera The Phantom of the Opera is a broadway musical by Andrew Lloyd Webber and Richard Stilgoe, with lyrics by Charles Hart and music by Lloyd Webber. It is based on the novel The Phantom of the Opera by Gaston Leroux. The story focuses on a beautiful singer Christine Daaé as she is seduced by a mysterious disfigured musical genius known as The Phantom of the Opera. The Phantom lives beneath the Paris Opera House and terrorizes those who work there. He demands that Christine be the star of the theater’s productions. When the young singer rejects the Phantom’s advances and her lover Raoul intervenes, the Phantom sets no limits in his pursuit of revenge and of Christine’s love. However, Christine escapes with Raoul to the roof, where she tells him about her subterranean rendezvous with the Phantom. Raoul is skeptical but swears to love and to protect her always, as demonstrated in their song All I Ask of You. The Phantom of the Opera is one of the longest-running Broadway musicals of all time. At the 1988 Tony Awards, the Broadway production was nominated for 11 awards and won seven, including the coveted Best Musical award. The musical also won seven awards at the 1988 Drama Desk Awards. Les Misérables Les Misérables, known as “Les Mis,” is a musical composed in 1980 by French composer Claude-Michel Schönberg with libretto by Alain Boublil. It is based on the novel Les Miserables by Victor Hugo. It is perhaps the most famous of all French musicals and one of the most famous musicals performed worldwide. Les Mis tells the story of paroled convict Jean Valjean who, failing attempts to find work as an honest man, breaks his chains and conceals his identity in order to live his life again. Other characters in the musical include the police inspector Javert, who becomes obsessed with finding Valjean; Fantine, the single mother of Cosette, who is forced to become a prostitute to support her daughter; Marius, a French student who falls in love with Valjean’s adopted daughter, Cosette; Eponine, the young daughter of the Thénardiers who falls in love with Marius; the Thénardiers, who own an inn; and Enjolras and other students, who are working toward freeing the oppressed lower class of France. 166 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms The musical opened in September 1980 at the Palais des Sports in Paris. The first English production, produced by Mackintosh and directed by Trevor Nunn, opened on October 8, 1985 at the Barbican Arts Centre in London. The Broadway production opened on March 12, 1987 and was nominated for 12 Tony Awards, winning eight, including “Best Musical” and “Best Original Score,” and ran until 2003. On October 8, 2006, the show celebrated its 21st anniversary and became the longestrunning West End musical in history and is still running (though it has changed venues). Its Tony award-winning score includes the songs I Dreamed a Dream, Do You Hear the People Sing?, One Day More, Empty Chairs at Empty Tables, Master of the House, and On My Own. MUSICAL PLAYS IN THE PHILIPPINES I n the Philippines, the musical play is a more recent development than Broadway and West End, relying mostly on adaptations from novels, literary works, or biographical sketches of famous artists. ANDRES BONIFACIO, ANG DAKILANG ANAK-PAWIS, THE MUSICAL The musical play Andres Bonifacio: Ang Dakilang Anak-Pawis is a five-act work commissioned by Alfonso Puyat in 1979, depicting the life of revolutionary hero Andres Bonifacio. It was co-produced by the Cultural Center of the Philippines and the Andres Bonifacio Music Foundation, Inc., and was staged again at the CCP Main Theater on August 20 and 21, 1994 with Jerry Dadap as composer-conductor and the late Elmo Makil as Bonifacio. In 2014, the UP College of Music and Andres Bonifacio Concert Choir presented their own version of the musical play in celebration of the 150th birth anniversary of Bonifacio. 167 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV The Hero Behind the Musical Andres Bonifacio was born on November 30, 1863 in Tondo, Manila to Santiago Bonifacio and Catalina de Castro. Santiago was a tailor, boatman, and local politician, while Catalina worked in a cigarette-rolling factory. As the eldest of six children, Andres was forced to give up his plans for higher education to support his younger siblings due corredor of local raw materials for J.M. Fleming and Company, a British firm. Later, he worked also as a grocer/bodeguero for Fressell and Company, a German firm. Bonifacio’s tragic childhood seemed to have extended to his adulthood. His first wife, Monica, died at a young age of leprosy. His son by his second wife, Gregoria de Jesus, died as an infant. t o t h e e a r l y d e m i s e o f b o t h p a r e n t s . H e w o r k e d a s a b r o k e r / In 1892, Bonifacio joined Jose Rizal’s reformist organization La Liga Filipina. As Bonifacio worked to revive the organization after Rizal’s arrest and deportation, he also founded a new organization called Katipunan along with his friends Ladislao Diwa and Teodoro Plata. Its complete name was shortened with the initials KKK that stand for Kataastaasang Kagalanggalangang Katipunan ng Mga Anak ng Bayan. The new organization, consisting of people from the lower and middle income groups, was formed to mount an armed resistance against the Spanish colonizers It generated wide support from several provinces that also established their respective regional branches. Bonifacio became the President or Presidente Supremo of the Katipunan in 1895. He continued to attract thousands of followers into the movement. Along with this development, he and his friends Emilio Jacinto and Pio Valenzuela put up a newspaper called Kalayaan (Freedom). In the summer of 1896, the Spanish authorities sensing an armed uprising being hatched, arrested hundreds of people, including Jose Rizal. Rizal was tried and later executed in Bagumbayan (now Luneta). This incited Bonifacio and his followers to kick off the revolt. They tore up their community tax certificates or cedulas as a symbol of defiance against the government. He proclaimed himself President of the Revolutionary Government and declared independence on August 23, 1896. He issued a manifesto shortly thereafter for an attack on Manila. This ignited simultaneous revolts in other places that included San Juan del Monte, Marikina, Montalban, San Mateo, and Cavite. During the series of clashes where Bonifacio had mixed results of success and failures, a young upper-class politician from Kawit, Cavite named Emilio Aguinaldo surfaced. Under his military leadership, much of the revolts’ successes were attributed to him because he was better educated and came from a wealthy and influential family. Thus, in a rigged election at the rebels’ Tejeros Convention of 1897, Aguinaldo was elected president of the Revolutionary Government. The deposed Bonifacio refused to recognize the new government, causing Aguinaldo to have him arrested. Bonifacio was ultimately tried for treason and sedition in a sham trial and was sentenced to death. Together with his brother Procopio, Andres Bonifacio was shot dead on May 10, 1897 at the age of 34. 168 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms ATANG - DULANG MAY MUSIKA Atang - Dulang May Musika is a musical based on the life of the first superstar of the Philippines, Atang de la Rama. It starred Ayen Munji-Laurel, Shamaine Centenera Buencamino, Frances Makil-Ignacio, Kalila Aguilos, Teroy Guzman, Greg de Leon, Mitoy Sta. Ana, Ricky Ibe, Meynard Peñalosa, Bituin Escalante and the Dulaang UP Ensemble. Biography of Atang de la Rama H o n o r a t a d e l a R a m a - H e r n a n d e z was more popularly known as Atang de la Rama. She was a singer, bodabil performer, and the first Filipina film actress. She was born in Tondo, Manila on January 11, 1902 and died on July 11, 1991. By the age of 7, she was already performing in a number of Spanish zarzuelas including Mascota, Sueño de un Vals, and Marina. Later, at the age of 15, she became popular with the song Nabasag ang Banga in the Filipino zarzuela Dalagang Bukid. During the American Occupation, Atang almost singlehandedly tried to promote the kundiman (love song or art song) and the Filipino zarzuela. The themes centered on Filipino values and lifestyles. Her efforts paid off as the success of original Filipino zarzuelas such as Dalagang Bukid became quite well known. She produced the plays Anak ni Eva and Bulaklak ng Kabundukan that earned her the label as “Queen of the Kundiman and Zarzuela” in 1979. Her further stints at major theaters in Manila including Teatro Libertad and Teatro Zorilla became opportunities for her to propagate the kundiman and zarzuela. Other makeshift venues were the cockpits and open plazas around the country. Her audiences ranged from the tribal communities of the Igorots, Aetas, and the Mangyans to the foreign spectators in Hawaii, San Francisco, Los Angeles, New York, Tokyo, Shanghai, and Hongkong. In 1987, she was proclaimed National Artist for Theater and Music for her dedication and propagation of original Filipino theater and music. She was married to National Artist for Literature Amado V. Hernandez. Atang, The Musical The musical play Atang, written by Floy Quintos, directed by Alexander Cortes, and with music by Von de Guzman, was shown at the Guerrero Theater, Palma Hall in UP 169 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV Diliman in 2008 as part of the Zarzuela Festival organized by the UP College of Arts and Letters. Playing the title role were Ayen Munji-Laurel, Sharmaine Centerera-Buencamino, Frances Makil-Ignacio, and Anna Migallos, supported by Bituin Escalante as Katy de la Cruz, Teroy Guzman as Ka Amado (Atang’s husband), and Frances Makil as the old Atang. The songs rendered by Ms. Laurel (Atang) included notable kundiman favorites— Nasaan Ka Irog, Pakiusap, Madaling Araw, Nabasag ang Banga (from the zarzuela Dalaging Bukid), and Masayang Dalaga (from the zarzuela Ang Kiri). Atang - Dulang May Musika staged at UP Diliman in 2008 Ayen Munji-Laurel, as Atang Sharmaine Centenera-Buencamino, alternating as Atang She also sang duets with her husband Ka Amado such as Kitang Dalawa and Pilipinas Kong Mahal. But what elicited enthusiastic audience response were the duets with Katy de la Cruz, Magkano ang Bibingka Mo? and Mamang Gusting. The play also featured the two men in Atang’s life – General Artemio Ricarte and her husband, National Artist for Literature Amado Hernandez. Kitang Dalawa was originally a poem by Hernandez dedicated to his wife, which Von de Guzman brought to life with his music. 170 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms KATY! THE MUSICAL The musical Katy! is about the life of bodabil (vaudeville) star Katy de la Cruz. It was initially presented by Actors Studio East Production in 1988. The play commissioned Ryan Cayabyab for the music and Jose Javier Reyes for the lyrics. It starred Mitch Valdes in the title role. Biography of Katy de la Cruz Catalina de la Cruz was born in Bustos, Bulacan on February 13, 1907 and died on November 10, 2004. Popularly known as Katy de la Cruz, she was hailed as the “Queen of Filipino Jazz” and “Queen of Bobadil.” Her career spanned eight decades, during which time she became the highest paid Filipino entertainer. She appeared in films, jazz venues, theaters, and bodabil, the Filipino counterpart of the American vaudeville. Bodabil contained songs and dances, slapstick comedy routines, and magic acts, with chorus girls providing musical and dance support. It became popular in the Philippines from 1910 to the mid 1960’s, and was often used to fill in gaps between short Spanish zarzuelas or between acts of longer ones. Among the leading bodabil performers during its heyday were Bayani Casimiro (referred to as “the Fred Astaire of the Philippines”), Eddie Mesa (“Elvis Presley of the Philippines”), Diomedes Maturan (“Perry Como of the Philippines”), and Nora Aunor. Katy’s formal schooling ended when she was just in the third grade. In its place, she became active in show business. She started at the age of seven when she was hired by a Manila film theater to sing to the movie audience in between movie screenings. Those routines would later evolve into the bodabil (Filipino counterpart of Vaudeville), where Katy would learn her songs by listening to phonograph records and the English language from her brother. As a rising star in the bodabil circuit, she had the opportunity to perform alongside Atang de la Rama. Soon, she became the main performer in Manila’s largest theaters such as the Savoy, Palace, and Lux. Among her co-performers were prominent entertainers Chichay, Etang Discher, Patsy, and Mary Walter. Katy became associated with the jazz genre when it became nationally popular in the 1920’s. Her signature piece was the “St. Louis Blues.” At the same time, she was able to master the art of scat singing, a vocal improvisation without words in favor of nonsense syllables. In the 1930’s, she became identified with the song Balut, inspired by the local duck egg delicacy. The song is still sung by performers like Pilita Corrales, New Minstrels, and Lani Misalucha. She would also appear occasionally in films. She received the FAMAS Best Supporting Actress in 1953 for her role in the film Inspirasyon. 171 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV When bodabil started to decline, Katy decided to concentrate on concert performances and international tours. Some of the foreign venues included the Forbidden City nightclub in San Francisco. She also performed in popular casinos of Las Vegas and the concert halls of Thailand, Taiwan, Australia, Singapore, and Hawaii. She retired in San Francisco. Occasional performances, though, would still dot her schedules until the late 1980’s. Of her four children, two followed her career path. The eldest Angie, being the more active, paired with Nikki Ross to form the Wing Duo. This was a popular bodabil tandem in the 50’s. Her other child in show business was Veronica. Retiring from active life in the 1990’s, Katy died at the age of 97. The Musical The opening scene of the musical Katy! starts with a visit by Katy, already in her old age, to the theater where she used to perform during her glorious past. Learning that it would soon be closing down, Katy reminisces on her past. The musical unfolds as a retrospect of her performances. Other roles were portrayed by Tenten Muñoz as the young Katy, Celeste Legaspi as Olivia, Bernardo Bernardo as Tatay, Marco Sison as Peping, Robert Seña as Dolphy, Pinky Marquez as Hanna, Arlene Borja as Patsy, and Gigi Posadas as Mary. In January 2013, the revival of the musical was held at the Cultural Center of the Philippines Main Theater, co-produced with the Spotlight Artists Centre. It was presented again at the Meralco Theater from July to August of the same year. Portraying the title role was Isay Alvarez Seña, supported by Aicelle Santos as Teen Katy, Yedda Lambujon/Leana Tabunar as the young Katy, Dulce as Olivia, Tirso Cruz III as Tatay, Gian Magdangal as Peping, Epi Quizon as Dolphy, Tricia Jimenez as Hanna, Celine Fabie as Patsy, and CJ Mangahis as Mary. Some songs in the musical included Minsan Ang Minahal Ay Ako; Saging; Luha sa Kinalimutang Lupa; Aba, ba, ba; Boogie; and Tingnan Mo Nga Naman. 172 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms FLORANTE AT LAURA, THE MUSICAL The musical Florante at Laura was presented by Tanghalang Pilipino at the CCP Little Theater (Tanghalang Aurelio Tolentino) from July 7 to 24, 1988. This was in celebration of the 200th birth anniversary of the author Francisco Balagtas-Baltazar. The musical was selected as the official Philippine entry to the first ASEAN Theater Festival in August 1988. The music and musical arrangements were done by Nonong Buencamino, based on the book and lyrics of Tony Perez. Directed by Nonon Padilla, the production team included National Artist Salvador Bernal for set and costume design, Bobby Roces for lighting design, and Christine Blando for choreography. The lead roles were played by Bimbo Cerrudo and Ronnie Quizon alternating as Florante (Makata), Joanne Lorenzana/ Rina Reyes as Laura (Musa), Audie Gemora/Tony Marino as Adolfo (Lalaking Nakaitim), Dio Marco/Carlo Orosa as Aladin (Estudyante), Celeste Bueno/Gina Wilson as Flerida (Dalagita), Nonie Buencamino/Jake Macapagal as Minandro (Pusong-Babae), and Armand Malig as Sultan Ali-Adab (Matandang Negosyante). The Tale Behind the Musical This tale by Francisco Balagtas-Baltazar takes place in a remote tropical jungle between the mythical kingdoms of Albania and Persia. Two desperate warriors are lamenting the fates that have befallen them. Florante, a Christian duke from Crotona formerly bethrothed to Princess Laura of Albania, has been banished to die as a result of a coup led by his scheming cousin Adolfo. Aladin, a weak Muslim prince from Persia, has also been banished by his father, the Sultan Ali-Adab, for deserting his troops in battle. Count Adolfo’s hatred for Florante started during their early school days in Athens. During that time, Florante excelled in academics, sports, and the arts while Adolfo was far behind the achievements of his cousin. He in fact attempted to kill Florante during a school play out of jealousy, but the latter was saved by his best friend Menandro. As a result, Adolfo was expelled from the school and sent back to Albania. The two meet again during the funeral of Florante’s mother in Albania. An emissary from Crotona, Florante’s birthplace, arrives at Albania to report to King Linceo that the Persian general Osmalic has invaded their kingdom, and that Crotona 173 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV also is in need of military aid. Florante offers to lead the Albanian troops to fight the Persians, to the great distress of the king’s daughter, Princess Laura because she is secretly in love with him. Florante’s troops subdue the Muslims in Crotona, and a great celebration takes place. In the midst of the revelry, Florante recalls the memory of Laura and her beauty. He heads back to Albania without his knowing that the Turkish general Miramolin has invaded defenseless Albania and imprisoned the royal household during his absence. Florante and his troops arrive in time to rescue the monarchy and repel the Muslims, among them is Aladin. After being badly wounded by Florante, he deserts his army and escapes back to Persia. Insane with jealousy over Florante’s two victories and Laura’s affection for him, Adolfo plans to overthrow the monarchy and orders the execution of all government leaders. He abducts Laura and exiles Florante to the jungle, where he is bound to a tree and left at the mercy of the lions. Aladin’s fate is a result of his intense love for Flerida. She is a Muslim maiden who unknown to him, is desired by his own father, the Sultan Ali-Adab. He contrived to get rid of his son in order to court Flerida. The Sultan sends Aladin with his troops to assist Miramolin in capturing Albania. Reluctantly, Aladin prepares for battle as Flerida grieves. Aladin wounded by Florante in Albania, he retreats and returns to Persia. His father sentences him to death for abandoning his troops. Pleading for the life of her beloved Aladin, Flerida consents to marry the Sultan and thereby manages to reduce Aladin’s sentence. He is merely banished from the kingdom. Aladin is released from prison and leaves Persia hastily without seeing Flerida. Upon arrival in the jungle, he again meets Florante and frees him from bondage out of compassion for a fellow outcast. Minandro leads a rebellion in Albania and successfully overthrows Adolfo’s dictatorship. Adolfo takes Laura and escapes to the jungle. He tries to court Laura, but is rejected. So, he tries to overpower and rape her. On the eve of her wedding to the Sultan, Flerida disguises herself as a warrior and slips out of the palace to look for Aladin. She decides to hide in the jungle, where she comes upon Adolfo and Laura. Seeing Laura struggling to free herself from the hands of Adolfo, Flerida shoots him with an arrow and kills him. Like Florante and Aladin, the two ladies share their personal tragedies. The four “ill-starred” lovers meet in the jungle in a joyful reunion amidst their respective freedoms. They all travel to Albania, where Aladin and Flerida are converted to Christianity. Florante marries Laura, and Aladin marries Flerida in a jubilant double wedding. The reunited couple reigns as king and queen. Meanwhile, upon receiving news of the death of Sultan Ali-Adab, Aladin and Flerida travel back to Persia to rule as the new Sultan and his wife. 174 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms Synopsis of the Musical The musical is an adaptation of the original Florante at Laura where damned souls are given the chance to be saved from eternal damnation if they can prove the existence of true love. They are then transformed into the characters portrayed in the Florante at Laura story, where a happy ending liberates the two unfortunate pairs of lovers. The Makata (Poet) portrays the role of Florante as the story unfolds. Thrown in prison by a wealthy rival’s evil plotting, Makata pines for his beloved. He writes her a farewell letter and then slashes his wrists. Makata then descends into Disko Averno, an urban hell where all desperate souls who commit suicide out of love are sent. Makata meets Pusong Babae (Homosexual) who hanged himself to end his love for his best friend; Matandang Negosyante (Old Businessman) who shot himself out of guilt for falling in love with his daughter-in-law; Dalagita (Young Woman) who leaped from a tall building for being torn between her love for father and son; and Estudyante (Student) who had a drug overdose upon learning about his father’s love affair with his girlfriend. He also meets Lalaking Nakaitim (Man in Black) who presides over the disco and welcomes him as a new guest. Now on the brink of death, Makata hears the song of his Musa (Muse) as he clings to his last strand of life. Eager to acquire his soul, Lalaking Nakaitim agrees to propose a deal: Makata can escape eternal damnation only if he can prove the existence of true love. Lalaking Nakaitim stages a play in the Lungsod (City) outside Disko Averno, and designates roles to the disco dancers – Pusong Babae becomes Minandro, Matandang Negosyante is Sultan Ali-Adab, Dalagita is Flerida, Estudyante is Aladin, Makata is Florante (himself), and Lalaking Nakaitim is Adolfo. When the play is over and with their true love finally proven, Pusong Babae, Matandang Negosyante, Dalagita, and Estudyante are finally liberated from hell. Makata finds himself in his prison cell once more. A messenger informs him that his beloved and his rival have been wed, but that his beloved shed tears upon reading Makata’s letter. In a final appearance, the Muse descends toward the Makata to bestow him with her gift – the inspiration to write a verse epic (Awit) about love. The featured songs include Pag-ibig ay Laging May Panahon, Sa Gubat, Prutas at Lason, Isang Basong Pag-ibig, Awit ng Lumbay ni Florante, Ligaya ng Dibdib, and Sa Loob at Labas. 175 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV DARAGANG MAGAYON The musical play Daragang Magayon is a production for poetry and mixed media for male and female narrators, female voice, two percussionists, two pianists, and two dancers. It was first presented at the Cultural Center of the Philippines Loading Dock in March 1991. It was produced by the CCP Women’s Desk and the Coordinating Center for Dance to mark Women’s Month based on a poem by Merlinda C. Bobis. The music was composed by National Artist Ramon P. Santos, with choreography by Hazel Sabas, set and lighting design by Katsch SJ Catoy, and costume Ea Torrado as Magayon in the 2013 design by Julie Lluch Dalena. The readers were restaging of Daragang Magayon Dindo Angeles and Dessa Quesada, the vocalist was Johanna Cabili, while the musicians were Josefino “Chino” Toledo, Verne de la Peña, Mauricia Borromeo, and Leticia del Valle. It also featured dancers Wendy Panganiban and Brando Miranda assisted by Ballet Philippines and the New Zealand Ballet. The Myth Behind the Musical This myth on the origin of Mount Mayon is centered on an immortal tale of love familiar to all people in the Bicol region. They would like to believe that the lovers Magayon, the beautiful maiden for whom the volcano is named, and her lover Ulap must be kissing. The only daughter of local chieftain Makusog, Magayon falls in love with Ulap, the brave son of a neighboring tribe’s chieftain. However, a jealous suitor named Pagtuga kidnaps Makusog and threatens to kill him unless Magayon marries him instead of Ulap. With hands tied in order to save her father’s life, Magayon sadly agrees. Just as they are about to be wed, Ulap appears at the ceremony and kills Pagtuga. Magayon rushes into Ulap’s arms but she is unfortunately struck by a stray arrow. As she lies dying in his arms, Ulap is also fatally stabbed in the back by one of Pagtuga’s men. The two lovers are laid to rest. The mound of earth under which they are buried grows bigger with the passage of time. Eventually, the mound rises up to become known as “the volcano with a perfect cone,” named Mayon. The breathtaking symmetry of Mt. Mayon has inspired visual and performing artists alike. An example of this is composer Francisco Buencamino’s Fantasy for Piano and Orchestra, Mayon, depicting the carefree life in the region until the volcano erupts and destroys all life and vegetation. When the dust settles, however, the people return to their usual chores and enjoy life once more. 176 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms Restaging of Daragang Magayon The restaging of the original musical play was held at the CCP Main Theater on February 8, 2013, followed by another one in Albay entitled Daragang Magayon: An Istorya ni Mayon. This musical revival was a production of E-Dance Theater and it was also supported by the Bicol Provincial Government. The aim was to revitalize its tourism program that would highlight the rich cultural heritage of Bicol. A major twist was the use of technology and multimedia. It included film and animation and some dance revisions to meet the choreographic demands of the new production directed by Katrina Santos Mercado. It was also highlighted by the involvement of National Artist for Literature Virgilio Almario for poetry, Albay poet laureate (one who is regarded by a country or region as its most eminent or representative poet) Abdon Balde for dramaturgy (the art or technique of dramatic composition and theatrical representation), and Gerald Mercado for choreography. The music of Ramon Santos was retained. The composer himself conducted an ensemble consisting of the UP Rondalla, Novo Concertante Manila Choir, and singers Stefanie Diclas Quintin (soprano), Agrifino Jonaf del Fierro (bass), and Jay-El Viteno (tenor). The major characters were played by Ea Torrado as Magayon, Victor Maguad as Ulap, Francis Cascano as Pagtuga, and Marcus Tolentino as Makusog. The costume designer was Julie Lluch Dalena. NOLI ME TANGERE, THE MUSICAL The musical play Noli Me Tangere was staged at the CCP Little Theater from February 1 to 4, 1996 as a production of Tanghalang Pilipino. The creative team included Ryan Cayabyab as composer and musical director, National Artist Bienvenido Lumbera as librettist, Edna Vida as choreographer, National Artist Salvador Bernal as set and costume designer, Masaaki Sano as lighting designer, Gerry Fernandez as associate lighting designer, and Nonon Padilla as stage director. 177 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV The role of Crisostomo Ibarra is alternately played by John Arcilla and Audie Gemora, Maria Clara by Gigi Posadas, Padre Damaso by Bodjie Pascua/Bernardo Bernardo, Padre Bernardo Salvi by Eugene Villaluz/Raul Roxas, Elias by Calvin Millado/Raul Roxas, Kapitan Santiago de los Santos by Lito Villareal, Doña Victorina de los Reyes by Sheila Francisco/Peaches Gallegos, Sisa by Irma Adlawan/Mia Ongsiako, Tia Isabel by Clottie Gealogo/Alma May Dalida, and Alfonso Linares by Roden Araneta. The musical play closely follows the storyline of the original novel and the opera. There are slight differences in the partitioning of the story into the different acts, in the dramatization of the ending, as well as in the music and libretto which are entirely exclusive between opera and musical play. The musical play assumes a more contemporary approach in the musical compositions owing to Cayabyab’s chromatic and rhythmically innovative style, as compared with de Leon’s highly tonal and more lyrical character. Selected songs in the musical include Sa Muling Pagkikita, Dalawang Liham, Tatlong Sulok ng Pag-ibig, Ang Mga Sawimpalad, Ang Multo sa Lawa, Ang Totoo ay Totoo, and Sa Bagtasan ng Mga Landas. The musical play had its rerun in 2011 during the 150th anniversary of Rizal’s birth, and again in 2013, both times at the CCP Little Theater. EL FILIBUSTERISMO, THE MUSICAL The musical play El Filibusterismo is a two-act play that was staged at the CCP Main Theater from August 8 to 10, 1997 as a production of Tanghalang Pilipino. The creative team was composed of Ryan Cayabyab for music, Jovy Miroy for the libretto, Edna Vida for the choreography, National Artist Salvador Bernal for the set and costume design, and Nonon Padilla for stage direction. The role of Simoun/Crisostomo Ibarra was alternately played by John Arcilla and Bernardo Bernardo. Josephine Roces was Maria Clara, Emmy P. Cayabyab and Melani Mabilangan alternated as Paulita Gomez, Miguel Vera was Isagani, and Ariel Dayanghirang was Basilio. They were complemented by a large chorus. The musical play closely follows the Rizal novel, whose major character Crisostomo Ibarra disguised as Simoun. He returns to Manila from thirteen years of absence in order to find his beloved Maria Clara. Another reason is to stage a revolution to emancipate the country 178 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms from colonial rule. His plots would fail more than once. The first attempt fails because of the death of Maria Clara. The second attempt fails after his bomb plot was foiled during a wedding festivity by his associates Basilio and Isagani. Simoun would later take shelter in the house of Padre Florentino after escaping arrest by the authorities for his plots. He commits suicide there through poisoning. The play ends with Isagani witnessing a religious procession as Simoun lay dead from his own frustrations and desolation. MAGSIMULA KA, THE MUSICAL The musical play Magsimula Ka by Gines Tan was staged at the CCP Main Theater from April 7 to 24, 1988. As the winner of the CCP Playwriting Contest in 1983, it became one of the longest running musicals at the CCP. Later, it underwent a series of revivals in the ensuing years while some of its initial lead performers eventually became stars in their own right. Magsimula Ka is the story of young dreamers whose ambitions begin to fade in life’s realities. They are part of the graduating class filled with hope but end up compromising their idealism for their own survival. Miguel is a young composer whose father forces him to forego his music in favor of a business career. Monina wants to be a social worker to help the less privileged but is discouraged by the problems that go with the profession. Mandy has a beautiful voice but circumstances lead him instead to singing in a cheap beer garden for lack of support. Mario is a talented scriptwriter whose creativity is directed to writing “sex advice” columns in a tabloid. The play responds to the young peoples’ lingering question of whether there is hope for them in this cruel world. A major factor in realizing this hope is to start and uphold one’s talent or ambition despite all odds. These are evident when they meet a disabled girl whom they befriend and teach how to overcome her physical and psychological suffering; when the beer garden hostesses where Mandy sings take pride in themselves; when Miguel’s mother finds fulfillment in her son’s eventual success; or when Miguel’s younger sister plays a crucial role in his reconciliation with their father. The three boys – Miguel, Mandy, and Mario – decide to join a national pop-song competition ‘Philippop’ and reach the final stage. The finals represent the crucial part of the play where the songs of equally talented groups are also performed. Here, the cast of veteran singers form part of the competition. A romance also develops between Miguel 179 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV and Monina. The climactic song Magsimula Ka is a fitting theme for the musical and its contestants in search of fame and fortune. The cast was a combination of veteran singers and new talents that included Dio Marco alternating with Joey Lorenzo as Miguel, Isay Alvarez as Monina, Armand Malig/Bobby Martino as Mandy, and Albert Jimenez/Rico Villavert as Mario. Others in the cast included Jograd de la Torre as Jograd, Beverly Salviejo as Manang, Oby Castañeda/Edna Triste as Mr. and Mrs. Madrigal, Shielu Bharwani as Millie, and Alana Soriano as Della. Veteran guest performers were Celeste Legaspi, Leah Navarro, Leo Valdez, Marco Sison, Pat Castillo, Rico J. Puno, Dulce, Angelique Lazo, Carlo Orosa, and Gigi Posadas. The composer/musical director was Gines Tan, while the musical arranger was Ryan Cayabyab. Choreography was by Edna Vida, set design by Ferdie Jingco, light design by Monino Duque, sound design by Mylo Sarmiento, and costume coordination by Edgar Alegre. Direction was by Nestor U. Torre. Numerous songs in the play eventually became popular hits. These include: Magandang Gabi, Buhay Ko’t Pag-ibig, Kundi Ka Masilayan, Kahit Kailanman, Ialay Sa Akin, PaIstaran, Hiyas Na Pugad, Ang Nais Ko, Katuwaan, Ang Dapat Masunod, Buhay ng Atsay/Kilabot ng Atsay, Mundo’y Laging Bata, Mahirap Magpalaki ng Magulang, Delia…Dinggin Mo!, Halaga ng Buhay, Pa’no Kita Liligawan?, Mga Diwatang Kalapati, Kahit Saan, Kahit Kailan, Halina Sa Baclaran, Munting Habilin, Sinong Magwawagi, Sinong Masasawi?, Higit Kailan Pa Man, and Ang Katutubong Pilipina. For the “Philippop Finals,” the song entries included Pangarap, Pag-ibig, Pag-asa, May Dilim, May Liwanag, Kahit Isang Dukha, May Langit Ding Malalasap, Buhay Disco, Sisikat Din Ako, Tanging Ikaw Lamang, Sa Tuwing Kapiling Ka, and Magsimula Ka. A revival of the musical was held at the Music Museum, with one of the original stars Isay Alvarez and her husband Robert Seña as producer and director, respectively. Opening with the Philippop scene, the guest stars were Jamie Rivera, Isay Alvarez Seña, Robert Seña, and Jenine Desiderio. The scene turns back the clock to the graduation ceremony of four friends – Miguel (Poppert Bernadas), Mandy (Myke Salomon), Mario (Fredison Lo), and Monina (Ciara Sotto). It also featured Ana Feleo as Miguel’s mother. The theme song Magsimula Ka won three major prizes – Song of the Year Award in the First Cecil Awards of 1982, Grand Prize award in the First ASEAN Song Festival in 1981, and the Third Prize award in the 4th Metro Manila Popular Music Festival in 1981. The popularity of the play resulted in its elevation into a full-length musical with the same title that won the 1983 CCP Playwriting Contest. This has been performed more than 80 times around the country. 180 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms SUMMARY In the Philippines, the musical play is a more recent development than its Broadway and West End counterparts, relying mostly on adaptations from novels, literary works, or biographical sketches of famous artists. The musical play entitled Andres Bonifacio: Ang Dakilang Anak-Pawis is a five-act work commissioned by Alfonso Puyat in 1979, depicting the life of revolutionary hero Andres Bonifacio. Music was by Jerry Dadap. The musical play Atang - Dulang May Musikal, written by Floy Quintos and directed by Alexander Cortes, was shown at UP Diliman in 2008 as part of the Zarzuela Festival organized by the UP College of Arts and Letters. It is a musical based on the life of the first superstar of the Philippines, Atang Dela Rama. The musical Katy! is about the life of bodabil star Katy de la Cruz. It was initially presented by Actors Studio East Production in 1988. The music and musical arrangements were done by Nonong Buencamino, based on the book and lyrics of Tony Perez. The play commissioned Ryan Cayabyab for the music, Jose Javier Reyes for the lyrics, and starred Mitch Valdes in the title role. The musical Florante at Laura was presented by Tanghalang Pilipino at the CCP Little Theater (Tanghalang Aurelio Tolentino) from July 7 to 24, 1988 in celebration of the 200th birth anniversary of the author Francisco Balagtas-Baltazar. It was selected as the official Philippine entry to the first ASEAN Theater Festival in August 1988. The musical play Daragang Magayon, a production for poetry and mixed media for male and female narrators, female voice, two percussionists, two pianists, and two dancers, is based on a poem by Merlinda C. Bobis. It was first presented at the Cultural Center of the Philippines Loading Dock on March 1 and 2, 1991. It was produced by the CCP Women’s Desk and the Coordinating Center for Dance to celebrate Women’s Month. The musical play on Noli Me Tangere was staged at the CCP Little Theater from February 1 to 4, 1996 as a production of Tanghalang Pilipino. The creative team included Ryan Cayabyab as Composer and Musical Director, National Artist Bienvenido Lumbera as Librettist, Edna Vida as Choreographer, National Artist Salvador Bernal as Set and Costume Designer, Masaaki Sano as Lighting Designer, Gerry Fernandez as Associate Lighting Designer, and Nonon Padilla as Stage Director. The musical play closely follows the storyline of the original novel and the opera. The musical play assumes a more contemporary approach in the musical compositions owing to Cayabyab’s chromatic and rhythmically innovative style. 181 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office.  MUSIC Quarter IV The musical play on El Filibusterismo was staged at the CCP Main Theater from August 8 to 10, 1997 as a production of Tanghalang Pilipino. The creative team was composed Libretto, Edna Vida for the Choreography, National Artist Salvador Bernal for the Set and Costume Design, and Nonon Padilla for Stage Direction. The musical play closely follows the Rizal novel, whose major character Crisostomo Ibarra disguised as Simoun. o f R y a n C a y a b y a b f o r M u s i c , J o v y M i r o y f o r t h e The musical play Magsimula Ka by Gines Tan was staged at the CCP Main Theater from April 7 to 24, 1988. As the winner of the CCP Playwriting Contest in 1983, it became one of the longest running musicals at the CCP. Later, it underwent a series of revivals in the ensuing years while some of its initial lead performers eventually became stars in their own right. Magsimula Ka is the story of young dreamers whose ambitions begin to fade in life’s realities. They are part of the graduating class filled with hope but end up compromising their idealism for their own survival. The play responds to the young peoples’ lingering question of whether there is hope for them in this cruel world. A major factor in realizing this hope is to start and uphold one’s talent or ambition despite all odds. WHAT TO KNOW 1. How did the different forms of Philippine opera, ballet, and musical plays reflect life in the 20th century? 2. Discuss the characteristics of Philippine opera, ballet, musical play, and other multi-media forms. Explain your answers. 3. What role did media and social media play in the development of these musical genres specifically the radio, television, video, and recordings? 4 Explain how theatrical elements in a selected part of a musical play are combined with music and media to achieve certain effects. 5. Describe how an idea or story in a musical play is presented in a live performance. 6. Describe how an idea or story in a musical play is presented in a music video. 7. How is Broadway music relevant to life in the 20th century? 8. Discuss some characteristics of Broadway music that made it popular. 182 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms WHAT TO PROCESS Listening and Singing Activities 1. Your teacher will divide the class into three groups. Each group will be assigned to research lyrics of three musical excerpts of any opera, Broadway musical, and Philippine musical play. 2. Your teacher will play musical excerpts from the songs listed below. 3. Listen to the selections to appreciate the music. 4. Sing the selections expressively together with the recordings or from the internet (You Tube), using the lyrics that you researched. Time allotment for each group is five (5) to ten (10) minutes only. 5. You may add choreography and use musical instruments, if needed. 6. Your teacher will evaluate the performance based on: musicianship (musical elements) 50%, audience impact 20%, stage presence 20%, stage discipline and deportment10%. 7. Your teacher will announce the “Best Performance” award. Songs from Philippine Operas a. La Loba Negra (Napakahaba na ng Gabi) b. Noli Me Tangere (Kay Tamis ng Buhay, Huwag mo akong pabayaan, Awit ng Gabi ni Sisa) c. El Filibusterismo Songs from Broadway Musicals a. Phantom of the Opera (All I Ask of You, Music of the Night, Think of Me, Phantom of the Opera) b. West Side Story (I Have a Dream, Somewhere, Maria, Tonight) c. Carousel (If I Loved You, You’ll Never Walk Alone ) d. Sound of Music (My Favorite Things, Eidelweiss, Do Re Mi, So Long Farewell, The Lonely Goatherd, Maria, and The Sound of Music) e. Miss Saigon (Sun and Moon, Movie in My Mind, I’d Give My Life for You, I Still Believe, Last Night of the World) f. Les Miserables (On My Own, I Dreamed a Dream, Empty Chairs and Empty Tables, Do You Hear the People Sing?, Castle on a Cloud) g. Beauty and the Beast (Something There, Be Our Guest, If I Can’t Love Her, A Change in Me, Beauty and the Beast) 183 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC  Quarter IV Songs from Philippine Musical Plays a. Noli Me Tangere (Buksan Mo ang Iyong mga Mata, Paalam na Pag-ibig,Sa Muling Pagkikita, Dalawang Liham, Tatlong Sulok ng Pag-ibig, Ang Mga Sawimpalad, Ang Multo sa Lawa, Ang Totoo ay Totoo, Sa Bagtasan ng Mga Landas) b. El Filibusterismo (Awit ng Isang Lawin, Aklas) c. Andres Bonifacio: Ang Dakilang Anak-Pawis (Marangal na Dalit ng Katagalugan, La Deportacion, Awit ng Manggagawa, Anuman Gagawin) d. Katy! (Balut!; Ang Entablado ay Mundo; Tale, Tale; Pahiram ng Kanta; Tupada; Bituing Tahimik; Minsan ang Minahal ay Ako) e. Atang - Dulang May Musika (Nasaan Ka Irog, Pakiusap, Madaling Araw, Nabasag ang Banga (from the zarzuela Dalaging Bukid), Masayang Dalaga) f. Florante at Laura (Pag-ibig ay Laging May Panahon, Sa Gubat, Prutas at Lason, Isang Basong Pag-ibig, Awit ng Lumbay ni Florante, Ligaya ng Dibdib, Sa Loob at Labas) g. Daragang Magayon (note: research on You Tube) h. Magsimula Ka (Magandang Gabi, Magsimula Ka, Pangarap, Pagibig, Pag-asa, May Dilim, May Liwanag, Kahit Isang Dukha, May Langit Ding Malalasap, Buhay Disco, Sisikat Din Ako, Tanging Ikaw Lamang, Sa Tuwing Kapiling Ka) Enrichment Activities Watch Live / TV Performances 1. Watch live performances of Philippine opera, ballet, and musical plays that had been discussed in class if available in your area, or watch live performances on TV or the internet. 2. Watch a live performance of a Western opera (ex: Rigoletto, Tosca, La Traviata, Aida), ballet (ex: Swan Lake, Nutcracker), or a Broadway musical, or watch video clips or excerpts on TV or the internet. 3. Write a reaction paper on what you have watched. Video Clips 1. You will be divided into four groups. 2. Together with your groupmates, explore how multi-media arts can be used to portray 20th century musical styles (Philippine opera, ballet, musical plays, and Broadway musicals) through a five-minute video clip using your digital cameras or mobile phones. 3. You may use the internet as your reference. 4. Show and discuss your video works in class. 184 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms WHAT TO UNDERSTAND Group Activity. Your teacher will divide the class into four groups. 1. Within your group, brainstorm among yourselves one work from each of the following musical forms: a. one Philippine opera b. one Philippine musical play c. one Philippine ballet 2. Create a short musical work (opera, ballet, or musical play) using media and technology. You may use local folktales, legends, history, biographies of heroes, and customs and traditions as themes of your musical work. 3. Create or improvise appropriate sounds, music, gestures, movements, and costumes using media and technology. 4. For the music, you may compose your own songs or you may use or adapt the melody of existing songs such as folksongs, indigenous music of your area, pop, classical, Broadway, and OPM. Then, write your own lyrics suited to the melody for the song adaptation. 5. What insights did I gain from this activity? WHAT TO PERFORM Group or Individual Activities 1. Concert - Live Performance of Philippine musicals and Broadway musicals a. The class will be divided into two groups. b. Each group will present an excerpt of a 20th or 21st century Philippine musical and an excerpt of a Broadway musical. c. Highlight the similarities and differences between these two forms of musicals. d. You may use musical instruments as accompaniment for your music works or you may perform a capella (without accompaniment). e. Use props and costumes, if needed. 185 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC 2.  Quarter IV Recording or Music Video a. Your group leader will choose 1 or 2 members to record the performance of your group members using a cassette recorder or make a music video using your cellular phone, digital camera, or video camera. b. Play the recorded performance or show the music video to your classmates. c. Your teacher will choose the “Best Performer” based on musicianship (60%), audience impact (20%), and stage presence (20%). Evaluation of Performing Activities Rating Scale: 5 - Very Good 4 - Good 3 - Fair 2 - Poor 1 - Needs Follow-up Rate scores are based on the performance quality. 1. 2 How well did I perform with my group the following musical styles? a. Philippine opera b. Phillippine ballet c. Philippine musical play d. Broadway musical __________ __________ __________ __________ How well can I identify the different musical genres based on instrumentation, text, and purpose? __________ 3. How well can I describe the characteristics of each through listening and singing to their melody, harmony, rhythm, text, and mass appeal? __________ 4. How well can I identify the different musical styles (opera, ballet, musical plays, Broadway musicals)? __________ 186 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 20th and 21st Century Multimedia Forms ARTS 187 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Quarter I: MODERN ART CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of… 1. art elements and processes by synthesizing and applying prior learnings and skills. 2. the arts as integral to the development of organizations, spiritual belief, historical events, scientific discoveries, natural disasters/occurrences, and other external phenomena. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner… 1. performs/participates competently in a presentation of a creative impression (verbal/nonverbal) from the various art movements. 2. recognizes the difference and uniqueness of the art styles of the various art movements (techniques, processes, elements, and principles of art). LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner… 1. analyzes art elements and principles in the production of work following a specific art style from the various art movements. 2. identifies distinct characteristics of arts from the various art movements. 3. identifies representative artists and Filipino counterparts from the various art movements. 4. derives the mood, idea, or message from selected artworks. 5. determines the role or function of artwork by evaluating their utilization and combination of art elements and principles. 6. uses artworks to derive the traditions/history of the various art movements. 7. compares the characteristics of artworks produced in the various art movements. 8. creates artworks guided by techniques and styles of the various art movements. 9. describes the influence of iconic artists belonging to the various art movements. 10. applies different media techniques and processes to communicate ideas, experiences, and stories showing the characteristics of the various art movements. 11. evaluates works of art in terms of artistic concepts and ideas using criteria from the various art movements. 12. shows the influences of modern art movements on Philippine art forms. 13. mounts an exhibit using completed artworks influenced by Modern Art movements. From the Department of Education curriculum for ARTS Grade 10 (2014) 188 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Quarter I: MODERN ART INTRODUCTION I n all of human history, art has mirrored life in the community, society, and the world in all its colors, lines, shapes, and forms. The same has been true in the last two centuries, with world events and global trends being reflected in the art movements. The decades from 1900 to the present have seen the human race living in an evershrinking planet. The 20th century saw a boom in the interchange of ideas, beliefs, values, and lifestyles that continues to bring the citizens of the world closer together. Technological breakthroughs From the Industrial Revolution of the late 1800s, the world zoomed into the Electronic Age in the mid-1900s, then into the present Cyberspace Age. In just over 100 years, humans went from hand-cranked telephones to hands-free mobile phones, from the first automobiles to inter-planetary space vehicles, from local radio broadcasting to international news coverage via satellite, from vaccinations against polio and smallpox to laser surgery. Social, political, and environmental changes There has been migration across the globe, allowing different cultures, languages, skills, and even physical characteristics of different races to intermingle like never before. The 20th century also suffered through two World Wars, and several regional wars in Asia, Africa, and the Middle East. There was the Great Depression of the 1930s, and the Asian economic crisis of the 1990s. Considered the modern-day plague, AIDS has afflicted millions the world over, while millions more continue to live in hunger, disease, and poverty. Environmental destruction has also become a major concern. Effects on the world of art The art movements of the late 19th century to the 20th century captured and expressed all these and more. Specifically, these were the movements known as impressionism and expressionism. While earlier periods of art had a quite set conventions as to the style, technique, and treatment of their subjects, impressionists and expressionists conveyed their ideas and feelings in bold, innovative ways. These were the exciting precursors of the modern art of the 21st century. 189 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Impressionism: Origins of the Movement I mpressionism was an art movement that emerged in the second half of the 19th century among a group of Paris-based artists. The duration of the impressionist movement itself was quite short, less than 20 years from 1872 to the mid-1880s. But it had a tremendous impact and influence on the painting styles that followed, such as neo-impressionism, post-impressionism, fauvism, and cubism—and even the artistic styles and movements of today. The name impressionism was coined from the title of a work by French painter Claude Monet, Impression, soleil levant (in English, Impression, Sunrise). Impression, Sunrise Claude Monet, 1872 Oil on canvas The term precisely captured what this group of artists sought to represent in their works: the viewer’s momentary “impression” of an image. It was not intended to be clear or precise, but more like a fleeting fragment of reality caught on canvas, sometimes in mid-motion, at other times awkwardly positioned—just as it would be in real life. 190 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art The Influence of Delacroix As with all emerging art movements, impressionism owed its inspiration to earlier masters. One major influence was the work of French painter Eugène Delacroix. Delacroix was greatly admired and emulated by the early impressionists—specifically for his use of expressive brushstrokes, his emphasis on movement rather than on clarity of form, and most of all his study of the optical effects of color. In particular, Delacroix’s painting, The Barque of Dante, contained a then revolutionary technique that would profoundly influence the coming impressionist movement. And it involved something as simple as droplets of water. The Barque of Dante Eugène Delacroix, 1822 Oil on canvas The painting is loosely based on a fictional scene from Dante’s Inferno, showing Dante and the poet Virgil crossing hell’s River Styx, while tormented souls struggle to climb aboard their boat. It is the drops of water running down the bodies of these doomed souls (see enlarged detail below) that are painted in a manner almost never used in Delacroix’s time. When studied closely, it is seen that four different, unmixed pigments—yellow, green, red, and white—create the image of each drop and its shadow. Viewed from a little distance, these colors blend to represent individual drops glistening with light. The distinct colors merge in the eye of the viewer to appear monochromatic (single-colored) or, in this case of water droplets, colorless. In short, an impression is formed. Putting this and similar principles into wider practice, future painters would carry French art into one of its richest periods: impressionism. 191 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Impressionism: A Break from Past Painting Traditions T here were several areas in which impressionist artists moved away from the established practices of art at that time. These involved their use of color, choice of subject matter and setting, and technique for capturing light and conveying movement. Color and Light The painting conventions and techniques of earlier art periods were very much concerned with line, form, and composition. In contrast, the impressionists painted with freely brushed colors that conveyed more of a visual effect than a detailed rendering of the subject. They used short “broken” strokes that were intentionally made visible to the viewer. They also often placed pure unmixed colors side by side, rather than blended smoothly or shaded. The result was a feeling of energy and intensity, as the colors appeared to shift and move—again, just as they do in reality. “Everyday” Subjects Impressionists also began to break away from the creation of formally posed portraits and grandiose depictions of mythical, literary, historical, or religious subjects. They ventured into capturing scenes of life around them, household objects, landscapes and seascapes, houses, cafes, and buildings. They presented ordinary people seemingly caught off-guard doing everyday tasks, at work or at leisure, or doing nothing at all. And they were not made to look beautiful or lifelike, as body parts could be distorted and facial features merely suggested by a few strokes of the brush. Painting Outdoors The location in which the impressionists painted was also different. Previously, still lifes, portraits, and landscapes were usually painted inside a studio. However, the impressionists found that they could best capture the ever-changing effects of light on color by painting outdoors in natural light. This gave their works a freshness and immediacy that was quite a change from the stiffer, heavier, more planned paintings of earlier masters. Open Composition Impressionist painting also moved away from the formal, structured approach to placing and positioning their subjects. They experimented with unusual visual angles, sizes of objects that appeared out of proportion, off-center placement, and empty spaces on the canvas. 192 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art The Influence of Photography Photography was in its early stages at this time as well. As it gained popularity, photography inspired impressionists to capture fleeting moments of action, whether in landscapes or in the day-to-day lives of people. But whereas camera snapshots provided objective, true-to-life images, the artists were able to offer a subjective view of their subjects, expressing their personal perceptions rather than creating exact representations. They also had the advantage of manipulating color, which photography at that time still lacked. WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. How did the term impressionism originate? What did it mean? In what country did this art movement begin, and in what period of history? What was the significance of the painting technique used by Delacroix in the development of the impressionist style? What characteristics distinguished impressionism from the art movements of the earlier centuries? Cite and briefly describe at least three of these characteristics. How was the impressionist style influenced by the early stages of photography? WHAT TO PROCESS To help you understand the revolutionary technique for applying color introduced by the impressionists, experiment with this simplified process: 1. Take a set of watercolors (cake type or in tubes). Choose one secondary color: orange, green, or violet. 2. Color a shape on a paper using this single secondary color. 3. Beside it, color a similar shape using strokes of the two primary colors that are combined in that particular secondary color (ex: red + yellow = orange; blue + yellow = green; red + blue = violet). 4. Hold the paper some distance away and ask your classmates to comment on the “impression” of the secondary color you have created and the actual color itself. 193 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Impressionism: Works of Manet, Monet, and Renoir B y the 1870s, the stage was set for the emergence of the next major art movement in Europe, impressionism. It started with a group of French painters—that included Edouard Manet, Claude Monet, Auguste Renoir—and eventually spread to other countries, such as Italy, Germany, and The Netherlands. EDOUARD MANET Edouard Manet (1832-1883) was one of the first 19th century artists to depict modern-life subjects. He was a key figure in the transition from realism to impressionism, with a number of his works considered as marking the birth of modern art. Argenteuil Edouard Manet, 1874 Oil on canvas Rue Mosnier Decked With Flags Edouard Manet, 1878 Oil on canvas 194 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Café Concert Edouard Manet, 1878 Oil on canvas The Bar at the Folies-Bergere Edouard Manet, 1882 Oil on canvas CLAUDE MONET Claude Monet (1840-1926) was one of the founders of the impressionist movement along with his friends Auguste Renoir, Alfred Sisley, and Frédéric Bazille. He was the most prominent of the group; and is considered the most influential figure in the movement. Monet is best known for his landscape paintings, particularly those depicting his beloved flower gardens and water lily ponds at his home in Giverny. La Promenade Claude Monet, 1875 Oil on canvas The Red Boats, Argenteuil Claude Monet, 1875 Oil on canvas 195 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Bridge Over a Pond of Water Lilies Claude Monet, 1899 Oil on canvas Irises in Monet’s Garden Claude Monet, 1900 Oil on canvas AUGUSTE RENOIR Auguste Renoir (1841-1919), along with Claude Monet, was one of the central figures of the impressionist movement. His early works were snapshots of real life, full of sparkling color and light. By the mid-1880s, however, Renoir broke away from the impressionist movement to apply a more disciplined, formal technique to portraits of actual people and figure paintings. Dancer Auguste Renoir, 1874 Oil on canvas A Girl with a Watering Can Auguste Renoir, 1876 Oil on canvas 196 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Mlle Irene Cahen d’Anvers Auguste Renoir, 1880 Oil on canvas Luncheon of the Boating Party Auguste Renoir, 1881 Oil on canvas Post-Impressionism: Works of Cezanne and Van Gogh A fter the brief yet highly influential period of impressionism, an outgrowth movement known as post-impressionism emerged. The European artists who were at the forefront of this movement continued using the basic qualities of the impressionists before them—the vivid colors, heavy brush strokes, and true-to-life subjects. However, they expanded and experimented with these in bold new ways, like using a geometric approach, fragmenting objects and distorting people’s faces and body parts, and applying colors that were not necessarily realistic or natural. Two of the foremost post-impressionists were Paul Cézanne and Vincent van Gogh. PAUL CEZANNE Paul Cézanne (1839–1906) was a French artist and post-impressionist painter. His work exemplified the transition from late 19th-century impressionism to a new and radically different world of art in the 20th century—paving the way for the next revolutionary art movement known as expressionism. 197 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Hortense Fiquet in a Striped Skirt Paul Cezanne, 1878 Oil on canvas Still Life with Compotier Paul Cezanne, 1879-1882 Oil on canvas Harlequin Paul Cezanne, 1888-1890 Oil on canvas Boy in a Red Vest Paul Cezanne, 1890 Oil on canvas 198 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art VINCENT VAN GOGH Vincent van Gogh (1853-1890) was a post-impressionist painter from The Netherlands. His works were remarkable for their strong, heavy brush strokes, intense emotions, and colors that appeared to almost pulsate with energy. Van Gogh’s striking style was to have a far-reaching influence on 20th century art, with his works becoming among the most recognized in the world. Sheaves of Wheat in a Field Vincent van Gogh, 1885 Oil on canvas The Sower Vincent van Gogh, 1888 Oil on canvas Still Life: Vase with Fifteen Sunflowers Vincent van Gogh, 1888 Oil on canvas Bedroom at Arles Vincent van Gogh, 1888 Oil on canvas 199 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Starry Night Vincent van Gogh, 1889 Oil on canvas Wheat Field with Cypresses Vincent van Gogh, 1889 Oil on canvas WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Name three of the most prominent artists of the impressionist movement. Cite one outstanding characteristic of each of these artists. Who were two of the most famous post-impressionists? What new techniques or styles distinguished post-impressionism from the earlier impressionism? Identify two to three specific artworks where these techniques are prominently seen. WHAT TO PROCESS Creating Your Own Impressionist Artwork: Impasto One of the most distinctive painting techniques used by impressionist artists was impasto. Impasto is the very heavy application of paint to the canvas—often with a spatula or knife instead of a paintbrush, and sometimes even directly squeezed from the tube. Materials: ¼ illustration board or chipboard Tubes of acrylic paints (can be shared among the class members) Paintbrushes Wooden popsicle sticks Pencil Rags for clean up 200 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Procedure: 1. Decide on a simple design for your artwork. Keep in mind what colors of paints are available to you. 2. Using a pencil, sketch in the general design on the illustration board or chipboard. 3. Apply the paints to your design with the brush, then more thickly with the popsicle sticks and, in certain spots, squeeze the paint directly from the tube. 4. Allow the paint to dry thoroughly before handling or displaying the finished artwork. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND A. Impressionism and the Rise of Modern Art 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Was the term “impressionism” fitting for this art movement? Why do you say so? From your knowledge of world history during the late 19th century, do you see a relation between the impressionist styles and the major events of that period? Do you agree that impressionism set the stage for the succeeding movements of modern art? If so, in what ways? Do you see this style reflected even in the works of today’s artists? Explain briefly. Do you know of any Filipino artists who also used the impressionist style? If yes, explain how they applied this style in their works. If not, you may want to research on this on the internet to discover something new. Elements and Principles of Art in Impressionism 1. As a review, briefly describe each of the following elements of art which you have learned in your Art classes in the earlier grade levels. a. Line b. Shape c. Form d. Space e. Color f. Value g. Texture 201 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I 2. Now review the following principles of art which you have studied before. Briefly describe each one. a. Rhythm / Movement b. Balance c. Emphasis d. Harmony / Unity / Variety e. Proportion 3. For each element of art above, cite one sample work by an impressionist or post-impressionist painter and briefly describe how this element was applied in a new way. You may use the following sample format: Ex.: 4. For each principle of art above, cite one sample work by an impressionist or post-impressionist painter and briefly describe how this principle was applied in a new way. You may use the following sample format: Ex.: C. Element: Line Name of artist:_______________________________________ Title of work: _______________________________________ How the element was applied: __________________________ Principle: Rhythm/Movement Name of artist:_______________________________________ Title of work: _______________________________________ How the principle was applied: _________________________ Impressionism and You 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Which of the impressionist masters—Manet, Monet, Renior, Cezanne, and Van Gogh—has a style that most strongly appeals to you? Explain briefly. Is there a value in learning about art movements like impressionism that arose over a century ago, halfway around the world from us? Why or why not? On a personal level, what struck you most about the impressionist style of art? Would you want to experiment further with painting in this style? Explain briefly. Would you want to own an artwork in the impressionist style? Why or why not? 202 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Culminating “Exhibit of Modern Art” Having learned about and understood the concept and techniques of impressionism, you can now prepare your impasto artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. 1. 2. Properly label your artwork with an original title, your name, the date, and the technique used (impasto). Your Arts teacher will store the finished artworks for inclusion in the exhibit at the end of the quarter. Expressionism: A Bold New Movement I n the early 1900s, there arose in the Western art world a movement that came to be known as expressionism. Expressionist artists created works with more emotional force, rather than with realistic or natural images. To achieve this, they distorted outlines, applied strong colors, and exaggerated forms. They worked more with their imagination and feelings, rather than with what their eyes saw in the physical world. Among the various styles that arose within the expressionist art movements were: • neoprimitivism • fauvism • dadaism • surrealism • social realism Neoprimitivism Neoprimitivism was an art style that incorporated elements from the native arts of the South Sea Islanders and the wood carvings of African tribes which suddenly became popular at that time. Among the Western artists who adapted these elements was Amedeo Modigliani, who used the oval faces and elongated shapes of African art in both his sculptures and paintings. 203 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Head Amedeo Modigliani, c. 1913 Stone Yellow Sweater Amedeo Modigliani, 1919 Oil on canvas Fauvism Fauvism was a style that used bold, vibrant colors and visual distortions. Its name was derived from les fauves (“wild beasts”), referring to the group of French expressionist painters who painted in this style. Perhaps the most known among them was Henri Matisse. Woman with Hat Henri Matisse, 1905 Oil on canvas Blue Window Henri Matisse, 1911 Oil on canvas 204 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Dadaism Dadaism was a style characterized by dream fantasies, memory images, and visual tricks and surprises—as in the paintings of Marc Chagall and Giorgio de Chirico below. Although the works appeared playful, the movement arose from the pain that a group of European artists felt after the suffering brought by World War I. Wishing to protest against the civilization that had brought on such horrors, these artists rebelled against established norms and authorities, and against the traditional styles in art. They chose the child’s term for hobbyhorse, dada, to refer to their new “non-style.” Melancholy and Mystery of a Street Giorgio de Chirico, 1914 Oil on canvas I and the Village Marc Chagall, 1911 Oil on canvas Surrealism Surrealism was a style that depicted an illogical, subconscious dream world beyond the logical, conscious, physical one. Its name came from the term “super realism,” with its artworks clearly expressing a departure from reality—as though the artists were dreaming, seeing illusions, or experiencing an altered mental state. 205 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Persistence of Mem o r y Salvador Dali, 1931 Oil on canvas Many surrealist works depicted morbid or gloomy subjects, as in those by Salvador Dali. Others were quite playful and even humorous, such as those by Paul Klee and Joan Miro. Diana Paul Klee, 1932 Oil on wood Personages with Star Joan Miro, 1933 Oil on canvas 206 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Social Realism The movement known as social realism.expressed the artist’s role in social reform. Here, artists used their works to protest against the injustices, inequalities, immorality, and ugliness of the human condition. In different periods of history, social realists have addressed different issues: war, poverty, corruption, industrial and environmental hazards, and more—in the hope of raising people’s awareness and pushing society to seek reforms. Ben Shahn’s Miners’ Wives, for example, spoke out against the hazardous conditions faced by coal miners, after a tragic accident killed 111 workers in Illinois in 1947, leaving their wives and children in mourning. Miners’ Wives Ben Shahn, 1948 Egg tempera on board Guer nica Pablo Picasso, 1937 Oil on canvas (Size: 11’ 5 1/2” x 25’ 5 3/4”) Pablo Picasso’s Guernica has been recognized as the most monumental and comprehensive statement of social realism against the brutality of war. Filling one wall of the Spanish Pavilion at the 1937 World’s Fair in Paris, it was Picasso’s outcry against the German air raid of the town of Guernica in his native Spain. 207 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Created in the mid-1900s, Guernica combined artistic elements developed in the earlier decades with those still to come. It made use of the exaggeration, distortion, and shock technique of expressionism. At the same time, it had elements of the emerging style that would later be known as cubism. Abstractionism A nother group of artistic styles emerged at the same time as the expressionist movement. It had the same spirit of freedom of expression and openness that characterized life in the 20th century, but it differed from expressionism in certain ways. This group of styles was known as abstractionism. The abstractionist movement arose from the intellectual points of view in the 20th century. In the world of science, physicists were formulating a new view of the universe, which resulted in the concepts of space-time and relativity. This intellectualism was reflected even in art. While expressionism was emotional, abstractionism was logical and rational. It involved analyzing, detaching, selecting, and simplifying. In previous centuries, works of art were a reflection, in one way or another, of the outside world. In 20th century abstractionism, natural appearances became unimportant. Artists reduced a scene into geometrical shapes, patterns, lines, angles, textures and swirls of color. The resulting works ranged from representational abstractionism, depicting stillrecognizable subjects (as in the artwork on the left), to pure abstractionism, where no recognizable subject could be discerned. Oval Still Life (Le Violon) Georges Braque, 1914 Oil on canvas Grouped under abstractionism are the following art styles: • cubism • futurism • mechanical style • nonobjectivism 208 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Cubism The cubist style derived its name from the cube, a threedimensional geometric figure composed of strictly measured lines, planes, and angles. Cubist artworks were, therefore, a play of planes and angles on a flat surface. Foremost among the cubists was Spanish painter/sculptor Pablo Picasso (right). In earlier styles, subjects were depicted in a three-dimensional manner, formed by light and shadow. In contrast, the cubists analyzed their subjects’ basic geometrical forms, and broke them up into a series of planes. Then they re-assembled these planes, tilting and interlocking them in different ways. Three Musicians Pablo Picasso, 1921 Oil on canvas Girl Before a Mirror (detail) Pablo Picasso, 1932 Oil on canvas In addition, the art of the past centuries had depicted a scene from a single, stationary point of view. In contrast, cubism took the contemporary view that things are actually seen hastily in fragments and from different points of view at the same time. This was reflected in the depiction of objects from more than one visual angle in the same painting (e.g., the bull’s head in Picasso’s Guernica, page 207). Human figures as well were often represented with facial features and body parts shown both frontally and from a side angle at once. This gave a sense of imbalance and misplacement that created immediate visual impact. It also gave cubism its characteristic feeling of dynamism and energy. To this day, variations of cubism continue to appear in many contemporary artworks. 209 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Futurism The movement known as futurism began in Italy in the early 1900s. As the name implies, the futurists created art for a fast-paced, machine-propelled age. They admired the motion, force, speed, and strength of mechanical forms. Thus, their works depicted the dynamic sensation of all these—as can be seen in the works of Italian painter Gino Severini. Armored Train Gino Severini, 1915 Oil on canvas Mechanical Style As a result of the futurist movement, what became known as the mechanical style emerged. In this style, basic forms such as planes, cones, spheres, and cylinders all fit together precisely and neatly in their appointed places. This can be seen in the works of Fernand Léger. Mechanical parts such as crankshafts, cylinder blocks, and pistons are brightened only by the use of primary colors. Otherwise, they are lifeless. Even human figures are mere outlines, rendered purposely without expression. The City Fernand Léger, 1919 Oil on canvas Nonobjectivism The logical geometrical conclusion of abstractionism came in the style known as nonobjectivism. From the very term “non-object,” works in this style did not make use of figures or even representations of figures. They did not refer to recognizable objects or forms in the outside world. 210 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Lines, shapes, and colors were used in a cool, impersonal approach that aimed for balance, unity, and stability. Colors were mainly black, white, and the primaries (red, yellow, and blue). Foremost among the nonobjectivists was Dutch painter Piet Mondrian. New York City Piet Mondrian, 1942 Oil on canvas WHAT TO KNOW A. Expressionism 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Describe how the different elements and principles were used by expressionist artists to convey their individual style. Discuss three examples from works in these Learner’s Materials. What qualities make an artwork expressionistic? Where did neoprimitivism get its influences? Who is the French artist famous for his fauvist style? What are the characteristics of fauvism? Why was the child’s term “dada” fitting for the art movement known as dadaism? What style of painting is Salvador Dali known for? What art movement expressed the artists’ social role? Abstractionism: Cubism, Futurism, Mechanical Style 1. 2. 3. 4. Explain the difference between expressionism and abstractionism. How did the cubists give a sense of dynamism and energy to their works? Who is considered the most famous abstractionist and cubist artist? Describe how each of the following styles reflected modern life: a. futurism b. mechanical style c. nonobjectivism 211 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I WHAT TO PROCESS Your teacher will divide the class into groups as indicated for the following activities. A. For Expressionism Create a Work of “Social Realism” 1. With your group mates, choose a current issue in society that you feel needs to be addressed. 2. Select art materials that are readily available, such as one whole sheet of cartolina; acrylic paints, poster paints, or any available paints; markers, crayons, pastels, or colored pencils; #8 brush; scissors; glue or paste; and pictures from magazines, newspapers, or calendars. 3. Working as a group, plan how to use these materials to express your message about your chosen social issue. 4. Assign a task to each group member, then create your artwork together. (Note: Remember that expressionism made use of very strong images and colors, and expressed deep emotions.) 5. Decide on a title for your group artwork. 6. Present your finished artwork to the rest of the class. 7. Join in the discussion about the social message of each group’s artwork. 8. Comment on how each group effectively used the characteristics of expressionism (through the elements and principles of art) to convey this social message. B. For Abstractionism Groups A, B, C: Create a “ Picasso” 1. Review the description of Picasso’s cubist style. 2. Based on this, plan a cubist artwork for your group to create. 3. Prepare a magazine, assorted photographs, 1 sheet of oslo paper, scissors, and glue or paste. 4. Select a large photograph from the magazine and/or the other photos, and cut these up into segments of different shapes and sizes. 5. Glue or paste the segments on the oslo paper in a creative way, but with the image still recognizable. 6. Give your cubist artwork a title. 7. Display it in front of the class, together with the works of the other groups. 8. Join your classmates in giving personal reactions to each other’s work. Groups D, E, F: Create a “ Mondrian” 1. Review the description of Mondrian’s style of painting. 2. Based on this, plan a non-objectivist artwork for your group to create. 3. Prepare ¼ sheet of cartolina; masking tape; scissors; a #8 round 212 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. paintbrush; and acrylic, poster, or any available paints in primary colors, black, and white. Use the tape to mask off strips and spaces on the board. Paint the exposed areas using your chosen colors. Wait for the paint to dry. Continue masking and painting, overlapping strips of color as Mondrian did, until you have completed your artwork. (Note: Allow the paint to dry thoroughly between applications before laying the masking tape to avoid destroying your design.) Give your painting a title. Display it in front of the class, together with the works of the other groups. Join your classmates in giving personal reactions to each other’s works. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND A. Expressionism 1. How was expressionist art an outgrowth of life in modern society? 2. Were all surrealist artworks gloomy? Support your answer. 3. Which among the forms of expressionism (fauvism, dadaism, surrealism, social realism) appeals to you the most? And which does not appeal to you at all? Explain why. 4. Expressionism in Philippine art – Research online for works by Filipino artists who used variations of this style (e.g., Cesar Legaspi). Give your personal reaction to these. B. Abstractionism 1. Which form of abstractionism do you find most striking? Explain why. 2. Do you consider action painting, color field painting, and pictographic painting true art? Why or why not? 3. Abstractionism in Philippine art – Research online for works by Filipino artists who used variations of this style (e.g., Arturo Luz, Jose Joya, and others). Give your personal reaction to these. C. Cubism 1. Recall the message expressed in the painting Guernica by Picasso. Study the details that he incorporated to convey that message. 2. Do you think his technique was effective? Why or why not? 3. How does the painting make you feel? 4. Cubism in Philippine art – Research online for works by Filipino artists who used variations of this style (e.g., Vicente Manansala and others). Give your personal reaction to these. 213 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Culminating “Exhibit of Modern Art” Having learned about and understood the concept and techniques of expressionism and abstractionism, you can now prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. 1. Properly label all the finished artworks with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. 2. Your Arts teacher will store the finished artworks for inclusion in the exhibit at the end of the quarter. Abstract Expressionism, Pop Art, Op Art W orld events in the mid-20th century immensely influenced the course of human life and, with it, the course of art history. World War I (1913-1914) and World War II (1941-1945), in particular, shifted the political, economic, and cultural world stage away from Europe and on to the “New World” continent, America. The New York School In the 1920s and 1930s, aspiring young American painters, sculptors, and writers sailed to Europe to expand their horizons. But during the dark days of World War II, a reverse migration brought European scientists, architects, and artists to American shores. New York, in particular, became a haven for the newly-arrived artists and their American counterparts. The result was the establishment of what came to be known as “The New York School”—as opposed to “The School of Paris” that had been very influential in Europe. The daring young artists in this movement succeeded in creating their own synthesis of Europe’s cubist and surrealist styles. Their style came to be known as abstract expressionism. Action Painting One form of abstract expressionism was seen in the works of Jackson Pollock. These were created through what came to be known as “action painting.” 214 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art Pollock worked on huge canvases spread on the floor, splattering, squirting, and dribbling paint with (seemingly) no pre-planned pattern or design in mind. The total effect is one of vitality, creativity, “energy made visible.” Pollock’s first one-man show in New York in 1943 focused worldwide attention on abstract expressionism for the first time. Autumn Rhythm Jackson Pollock, 1950 Oil on canvas Color Field Painting In contrast to the vigorous gestures of the action painters, another group of artists who came to be known as “color field painters” used different color saturations 215 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I (purity, vividness, intensity) to create their desired effects. Some of their works were huge fields of vibrant color—as in the paintings of Mark Rothko and Barnett Newman. Magenta, Black, Green on Orange Mark Rothko, 1949 Oil on canvas Vir Heroicus Sublimis Barnett Newman, 1950-1951 Oil on canvas Others took the more intimate “pictograph” approach, filling the canvas with repeating picture fragments or symbols—as in the works of Adolph Gottlieb and Lee Krasner. Forgotten Dream Adolph Gottlieb, 1946 Oil on canvas Abstract No. 2 Lee Krasner, 1948 Oil on canvas After “The New York School” By the early 1960s, the momentum of The New York School slowed down. In its place, a new crop of artists came on the scene using lighter treatment and flashes of humor, even irreverence, in their artworks. 216 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art The movements they brought about have come to be called: • neodadaism and pop art • conceptual art • op art • the new realism Neodadaism, Pop Art, Op Art Like the dadaist movement that arose after World War I, the neodadaism of the 1960s wanted to make reforms in traditional values. It also made use of commonplace, trivial, even nonsensical objects. But unlike the angry, serious tone of the original dadaists, the neodadaists seemed to enjoy nonsense for its own sake and simply wanted to laugh at the world. Their works ranged from paintings, to posters, to collages, to three-dimensional “assemblages” and installations. These made use of easily recognizable objects and images from the emerging consumer society—as in the prints of Andy Warhol. Their inspirations were the celebrities, advertisements, billboards, and comic strips that were becoming commonplace at that time. Hence the term pop (from “popular”) art emerged. Twelve Cars Andy Warhol, 1962 Art print Marilyn Monroe Andy Warhol, 1967 Silkscreen print Roy Lichtenstein (1923-1997) was an American pop artist. During the 1960s, along with Andy Warhol, Jasper Johns, and James Rosenquist among others, he became a leading figure in this new art movement. 217 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Whaam! Roy Lichtenstein, 1963 Acrylic and oil on canvas In the Car Roy Lichtenstein, 1963 Conceptual Art As the term implies, conceptual art was that which arose in the mind of the artist, took concrete form for a time, and then disappeared (unless it was captured in photo or film documentation). Conceptualists questioned the idea of art as objects to be bought and sold. Instead, they brought their artistic ideas to life temporarily, using such unusual materials as grease, blocks of ice, food, even just plain dirt. A key difference between a conceptual artwork and a traditional painting or sculpture is that the conceptualist’s work often requires little or no physical craftsmanship. Much of the artist’s time and effort goes into the concept or idea behind the work, with the actual execution then being relatively quick and simple. An example is this conceptual art piece by Kosuth. 218 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art One and Three Chairs Joseph Kosuth, 1965 An actual chair (center), with a photograph of the same chair and an enlarged copy of a dictionary definition of a chair Op Art Another movement that emerged in the 1960s was optical art or “op art.” This was yet another experiment in visual experience—a form of “action painting,” with the action taking place in the viewer’s eye. In op art, lines, spaces, and colors were precisely planned and positioned to give the illusion of movement. Current Bridget Riley, 1964 Synthetic polymer paint on composition board As the eye moved over different segments of the image, perfectly stable components appeared to shift back and forth, sometimes faster, sometimes slower as the brain responded to the optical data. Viewers experienced sensations varying from discomfort to disorientation to giddiness. 219 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I WHAT TO KNOW A. Abstract Expressionism: Action Painting, Color Field Painting 1. 2. 3. 4. B. What were two of the art movements that emerged from The New York School? Why were action painting and color field painting given these names? Who was the artist who became famous for his action painting style? Describe how the elements and principles of art were used in the unique techniques and approaches of these movements. Neodadaism, Pop Art, Op Art 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. What is conceptual art? How is it unlike any other art movement before it? How was neodadaism different from the earlier dadaism movement? From where did pop art draw its subjects? Name the foremost artists of the pop art movement. Explain how the elements of art were used to create the special technical effect in op art. WHAT TO PROCESS Group Projects: “My Own Modern Art” Your teacher will divide the class into six groups, and will assign the modernist art styles as follows: Groups 1 and 4 - Action painting Groups 2 and 5 - Color field painting Groups 3 and 6 - Pop art Depending on the group you belong to, follow the procedure below: Procedure for Action Painting 1. Prepare your materials – 1 whole cartolina, box board, or other recycled board; acrylic paints; 1-inch paintbrushes, sponges, or popsicle sticks; recycled mixing plates; small rags for cleaning up; newspaper for covering work surface. 2. As a group, discuss the overall composition and technique that you will use. 220 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Modern Art 3. Select desired colors of paint and apply these to the board using actions such as brushing, sprinkling, dripping, and flicking. Let the paint dry. 4. Decide on a title for your group painting and display it in the classroom. 5. Be ready to explain the “action painting” techniques that you used and to exchange comments with the other groups about their works. In what ways are they the same? In what ways are they different? Procedure for Color Field Painting: Pictograph Approach 1. Prepare your materials – 1 whole cartolina or 1 whole box board; acrylic, poster, or any available paints in primary colors, black, and white; #8 paintbrushes; small rags for cleaning up. 2. As a group, plan the overall composition and technique that you will use. Select colors of paint similar to those used by color field artists, and plan how these will be arranged in your artwork. 3. For pictograph approach - Use the #8 brush to paint small picture fragments or symbols in a repeating pattern on the entire cartolina or board. Let the paint dry. 4. Decide on a title for your group painting and display it in the classroom. 5. Be ready to explain the pictograph approach that you used and to exchange comments with the other groups about their works. Procedure for Pop Art 1. Prepare your materials – 1 whole cartolina or 1 whole box board; old colored magazines, newspapers, or calendars; scissors; glue or paste; watercolors, acrylic paints, poster colors, crayons, or pastels; #8 paintbrushes and/or sponges. 2. Select a “popular” subject for your artwork (e.g., a product, a celebrity, a movie or television character, a sport, a place, a brand name, etc.). Plan how this will be depicted using your available materials. 221 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. 3. Cut out images, letters, etc. from the magazines, newspapers, or calendars, and glue or paste them on the cartolina or board. Color the surrounding background with watercolors, poster colors, or any available paints. You may add details with crayons or pastels. 4. Decide on a title for your group artwork and display it in the classroom. 5. Be ready to explain the pop art style and techniques that you used (e.g., inspired by Andy Warhol, Roy Lichtenstein, etc.) and to exchange comments with the other groups about their works. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Explain the shift of the center of art from Europe to the United States in the mid-1900s. What political, economic, or social conditions caused this shift? Was modern art readily accepted as “true art”? Why or why not? How did the U.S. involvement in modern art eventually influence Philippine art? What historical developments allowed this to happen? Can you name any Filipino artists who used or are using any of these modernist styles? Do these styles appeal to you? Explain why or why not. WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Culminating “Exhibit of Modern Art” Having learned about and understood the concept and techniques of abstract expressionism, pop art, and op art, you can now prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. 1. Properly label all the finished artworks with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. 2. Your Arts teacher will store the finished artworks for inclusion in the exhibit at the end of the quarter. 222 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Contemporary Arts Forms: Installation Art and Performance Art T he 20th century also saw the rise of new art forms aside from the traditional ones of painting and sculpture. Among these were installation art and performance art. Installation art makes use of space and materials in truly innovative ways, while performance art makes use of the human body, facial expressions, gestures, and sounds. Both speak powerfully about contemporary issues, challenging their viewers to respond. Installation Art Installation art is a contemporary art form that uses sculptural materials and other media to modify the way the viewer experiences a particular space. Usually lifesize or sometimes even larger, installation art is not necessarily confined to gallery spaces. It can be constructed or positioned in everyday public or private spaces, both indoor and outdoor. Cordillera Labyrinth Roberto Villanueva, 1989 Bamboo and runo grass Outdoor installation at the Cultural Center of the Philippines 223 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Pasyon at Rebolusyon Santiago Bose, 1989 Mixed media installation Go to Room 117 Sid Gomez Hildawa, 1990 Mixed media installation 224 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Four Masks Edgar Talusan Fernandez, 1991 Outdoor installation Materials used in today’s installation art range from everyday items and natural materials to new media such as video, sound, performance, and computers. It may be said that primitive forms of this art have existed since prehistoric times. However, this genre was not regarded as a distinct category until the mid-20th century and only came to prominence in the 1970s. The installation artist’s manipulation of space and materials has also been called “environmental art,” “project art,” and “temporary art.” Essentially, installation art creates an entire sensory experience for the viewer. Many installations are of a size and structure that the viewer can actually walk through them, and experience varying facets of the work in stages. Some works allow the viewer to touch or feel, hear, and smell elements that the artist has incorporated in the installation. Thus, there is a strong parallel between installation art and theater. Both play to an “audience” that is expected to interact with and be affected by the sensory experience that surrounds them. 225 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Performance Art Performance art is a form of modern art in which the actions of an individual or a group at a particular place and in a particular time constitute the work. It can happen anywhere, at any time, or for any length of time. It can be any situation that involves four basic elements: • time • space • the performer’s body • a relationship between performer and audience. In performance art, the performer himself or herself is the artist. Performance art does include such activities as theater, dance, music, mime, juggling, and gymnastics. However, the term is usually reserved for more unexpected, avantgarde, and unorthodox activities intended to capture the audience’s attention. The performer himself or herself is the artist, rather than an actor playing a character as in a stage play. The performance venue may range from an art gallery or museum to a theater, café, bar, or street corner. The performance itself rarely follows a traditional story line or plot. It might be a series of intimate gestures, a grand theatrical act, or the performer remaining totally still. It may last for just a few minutes or extend for several hours. It may be based on a written script or spontaneously improvised as the performance unfolds. 226 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. WHAT TO KNOW A. Installation Art 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. What are the distinct characteristics of installation art? Why is it called “installation”? In general, what do installation artists express in their works? Cite two examples from these Learner’s Materials. Aside from the traditional mediums and materials, what new elements can installation artists incorporate in their works? What are some unique ways that the viewer can get to experience a piece of installation art? Performance Art 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. What are different names for performance art? How do these point to the distinct qualities of this form of art? In what decade did this art form emerge? As distinct from traditional art forms, what or who serves as the medium in performance art? Explain briefly. Give examples of places where performance art takes place. WHAT TO PROCESS Your teacher will divide the class into four groups. Groups A and B will create an installation artwork. Groups C and D will present performance art. Groups A and B: Installation Art 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The group members will brainstorm on the concept of an installation work to be constructed within the school grounds. As a group, gather creative and innovative materials for the planned installation and bring these to your chosen work area. Together, assemble the materials to construct your installation. Give the work a thought-provoking title and label it accordingly. All the groups will then take a tour of the installations created by the others. Hold a discussion on how the finished works made the class members feel and think; and whether they consider these good examples of installation art or not. 227 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Groups C and D: Performance Art 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The group members will brainstorm on the concept of a performance art presentation. As a group, agree on the place, equipment, costumes, and props (if any) for your presentation. Assign roles/tasks to each group member, as performers, production crew, etc. At the assigned time, the two groups will perform in front of the class. Hold a discussion on how the performance art presentations made the class members feel and think; and whether they consider these good examples of performance art or not. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do installation art and performance art exemplify the qualities of modern art? If yes, in what ways do they do so? Do art forms like these serve a purpose in today’s world? Explain your opinion. Select two examples of installation art in these Learner’s Materials and describe your reaction to it—whether positive or negative, or a bit of both. Do you think you would enjoy experiencing performance art? Why or why not? Compare your former views on what art is with what you now see in installation art and performance art. Have your views changed? In what way? WHAT TO PERFORM CULMINATING ACTIVITY FOR QUARTER I: “AN EXHIBIT OF MODERN ART” The last session for Quarter I will be devoted to staging “An Exhibit of Modern Art” presenting the following categories: 1. Impressionism 2. Expressionism 3. Abstractionism, Pop art, Op art 4. Installation art 5. Performance art 228 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. You will be assigned to select from among your own works, as well as source photos, magazine or calendar cutouts, Internet images, etc. of at least two to three representative artworks each for the above categories. Curating the Exhibit Each artwork will be accompanied by a card briefly describing the work as follows: For student-made artworks: Title _________________________________________________ Artist/s _________________________________________________ Artistic style and medium used _______________________________ Date of creation ___________________________________________ For reproductions or images of known artworks: Title _________________________________________________ Artist _________________________________________________ Artistic style and medium used _______________________________ Year or period of creation __________________________________ Prevailing historical events at that time Link between the work and the context in which it was created Invite the school Administration, other faculty members, and your schoolmates to visit the exhibit. Be prepared to explain the works and how these present the characteristics of different movements and styles of modern art. 229 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter I Critiquing the Exhibit As a form of self-evaluation, rate the culminating exhibit using the format below: “AN EXHIBIT ON MODERN ART” Evaluation Form Criteria Very Good Good Fair Poor Selection of artworks (theme and message) Completeness of exhibit Presentation (display, mounting, and labelling of works) Assignment of tasks Cooperation among students Response of exhibit visitors 230 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Quarter II: TECHNOLOGY-BASED ART CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of… 1. new technologies that allow new expressions in the arts using art elements and processes. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner… 1. creates a tech-based artwork (video clips and printed media such as posters, menus, brochures, etc.) relating to a selected topic from the different learning areas using available technologies, e.g., food and fashion. LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner… 1. identifies art elements in the technology-based production arts. 2. identifies distinct characteristics of arts during the 21st century in terms of: - production - functionality / range of audience reach. 3. identifies artworks produced by technology from other countries and their adaptation by Philippine artists. 4. realizes that technology is an effective and vibrant tool for empowering a person to express his/her ideas, goals, and advocacies, which elicits immediate action. 5. determines the role or function of artworks by evaluating their utilization and combination of art elements and principles. 6. uses artworks to derive the traditions/history of a community (e.g., landscapes, images of people at work and play, portrait studies, etc.). 7. compares the characteristics of artworks in the 21st century. 8. creates artworks that can be locally assembled with local materials, guided by 21st century techniques. 9. describes the influence of technology in the 21st century on the evolution of various forms of art. 10. applies different media techniques and processes to communicate ideas, experiences, and stories showing the characteristics of 21st century art (e.g., the use of graphic software like Photoshop, InDesign, etc.). 11. evaluates works of art in terms of artistic concepts and ideas using criteria appropriate for the style or form. 12. mounts an exhibit of completed technology-based artworks. From the Department of Education curriculum for ARTS Grade 10 (2014) 231 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Quarter II: TECHNOLOGY-BASED ART INTRODUCTION T echnology has literally taken over every aspect of life in the 21st century, and the creative and visual arts have not been spared. In fact, for the younger generations, art as you know it is defined by technology—from its creation, to its manipulation, to its reproduction, and even to its distribution. Technology-based art is essentially computer-generated and/or manipulated. Through the centuries, visual artists used actual brushes and palettes, and a whole array of paints, inks, and natural pigments applied to paper, canvas, fabric, stucco walls and ceilings. Today’s computer artists employ the ever-expanding powers of image manipulation programs and applications to create their works which can appear in an entire range of media—whether as a physical output or a virtual experience. Computer/Digital Arts Origin and Early Stages C omputer art or digital art first came on the scene in the early 1960s. Understandably, this was due to the technology that was constantly developing and that became available at that time. Thus, the early experimenters were not necessarily artists, but engineers and scientists who had access to and experience with the hardware needed. It was they who began to recognize the potential of artistic expression through the application of scientific and mathematical principles. In fact, even in the sample works we present here, you will note a strong scientific or mathematical look and feel to the creations of many digital artists. Geometric forms and repeating patterns appear frequently. More traditional subjects like human beings, landscapes, animals, and still life elements are simply incorporated as part of those forms and patterns—rather than as the main focus. Also understandable was the initial reaction of the public to computer-generated art. There were questions as to whether it was, in fact, “true art” since it made use of electronic and mechanical devices, rather than the artist’s own hand, to produce the images and effects. Within a few years, however, there was a general acceptance of digital art as an exciting and thought-provoking form of modern art. Exhibits of computer art became highly popular and critically acclaimed, as digital artists or computer art masters or “superstars” came to the fore in Europe, Russia, and the United States. 232 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art A sampling of their works can be seen here. Frieder Nake Polygon Drawings, 1965 Vera Molnar (Des) Ordres, 1974 Plotter drawing Georg Nees Schrotter (“Gravel”), c. 1965 Ronald Davis Mountain and Staurolyte, 1997 Computer-generated 3D art 233 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Manfred Mohr, 1999 Olga Kisseleva, 2012 Jean-Pierre Hebert, 2007 Some digital artists have even used their works to express their views on political, social, and cultural issues; as well as to advocate causes that are critical to modern life, such as the environment and climate change. Others even explore the philosophical relationship between science and technology and the arts. 234 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art The Philippine Scene I n our country, Filipino artists were likewise influenced by the technology trend in art. However, this was more in the commercial sphere. From the 1960s to the 1990s, their computer-generated works were primarily geared towards illustrating for international comic books. In fact, Filipino illustrators earned quite a reputation for their talents and were highly in demand in this field. They eventually became equally sought after as animators for some of the major film production companies in the United States, as well as animated television series produced in different countries. (See a more detailed presentation on Filipino comics illustrators and animators in Quarter III.) Eventually, however, the concept of computer-generated works as a means of serious artistic expression gained ground among the younger generation of local artists. Today, even the more established names in the field—artists and critics alike—have come to accept and recognize digital works as fine art. To view works by Philippine artists employing digital art techniques, you may visit the websites of the more progressive museums and art organizations. Among these are: • • • • The Center for Art and Thought – http://www.centerforartandthought.org/ Deviant Art – http://www.deviantart.com/browse/all/digitalart/ The Ateneo Art Gallery – http://www.ateneoartgallery.org/ Yuchengco Museum – http://yuchengcomuseum.org/ Cityscape Antonio Gorordo, c 2010-2012 Digital art 235 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II There are also institutions offering training courses on the digital arts, such as the First Academy of Computer Arts, the Philippine Center for Creative Imaging (PCCI), as well as the Technical Education and Skills Development Authority (TESDA) through scholarships given by the Animation Council of the Philippines (ACPI). Courses such as these open up an array of career opportunities for young Filipinos in the fields of advertising, animation design, multimedia communication, and web development. (More on these topics in Quarter III.) Digital Art in the Hands of Everyone Computer technology has by now invaded every aspect of modern life. It was, therefore, inevitable that it would develop into forms and devices that could be mass produced, mass distributed, and therefore widely accessible to everyone. In other words, anyone with a computer device— from a desktop PC to a laptop, to a tablet or android phone—can now capture and edit images and videos; create, manipulate, and share works of art; and even compose music. You can be—and probably already are—a digital artist in your own right. Summary Computer/digital arts make use of electronic and mechanical devices, rather than the artist’s own hand, to produce the desired images and effects. Thus, these are definitely technology-based art forms. In recent decades, personal gadgets such as laptops, tablets, and android phones have incorporated the artistic capabilities of the large-scale computers. So it is now possible for anyone to be a digital artist. WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. Briefly describe how technology made—and continues to make—digital art possible. Was digital art readily accepted and recognized as “true art” when it emerged in the 1960s? What was the reason for this? What devices can now be used to create digital art? Do you own one such device? Name one or two computer programs that can enable you to create an original illustration from scratch. 236 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art WHAT TO PROCESS Digital Image Creation [Session 2] Note: Pre-requisite for this activity is exposure to/experience with Computer Illustration under Technology Livelihood Education (TLE). 1. If you have access to a computer drawing program, such as Adobe Creative Suite or its less complex counterparts, create an original artwork. 2. If a drawing program is not available, capture an image instead using a digital camera, a DSLR camera, a tablet, or an android/mobile phone. 3. Store the finished illustration or image in a device that contains an image editing program, similar to these: • Gimp (GNU Image Manipulation Program) • Paint.net • Inkscape • Xara Extreme • Artweaver • Draw Plus • Pencil • Picasa • Paint Star • Smooth Draw • Spray • Karbon • Adobe Photoshop • Corel PaintShop Pro X5 The stored illustration or image will be manipulated using any of these editing programs, during a later session of Quarter II on Computer Generated Images (see page 240). WHAT TO UNDERSTAND A. Research Activity 1. Research online for the works of any two of these digital artists: James Faure Walker Geroge Grie Manfred Mohr Olga Kisseleva Ronald Davis John Landsdown Joseph Nechvatal Perry Welman Matthias Broegel Jean-Pierre Hebert 237 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II 2. B. Select one artwork each by the artists that you have chosen. Give the basic details of each (title of work, name of artist, technique used, year created). Briefly explain how the following principles of art are incorporated or expressed in these particular works: a. Rhythm, Movement b. Balance c. Emphasis d. Harmony, Unity, and Variety e. Proportion Questions 1. Write a brief personal reaction to the works you chose—whether positive or negative. Explain your opinion. 2. Was there a difference in how Filipino artists first ventured into the world of digital art? If yes, explain briefly. 3. Research online for three Filipino artists using digital techniques for their works. Compare and contrast their works with the examples of digital art by the foreign artists presented above. 4. As a young citizen of the Philippines and of the world, how do you feel about the pervasiveness of digital technology in a. art (digital illustration, digital photography, digital videos)? b. media? c. entertainment / gaming? d. education? e. communication? 5. How do you personally make use of digital technology in each of the above areas? 6. Specifically in the area of art (digital illustration, photography, videos), what artworks are you able to create with the help of the available technology? Cite at least 5 examples. 7. Do you find yourself exposed to or involved in using digital devices and applications in most aspects of your life? What are the benefits? What are the risks or disadvantages? 238 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter II “Exhibit of Technology-Based Art” Having learned the concept and techniques of computer/digital art, you can now prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. All the finished artworks should be labelled with original titles, your name or your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. Mobile Phone Art / Computer-generated Images Mobile Phone Art T he mobile phone that you constantly hold has evolved from a mere communication tool, into a creative device that allows you to generate original works of art for an entire range of purposes. These could be personal photographs and videos that you can manipulate with a myriad special effects, both visual as well as sound and music. They could also be school projects or reports that require you to combine images, incorporate text, even include simple animation. And the wonder of it all is that you can do all these right on your own mobile devices, particularly the new-generation models known as android tablets, phones, and combination of both called “phablets.” The tasks that traditional photo editors used to 239 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II perform manually—cropping, retouching, airbrushing—are now just a few of the many editing effects done for you with split-second ease at the click of a mouse, a keyboard command, or a few taps and drags of your finger on a touch screen. You are probably already familiar with the following image manipulation programs and applications that run on today’s android devices: • • • • • • • • • • • Pixlr – a powerful, free online image editor Pic Collage – allows you to make collages incorporating photos, stickers, text, and frames Photo Grid – a downloadable application for android phones that allows you to make collages out of images from your photo gallery Doodle Booth – an iPad application (with a free downloadable version) that enables you to ‘doodle’ on your images using available stickers Photo Booth – an application for taking photos and videos using an iPad or iPad mini (a version for the iPhone, called SimpleBooth, is also available) Magic Mirror Booth – an iPhone application that allows you to take amusing, distorted images, simulating camera effects Pic Monkey – a free online photo editing tool that provides filters, frames, text, and effects to manipulate your images Flipagram – a downloadable application that allows you to ‘bring your photos to life’ in short videos set to music of your choice Picsart – a free photo editor and drawing application, as well as a social network for you to share your art with others Snapseed – a photo application that enables you to enhance, transform, and share your photos; a free downloadable version for android phones is available Instagram – a fast and fun way to share images with others; snap a photo, choose from among the available filters, and share via Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr, and more Many more such programs and applications are constantly being developed with even more new, exciting, and fun features and capabilities. Each of these has an extensive array of special features you can use to modify your images. Among these are: frames, borders, and banners; filters, cropping in different shapes, automatic collage or color change, stickers, text bubbles; effects such as warp, skew, tunnel, fish eye, and negative; adding “spot color” to only certain elements of an image; creating a photo montage with music. Some programs even make it possible to have any photo simulate a work of art in a whole range of media—from oil to watercolor to pen and ink to charcoal to oil pastels to a Warhol poster to a Japanese woodblock print. 240 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art Original image Modified with cropping, superimposed text, and a ‘silk’ texture Original image Modified to ‘pencil sketch’ effect in gray scale, plus rounded corners Photos and image manipulation by Tawid Publications 241 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Mirror Photo – multiple mirror images Original image Modified with color retained on selected portions Photos and image manipulation by Tawid Publications 242 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art Original image Original image Modified to a completely different color Modified to a multi-image collage in different tints Photos and image manipulation by Tawid Publications 243 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Computer Generated Images I f you want to create original images from scratch, you may make your own illustrations using specialized programs for image generation and manipulation. Examples of these would be Adobe Illustrator and Corel Draw. These are, however, designed to run on desktop computers and laptops, so you would need to have access to these larger and more complex devices. There are scaled-down versions of such programs specifically developed for use on smaller, handheld units like your personal tablet or android phone. These enable you to perform virtually all of the tasks that a program like Illustrator performs but, almost literally, in the palm of your hand. Many of these come at a fraction of the cost of the more complex programs or, in some cases, even for free. Among such programs are: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Gimp (GNU Image Manipulation Program) Paint.net Inkscape Xara Extreme Artweaver Draw Plus Pencil Picasa Paint Star Smooth Draw Spray Karbon Adobe Photoshop Express Corel PaintShop Pro X5 WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. What is mobile phone art? What technology has made this possible? What is the raw material or starting point for creating an artwork on a cellphone? How is this initial material then transformed into an original piece of art? Name some programs and/or applications that can be used to create art on a mobile phone? Aside from using mobile phone software, what is another means of creating art from scratch using computer technology? 244 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art 7. 8. 9. What is the raw material or starting point for creating an artwork on a computer? How do you transform a digital image into a work of art using a computer? Name some computer programs that are designed for this purpose. WHAT TO PROCESS Creating Mobile Phone Art / Computer-generated Art [Session 4] 1. Depending on the devices available to you, you may either: a. Capture an image using your cellphone camera b. Create an image from scratch using a drawing/illustration program on a computer, laptop, or tablet 2. Save your captured image or finished illustration in preparation for transforming it into an example of cellular phone art or computer-generated art. [Note: Refer to any applicable modules of Technology Livelihood Education (TLE) for detailed instructions on what programs to use, and how to use them.] 3. Using any of the applications installed in your available device(s), experiment with different effects and features to modify your saved image or illustration. You may try some of the following effects, as well as others offered by the application(s) you are using: • re-size • crop • skew / warp • rotate • flip • adjust brightness • adjust sharpness • change colors • gray scale • sepia tone • apply a texture • superimpose text, trying different fonts • apply frames, borders, or banners • edit out an element that you do not want to appear • add an element that is not in the original image 245 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II 4. Save the most unique, striking, or remarkable modified images to be printed out later for inclusion in the culminating Exhibit on Computer/Digital Art. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Mobile phone art is a technology-based art form. Support this statement with your own brief explanation. Do you consider the products of such mobile phone applications as true art? Why or why not? Did you feel like an artist while capturing and modifying your mobile phone image? Describe the experience. In the case of rendering and modifying an original computer illustration, do you consider this as true art? Why or why not? Describe your experience, if you used this technique to create a computergenerated artwork. WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter II “Exhibit of Technology-Based Art” Having learned the concept and techniques of mobile phone art and computergenerated images, you can now prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. All the finished artworks need to be labelled with original titles, your name or your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. Digital Photography A nother means of generating an original image is to capture it first as a digital file. In the case of today’s electronic technology, that would mean recording the image using a digital camera or a device with a built-in camera, like your mobile phone, android device, or tablet. Prior to the development of digital photography, cameras were essentially sealed boxes that would allow a split-second entry of light to strike a section of lightsensitive film inside it. The result was that whatever was in front of the camera at the precise instant that the light entered it would be imprinted on that exposed section of 246 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art film as a photographic image. The photographer (or a commercial developing service) would then have to process the exposed film in a special enclosed space known as a “dark room”—and only then would the recorded images be seen. Point-and-shoot vs. DSLR The multi-step process described above has since been overtaken by the magic of digital photography. Today’s users have the option of a “point-and-shoot” type of digital camera which automatically makes all the adjustments in lighting, focus, zoom-in and zoom-out, even removal of “red eye” with the user being given some leeway for slight adjustments. It offers image enhancement features like adjusting color and brightness imbalances, as well as sharpening or blurring the image. It may even offer unique effects like “fish eye” or filters that allow pre-setting of the photo to be taken with a colored tint or a special texture. Plus, it allows the user to immediately review the photos taken without waiting for a complex developing process—and to delete any unsatisfactory images while storing the good ones for future needs. A second option is the digital single lens reflex (DSLR) camera. This also provides the film-less and instant review features of a “point-and-shoot” type of digital camera, but gives the photographer much more artistic freedom and control to select the camera settings to create the desired final image with the preferred visual effects. Many professional photographers remain loyal to the traditional (i.e., non-digital) single lens reflex camera which still uses film. They believe that film photography has an authenticity and genuineness to its images that is lost in the artificial and automatic manipulations of digital photography. There is no denying, however, the ease and convenience that digital photography offers to the millions of amateur photographers out there. Without needing years of training and experience, we are now able to capture images with professional-quality results. Basic Tips for Taking Good Photographs Whether you are using a point-and-shoot camera or a DSLR, there are basic guidelines for capturing a good quality photographic image: 1. Choose a good location. An interesting location can sometimes make the difference between a good and a great photo. 2. Check that the available background is relatively simple and not too cluttered, so that the focus will be on your chosen subject. 247 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II 3. Natural light in the outdoors or near a window is usually the most flattering or effective for any kind of subject. Ideally, the best light for photos is within the first hour after sunrise and the last hour before sunset. 4. Avoid taking shots facing the light, as this would make your subject back-lit and most of the details would be lost in shadow. 5. If you intend to take a posed shot, position your subject where you want in relation to the location, background, and source of light. 6. If you intend to take a candid shot, position yourself where you can capture the most interesting, amusing, touching, or engaging moment or expression. 7. Take a variety of shots—ranging from far shots showing the surroundings, to medium-distance shots concentrating on the main subject, to tight or close-up shots that focus on details of the subject. You can then choose from among all these for the best photo or photos. WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. What is digital photography? Briefly describe the basic technology behind the earliest cameras. In place of the previous light-sensitive film, how are today’s digital images captured and stored? What are the two main types of digital photography in use today? Why is one of them called point-and-shoot photography? What does the acronym DSLR stand for? Cite two or three differences between these forms of digital photography. WHAT TO PROCESS Creating a “Pinhole Camera” [Session 5] Materials: shoebox or similar lidded box black paint (if box is colored or printed) Note: To save time, the boxes may be painted completely black beforehand. small piece of sheet metal (approximately 3” x 3”) large needle X-acto knife sandpaper light-sensitive photo paper 248 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art tape scissors Procedure: 1. Your teacher will divide the class into groups of 5-6 students each. 2. Each group will do the following procedure: a. Use the needle to punch a tiny hole in the piece of sheet metal. Smoothen the edges of the hole with sandpaper. b. Cut a small square opening in one side of the box, using the X-acto knife. c. Tape the piece of sheet metal over this opening on the inside of the box. Completely seal all edges of the sheet metal with tape. d. On the outer side of the opening, make a ‘flap’ out of scrap cardboard to cover the pinhole in the sheet metal. Secure it in place with more tape. e. Bring the box, its lid, the light-sensitive photo paper, and the tape into a totally dark closet or small room. f. Carefully unwrap the light-sensitive photo paper. Tape the paper on the inner side of the box opposite the pinhole. g. Put the lid on the box and seal its edges securely with tape on all sides to ensure that no light can seep in. [Reference: http://www.instructables.com/id/How-To-Make-A-Pinhole-Camera/] 3. Once the pinhole cameras are ready, each group will go outdoors and look for a subject for their respective photos. Note: Be sure to choose a totally still or static subject. 4. Follow the procedure below for taking a photograph with your camera: a. Position the camera on a stable surface, with the covered pinhole facing in the direction of your chosen subject. b. Without moving or shaking the box, carefully loosen the tape holding the cardboard flap over the pinhole. c. Tape the flap in the ‘open’ position for approximately 15 minutes, and leave the box totally still for the entire duration. d. When the time is up, carefully close the flap and tape it shut once more. 5. Keeping your pinhole cameras fully sealed, bring them to a shop in your area where the exposed paper will be developed into photographs. 249 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Taking Point-and-Shoot or DSLR Photos [Session 6] Note: The objective of this activity is for you to become familiar with the process of using the cameras. There will be separate group projects in Quarter III to create photographs for the culminating exhibit on Technology-based Arts. 1. For how to use a digital point-and-shoot camera, refer to online tutorials similar to this: http://www.digitalcamerareview.com/default.asp?newsID=5464&news=h ow+to+take+great+pictures+with+your+point+and+shoot+camera 2. For how to use a DSLR camera, refer to online tutorials similar to this: http://digital-photography-school.com/megapost-learning-how-to-useyour-first-dslr/ http://www.wikihow.com/Use-Your-Digital-Camera%27s-ISO-Setting WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. What was the experience like creating your own pinhole camera, and being able to capture images using it? What do you see as the advantages of digital photography as compared to the earlier film-type photography? What do you think of the view that film photography is more artistic than digital photography? Support your opinion. If you have experienced both regular digital photography and DSLR photography, which one did you find more useful to you? More doable? More interesting? Explain your answers. What do you think of the way digital technology has made quality photography accessible to everyone, including young people like you? WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter II “Exhibit of Technology-Based Arts” Having learned the concept and techniques of digital photography, you can now prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. 1. 2. Label the photos taken with the pinhole cameras with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. [Note: In the final exhibit for Arts Grade 10, these will be an interesting contrast to the digital photos to be taken in Quarter III.] Your Arts teacher will store the photos for inclusion in the exhibit at the end of the quarter. 250 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art Video Games / Digital Painting / Imaging Videos Video Games F or today’s younger generation that grew up in a digital world, even entertainment now comes courtesy of computer devices. A major component of such entertainment is in the form of video games of every conceivable genre, subject matter, and skill level. These range from educational games and mind twisters, to building and construction games, to ones that entail physical interaction by the users (sports, fitness, dance). Then there are the tremendously popular games of strategy, war, science fiction, and mythical worlds that employ amazingly complex and realistic graphics, motion, sound, and other special effects. Similar to image creation and manipulation, it is now possible for video game fans to become video game creators themselves. Online tutorials and guides are available on sites like e-how, Instructables, and You Tube. Plus there are available programs that can be downloaded and used immediately, with no need for prior knowledge on coding or web development. Examples of such programs are: • • • Twine - http://twinery.org/ Stencyl - https://www.udemy.com/create-your-first-computer-game-withstencyl/ GameMaker - https://www.yoyogames.com/learn Digital Painting Digital painting is a method of creating an artwork using a computer. This is, however, different from the image generating devices and programs discussed above, which create, modify, store, and share images entirely on a laptop, tablet, or android phone. Digital painting still makes use of traditional painting mediums such as acrylic paint, oils, ink, and watercolor and also applies the pigment to traditional surfaces, such as canvas, paper, polyester etc. But it does so by employing computer software that drives a type of robot device (such as a plotter) or an office machine (such as a printer) that takes the place of the artist’s hand. 251 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Digital painting also refers to a technique using a graphics software program to create an artwork that is totally virtual. The canvas, brushes, paints, and other tools are all virtual, existing only within the computer. And the finished work is also stored in virtual format, to be shared through cyber space. Ctrl+Paint is an example of an online resource for teaching yourself digital painting for free, via simple videos and mini tutorials. Video Technology / Imaging Videos Social media purposes - Another tremendously powerful and innovative field that digital technology has revolutionized is that of creating and presenting videos. The explosion of social media in recent decades has provided a new platform for video materials targeting the “netizens” of today. Not only are there online advertisements that continuously bombard the users’ computer screens and mobile phone displays. But there are also millions of personally produced videos that are constantly uploaded to online platforms like You Tube—from music, dance, and stage performances to tutorials of all kinds to recipes to documentaries to news clips to marriage proposals. Again, the digital technology to capture and edit such videos is contained right in your tablets and android phones. And just as with the still images discussed above, the raw video clips can be enhanced and modified with a myriad of effects depending on the particular video application you have installed in your device. Medical/scientific purposes – Another extremely valuable use of today’s video technology is that of imaging videos in the fields of medicine and science. You may be familiar with Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), Computerized Tomography (CT scans), and the like which are used to create and record visual images of a patient’s internal anatomy in order to diagnose and treat diseases and injuries. There are also ultrasound tests or sonograms, which translate sound waves bouncing off physical objects into images that can be studied—whether a baby developing in the womb (in 2D, 3D, and 4D options), growths or malformations inside the body, structural flaws in buildings, as well as objects in outer space, underground, and deep in the ocean. 252 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. How has computer technology contributed to the development of video games? Name some of the most popular types of video games today. On what kinds of devices can such games be played? Can a young person like you create your own video game? If yes, how? What is digital painting? Briefly describe the two different types of digital painting presented. Briefly explain today’s video technology. How do you use video technology personally? For school purposes? How is it used in modern life? What valuable purposes do “imaging videos” serve in the fields of medicine and science? WHAT TO PROCESS Group Projects: Video Games / Digital Painting 1. Your Arts teacher will divide the class into groups of five to six students each. 2. Half of the groups will be assigned to create their own video games (using any simple software that they have available or can download from the internet for free); and the other half of the groups will be assigned to create works of digital painting. [Note: Refer to any applicable modules of Technology Livelihood Education (TLE) for detailed instructions on what programs to use, and how to use them.] 3. Due to time constraints, you will need to work on these group projects outside of class hours. 4. Save your finished video games or digital paintings in a storage device that your Arts teacher will hold for safekeeping until the culminating exhibit on Technology-based Arts. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. Compare your experience in creating your own simple video game with that of your classmates creating a digital painting; or vice-versa. Do you think that video games can be considered a form of modern art? Why or why not? 253 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Is digital painting as “artistic” as the traditional modes of painting? Support your opinion. Is there a value to imaging videos apart from the entertainment or even documentation purposes of regular videos? Give some examples. Discuss how this shows that technology can serve aesthetic and practical— even vital—purposes in today’s world. 3. 4. 5. WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter II “Exhibit of Technology-Based Arts” Prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. 1. All the finished artworks should be labelled with original titles, your name or your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. Your Arts teacher will store the finished artworks for inclusion in the exhibit at the end of the quarter. [Note: For the video games and digital paintings created in Session 7, some form of device with a display capability will need to be prepared prior to the culminating exhibit. This could be a desktop computer or a laptop/tablet connected to a large monitor, if available within the school or loaned from a student’s family.] 2. FOR SESSION 8 CULMINATING ACTIVITY FOR QUARTER II: “AN EXHIBIT OF TECHNOLOGY-BASED ARTS” The last session for Quarter II will be devoted to staging “An Exhibit of Technology-based Arts” presenting the following categories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Mobile Phone Art Computer-generated Images Digital Photography (Pinhole Camera, Point-and-Shoot, DSLR) Video Games Digital Painting You will be assigned to select from among your own works, as well as source photos, magazine or calendar cutouts, Internet images, etc. of at least two to three representative artworks each for the above categories. 254 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Technology-based Art Curating the Exhibit Each artwork will be accompanied by a card briefly describing the work as follows: For student-made artworks: Title _________________________________________________ Artist/s _________________________________________________ Artistic style and medium used _______________________________ Date of creation ___________________________________________ For reproductions or images of known artworks: Title _________________________________________________ Artist ____________________________________________________ Artistic style and medium used _______________________________ Year or period of creation _____________________________________ Prevailing historical events at that time ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ Link between the work and the context in which it was created ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ Invite the school Administration, other faculty members, and your schoolmates to visit the exhibit. Be prepared to explain the works and how these present the characteristics of different forms of technology-based art. 255 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter II Critiquing the Exhibit As a form of self-evaluation, rate the culminating exhibit using the format below: “An Exhibit of Technology-based Arts” Evaluation Form Criteria Poor Very Good Good Fair Selection of artworks to exhibit (theme and message) Completeness of exhibit Presentation (display, mounting, and labelling of works) Assignment of tasks Cooperation among students Response of exhibit visitors 256 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Quarter III: MEDIA-BASED ARTS AND DESIGN IN THE PHILIPPINES CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of… 1. art elements and processes by synthesizing and applying prior knowledge and skills. 2. new technologies that allow new expressions in the arts. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner… 1. creates artworks using available media and natural resources on local topics, issues, and concerns such as environmental advocacies, ecotourism, and economic and livelihood projects. LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner… 1. identifies art elements in the various media-based arts in the Philippines. 2. identifies representative artists as well as distinct characteristics of media-based arts and design in the Philippines. 3. realizes that Filipino ingenuity is distinct, exceptional, and on a par with global standards. 4. determines the role or function of artworks by evaluating their utilization and combination of art elements and principles. 5. uses artworks to derive the traditions/history of a community. 6. creates artworks that can be assembled with local materials. 7. describes the characteristics of media-based arts and deign in the Philippines. 8. applies different media techniques and processes to communicate ideas, experiences, and stories (through the use of software to enhance/animate images like Flash, Movie Maker, Dreamweaver, etc.). 9. evaluates works of art in terms of artistic concepts and ideas using criteria appropriate for the style or form of media-based arts and design. 10. mounts a media-based exhibit of completed artworks. From the Department of Education curriculum for ARTS Grade 10 (2014) 257 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Quarter III: Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines INTRODUCTION T he previous quarter provided an overview of the phenomenal capabilities and possibilities of the electronic or digital media available in today’s technologydriven world. These have enabled amazingly innovative art forms to evolve far beyond traditional painting, sculpture, and architecture. As quickly as technology is able to develop new devices, gadgets, and techniques, modern artists and designers adapt them to enhance their creative expression. Image: logo-kid.com In this quarter, the modern techniques and trends in photography, film, print media, digital media, and product and industrial design will be explored. Most notably the talent, creativity, and quality workmanship of Filipino artists and designers in all these fields will be recognized and celebrated. Not only have these brought Philippine artistry to the world’s attention, but they have opened up an entire range of opportunities for young Filipinos to develop and apply these talents—and earn a living while doing so. Technological advances continue to be a major driving force in the directions that each of these art forms has taken. Among the results have been exciting innovations in materials manipulation, coloring and embellishment techniques, and creation and production processes applied to all today’s media—whether physical and tangible, or virtual in cyber space. 58 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Photography I n its early stages during the late 19th century, photography was viewed as a purely technical process, that of recording visible images by light action on light-sensitive materials. In fact, its very name—from the Greek “photos” (meaning light) and “graphos” (meaning writing)—states this process literally. In comparison to the highly-regarded arts of painting and sculpture, then, photography was not immediately considered art. But it was not long before the artistry of 20th century photographers elevated this “light writing” to an aesthetic form in its own right. The Photographer as Artist Focusing a camera at a subject and clicking the shutter is photography as process. Discerning a significant moment or a unique expression, framing it in the camera viewfinder with an eye for composition, and then clicking the shutter is photography as art. That discernment and that eye for composition are the factors that elevate a photographer from a mere recorder of images to an artist. In a pictorial shoot, the photographer may position lighting, modify the lens setting, or use filters to create an effect he or she has conceptualized beforehand. The tools and techniques may not be those of the traditional artist, but the aesthetic principles are the same. For today’s photographers, the process goes even further. They may take the exposed film into a dark room or subject the digital images to their photo editing software—and there manipulate the images with the myriad of photo enhancement techniques and tools currently available. Whether left untouched from the instant the image was captured or was digitally or manually altered, the resulting photographs can be startlingly impactful. It becomes clear how the photographer has captured the elements of form, color, light and shadow, texture, and composition to create a true work of art. 259 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Photography as Communication Being a modern art form means that photography is now viewed as being more than just beautiful. It is also considered one of the most powerful means of communication. http://s3.freefoto.com/images/1 3/53/13_53_21_prev.jpg Next to the printed word, the photographic image is today’s most important means of conveying information and ideas, expressing emotions, even championing causes. This power comes from two distinctive characteristics of photography: immediacy and detail. An image recorded by a camera has a sense of authenticity. Because the lens captures the image objectively, the resulting photograph is regarded as ‘true to life’ and ‘of the moment.’ At the same time, the camera takes in every detail of an image. Thus the photograph has a sense of completeness. For these reasons, photographs are vital tools in communication fields such as journalism, advertising, education, and even in courts of law. They have also been used to eloquently speak out against social and political issues. Noteworthy Philippine Photographers The Philippines has joined the rest of the world in applying the wonders of modern photography to every aspect of life—from personal to professional to national to global. And with our country’s natural beauty, a number of local photographers have taken on the Philippines and our people as a major focus of their lenses. Among these are George Tapan, John K. Chua, Manny Librodo (http://gulfphotoplus.com/workshops/instructors/35/Manny-Librodo), and many other talented members of the Federation of Philippine Photographers Foundation (FPPF) (http://www.photoworldmanila.com/about-fppf/). 260 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines George Tapan is an award-winning travel photographer who has won two Pacific Asia Tourism Association (PATA) Gold awards, an ASEAN Tourism Association award, and first place in the 2011 National Geographic Photo Contest. His highlyacclaimed work has been published in five travel photography books. George Tapan Into the Green Zone st Tapan’s 1 place-winning image in the 2011 National Geographic Photo Contest 261 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Other photos by George Tapan 262 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines John K. Chua is best known as an advertising and commercial photographer, with over 40 years of experience in this field and numerous local and international awards for his work. At the same time, he has applied his photo artistry to showcasing the beauty of the Philippines. Snake Island, Palawan Gulf of Davao 263 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III WHAT TO KNOW 1. What two Greek words are the origins of the term “photography”? What makes them fitting for this media-based art form? 2. How does technology contribute to the development of an art like photography? 3. Why is photography truly a “modern” art form? 4. What special talents and skills does a photographer have that make him or her an artist? 5. What qualities make photography such a powerful communication tool? 6. Name some noteworthy Filipino photographers presented above, plus others you may have researched on. Cite a distinctive achievement of each. 7. What type of subjects seems to be among their favorites to photograph? 8. Looking at the sample photographs shown, explain how the principles of art (rhythm/movement, balance, emphasis, proportion, harmony, unity, variety) are made use of by the photographer as an artist. WHAT TO PROCESS Photography Group Project: “Images with a Message” 1. For this group project, your teacher would have asked you to bring to class any available device for taking photographs (point-and-shoot camera, DSLR camera, mobile phone, android phone, tablet). Those who do not have their own device may share with other classmates. 2. The class will be divided into groups of six to eight students. Each group will be assigned a theme such as: a) People/Personalities b) Our School c) Nature d) Insights e) Humor, etc. (Note: The groups may also think of their own themes, if they wish.) 3. Together with your group, move around the classroom and school grounds on your own time, taking photographs according to your assigned/chosen theme. Store the best ones in your devices for group evaluation. 4. As a group, select one photograph taken by each of your group members that best captures the theme. If there are eight group members, there will be eight selected photos. 5. Plan with your group how and where to have these selected photos printed on letter-size paper (8½” x 11”). Then, turn these over to your Arts teacher for safekeeping until they will be presented in the culminating exhibit. 264 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines WHAT TO UNDERSTAND “What’s in a Photo?” 1. Cut out three photographs from a magazine, calendar, poster, or brochure— each expressing one of the following: a) a commercial or business message b) a social or political statement c) artistic expression. 2. Label each of your photographs with a creative title, expressing the particular purpose you think it has. 3. Bring them to class and be ready to explain the purpose of each. 4. Also be ready to discuss what role you believe photography plays in modern life by carrying out such purposes. WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter III “Exhibit on Media-Based Arts and Design” Prepare your photographs for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter by labelling them with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the camera type used. Film A nother art form which has risen to tremendous heights within the last century is film or cinema. As its early name “motion pictures” declared, film brought yet another dimension into play—that of moving images. The possibilities of this medium created a new art form that was to become a powerful social and economic force, and a legacy of the 20th century to the world. 265 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III A Technology-driven Art C inema, just as all modern arts, has been greatly influenced by technology. In the case of cinema, however, it is an art form that came into being because of technological advances. The transition from still photography came in the late 1800s with “series photography” and the invention of celluloid strip film. This allowed successive still photos of a moving subject to be captured on a strip of film advancing through a single camera. This was the seed of the highly-advanced film medium we enjoy today. The need to view these moving images led to the rise of the Kinetoscope, a peepshow cabinet with an eyehole through which these earliest “movies” could be viewed one person at a time. A motor inside the cabinet moved the film strip along in a loop, with an electric bulb providing illumination from beneath. In the meantime, European and American inventors were providing one technological advancement after another. The French developed the “cinematographe,” a handcranked camera, printer, and projector all in one that was lightweight enough to bring outside the studio. By 1901, the earliest motion pictures were rapidly progressing from one-scene, studio films to multiple-scene narratives filmed outdoors. Driven by these and many more advances, the art aspect of filmmaking was born. The Collaborative Art of Filmmaking F ilmmaking, because of its technical complexity, involves entire teams of artists, writers, and production experts, supported by technicians taking charge of the cameras, lighting equipment, sets, props, costumes, and the like—all under the supervision of a film director. 266 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Film directing - It is the director, like the painter and sculptor in traditional art, who envisions the final effect of the film on its viewers, visually, mentally, and emotionally. While the painter and sculptor work with physical materials, the film director works with ideas, images, sounds, and other effects to create this unique piece of art. He or she conceptualizes the scenes, directs the acting, supervises the cinematography and finally the editing and sound dubbing in much the same way as a visual artist composes an artwork. Clearly, however, the director does not do all these alone. Through the years, the complexity of filmmaking gave rise to numerous allied arts that did not previously exist. Acting - First and foremost, there was the art of acting for film. With live theater as the only form of acting at that time, film actors had to learn to express themselves without the exaggerated facial expressions and gestures used on stage. With the addition of sound in the 1930s, they then had to learn to deliver their lines naturally and believably. Cinematography - Behind the scenes, there was cinematography or the art of film camera work. This captured the director’s vision of each scene through camera placement and movement, lighting, and other special techniques. Editing - This was joined by film editing, the art of selecting the precise sections of film, then sequencing and joining them to achieve the director’s desired visual and emotional effect. Sound editing was also developed, as films began to include more ambitious effects beyond the dialogue and background music. Production/Set design - Underlying all these was the art of production and set design. This recreated in physical terms—through location, scenery, sets, lighting, costumes, and props—the mental image that the director had of how each scene should look, what period it should depict, and what atmosphere it should convey. This included creating worlds that did not exist as well as worlds that were long gone, designing each production component down to the very last detail. . Again, all these allied arts were made possible through the advances of modern technology. From cumbersome machines that could barely be moved, today’s highlysophisticated cameras and accessories can handle even the most demanding camera work. From the era of silent films, today’s films incorporate a vast range of voice, music, and sound effects to suit an ever-widening array of film genres. From manual rendering, today’s animated films use the awesome capabilities of computers to amaze moviegoers of all ages. 267 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Film Genres T he public response to motion pictures was immediate and enthusiastic. From makeshift nickelodeons (movie theaters charging a nickel for entrance) in 1904 to luxurious “dream palaces” for middle class moviegoers by 1914, public showings of movies were a big hit. With World War I over and the establishment of Hollywood as the center of American filmmaking in 1915, the movie industry was on its way to becoming one of the biggest and most influential of the century. With financial success came the rush to release more and more films, in an ever-wider variety— leading to the many film genres we know today. First there were the silent films starring Charlie Chaplin, and the “slapstick comedy” films of Buster Keaton and later Laurel and Hardy. With sound still unavailable, these films relied on purely visual comedy that audiences found hilarious. Then, there emerged the gangster movie genre as well as horror and fantasy films that took advantage of the sound technology that was newly available at that time. Charlie Chaplin in A Dog’s Life, 1918 Sound plus color then allowed for further development of animated feature films, as well as what became the major American genre of the 1930s—the movie musical. Here, the spectacle of theater productions was brought to the movie screen, incorporating singing, dancing, and elaborate production numbers enhanced by emerging film techniques. Further developments in cinematic and sound technology led to even more genres: war and disaster films, westerns or “cowboy movies,” thrillers or suspense films, historical or biographical films, film epics, and film adaptations of literary classics. In a similar way, the tremendous advances in computer technology in recent decades have fueled the rise of futuristic or science fiction films, as well as special effects movies featuring live actors, animated characters, or live actors and animated characters together. Documentary films, a non-fiction genre, were made using real-life footage as well as file materials, in many cases to present an issue. Finally, a special genre known as art films (“indie” or independent films) caters to a small group of viewers and critics, consciously concerned with the artistic merits of a motion picture. 268 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Philippine Filmmakers I n the Philippine film scene, the American influence was evident in the pre-World War II and Liberation years with song-and-dance musicals, romantic dramas, and comedy films. Beginning with the turbulent 1970s, however, progressive Filipino directors emerged to make movies dealing with current social issues and examining the Filipino character. Among them were Lino Brocka (Tinimbang Ka Ngunit Kulang, 1974; Maynila, Sa Mga Kuko ng Liwanag, 1975), Mike de Leon (Itim, 1976; Sister Stella L, 1984; Bayaning 3rd World, 1999), Ishmael Bernal (Himala, 1982), and Peque Gallaga (Oro, Plata, Mata, 1983). Lino Brocka A Mike de Leon film Ishmael Bernal Outstanding female directors have likewise made their mark in Philippine cinema. Among them are Laurice Guillen and Marilou Diaz Abaya. Marilou Diaz Abaya Laurice Guillen 269 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Laurice Guillen’s Salome (1981) earned international acclaim at the Toronto International Film Festival. Her more recent films, such as Tanging Yaman, (2001) which won Best Picture in the Metro Manila Film Festival, American Adobo (2002), Santa Santita (2004), and Sa ‘Yo Lamang (2010), all gained her recognition among the current generation of Filipino moviegoers. Salome, 1981 Tanging Yaman, 2001 Marilou Diaz Abaya captured the attention and respect of the viewing public with powerful films such as Jose Rizal (1998), perfectly timed for the centennial celebration of Philippine independence; Muro-ami (1999), which bravely exposed the deadly practice of using child-divers to pound for fish in the Philippines’ coral reefs; and Bagong Buwan (2001), which dealt with the human cost of the Muslim-Christian conflict in Mindanao. Jose Rizal, 1998 Muro-ami, 1999 270 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Crossing over easily between projects for television and for the big screen is veteran film director Maryo J. delos Reyes. The heartwarming drama film Magnifico won for him the Best Director distinction at the 2003 FAMAS Awards and garnered other local and international film awards as well. Delos Reyes continues to be active in both film and television media, having become known for well-loved teleseryes (television drama series). Maryo J. delos Reyes Magnifico, 2003 Another Filipino film director who has brought the country to the cinema world’s attention is Brillante Mendoza. Mendoza was originally a production designer for films, commercials, and music videos, and started directing films in 2005. But in just four years, his film Kinatay (The Execution of P) won for him the Best Director award at the highly prestigious Cannes Film Festival of 2009. Brillante Mendoza Kinatay (The Execution of P), 2009 271 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. Why is film making considered a true modern art form? Explain how the following technological advances contributed to the evolution of filmmaking: a. celluloid strip film b. lighter cameras c. sound d. color e. computer animation and special effects 3. 4. 5. 6. Explain why the film director is considered an artist. Describe the allied arts that have emerged as part of the film industry. Explain the film technique called “montage.” What are some of the popular film genres? Name recent movies that are examples of these different genres. Explain how film has served as a powerful communication medium from the 20th century until today. In the Philippine film industry, name at least three outstanding film directors. What do you notice about the topics or subjects of their films? Cite some distinctive achievements by the Filipino film directors presented. 7. 8. 9. 10. WHAT TO PROCESS Film Group Project: “Moving Selfies!” 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Your teacher will divide the class into groups of eight to 10 students each. Together with your group mates, arrange for access to at least one of any of the following devices with video capabilities: a) a mobile phone with video camera b) a tablet with video camera c) a digital video camera As a group, choose a catchy tune or song of about two minutes in length. On your own time outside of class hours, create with your group a series of “video selfies” of yourselves with that tune as the background music. Using a video editing program (as discussed in Quarter II), work together to synchronize the video segments with the beat and lyrics of your chosen song. Save the finished video and turn it over to your Arts teacher for safekeeping until it will be presented as part of the culminating exhibit. 272 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines WHAT TO UNDERSTAND “Film Viewing” 1. A television and a DVD player will be set up in the classroom to show the following selected film excerpts on disc; or a laptop computer can be attached to a large monitor for viewing by the class: a. one Filipino film by a director discussed in these Learner’s Materials - 5-minute excerpt b. one American/foreign film - 5-minute excerpt (Note: If the foreign film is not in English, a version with English subtitles should be used.) 2. After both film viewings have been completed, participate in a class discussion on the following about each excerpt: a) title b) director c) year d) lead characters and the actors who played them e) film genre f) specific scenes or techniques that show the art of filmmaking 3. Together with your classmates, compare and contrast the qualities you observed in the Filipino and the American/foreign films that make each one unique. WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter III “Exhibit on Media-Based Arts and Design” Prepare your short videos for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter by labelling them with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the film editing software used. 273 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Animation I n recent decades, a whole new career opportunity has emerged for creative Filipinos via the field of animation. In fact, Filipino animators have been involved in the creation of some of the best-loved—and technically challenging—animated feature films produced in the last few years. Among these are Toy Story, Up, The Incredibles, Monsters University, Cars, Finding Nemo, Planes, Brave, Shrek, Kung Fu Panda, and more. Such recognition of Philippine talent abroad has, in fact, spurred the development of the local animation industry as well. Animation Council of the Philippines The Animation Council of the Philippines, Inc. (ACPI) is a non-stock, non-profit organization that aims to create an identity for the Philippines within the animation industry, making it one of the preferred sources for animation services worldwide. The organization works hand in hand with participating colleges and universities, the Technical Education and Skills Development Authority (TESDA) and other government agencies, and local government units to develop animation as a promising career option for Filipinos. In 2013, TESDA and ACPI began offering 2D and 3D Animation Scholarships to interested high school graduates, between the ages of 18 and 45. The showpiece of the ACPI is Animahensayon, an annual festival and competition featuring the works of Filipino animators. Apart from this major project, the ACPI grants the annual “Outstanding Emerging Artist in Animation Award” for outstanding young and fast-rising cartoonists and animators in the country. It also confers the Animahenasyon's “Lifetime Achievement Award” on notable animators and other contributors to the Philippine animation industry. Philippine Animation Studio, Inc. The Philippine Animation Studio, Inc. (PASI) was established in 1991 and has since collaborated on numerous animation projects and series with foreign partners. Among these have been Captain Flamingo, Producing Parker, Groove High, and Space Heroes Universe. For this last cartoon, PASI was tapped by a children’s entertainment company based in Sydney, Australia and went on to win the Best Animation Category in the 2012 Pixel Awards. 274 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Captain Flamingo Producing Parker Groove High Space Heroes Universe Among the other exciting milestones in the fast-emerging Philippine animation industry was the creation in 2008 of Urduja, an animated film adaptation of the legend of the warrior princess of Pangasinan. Produced by APT Entertainment, Seventoon, and Imaginary Friends, Urduja is recognized as the first fully-animated Filipino film, created by an all-Filipino group of animators using the traditional (hand-drawn) animation process with some 3D effects. The characters were voiced by an all-star cast of actors from Philippine cinema and television, with the screenplay written in Filipino. Urduja Dayo: Sa Mundo ng Elementalia 275 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Also released in 2008 was Dayo: Sa Mundo ng Elementalia, said to be the country’s first all-digital full-length animated feature film. Produced by Cutting Edge Productions, the film presents Philippine mythical creatures as heartwarming characters in a young boy's adventure. The production involved over 500 local animators and featured a “tra-digital animation” technique. Its characters were rendered in 2D animation, while the backdrops were created using 3D animation. Dayo was also the firstever animated movie to be screened during the Metro Manila Film Festival, as it was entered in the 34th MMFF in December 2008. Another breakthrough was the first Filipino full 3Danimated film, RPG Metanoia, co-produced by Ambient Media, Thaumatrope Animation, and Star Cinema in 2010. RPG Metanoia WHAT TO KNOW 1. Research on the meaning of the word “animate” or “animation.” How does it describe the qualities and capabilities of this art form? 2. What is the contribution of animation to the art of film making? 3. Briefly discuss some significant achievements of the animation industry in the Philippines—both for foreign animated films and cartoon series. 4. What role does the Animation Council of the Philippines (ACPI) play in equipping young Filipinos for a career in animation? 5. How has the Philippine Animation Studio, Inc. (PASI) helped gain recognition for Filipino animators in the field of international children’s cartoons? 6. Based on the examples presented, for what audience are our local animators creating their works? 7. In general, what themes and subject matter have our local animators been focusing on in recent years? 276 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines WHAT TO PROCESS NOTE: Considering the time needed to complete all the media-based group projects for Quarter III, your Arts teacher will have the class members choose one from among the projects for: a) “A Stop-action Cartoon” – presented below b) “Promoting Products/Services for a Cause” – presented in the section on Advertising c) “Kool Komiks” – presented in the section on Comics Illustration d) “Making a Story Book” – presented in the section on Book Design/Illustration Once the groups have been formed, they will work on their projects together outside of class hours. Animation Group Project: “A Stop-Action Cartoon” 1. The group members will make use of a mobile phone, tablet, or digital camera to do this most simple and basic process for creating what is known as “stop-action animation.” 2. The members will think of an action that will be captured as a series of still images lasting a total of 10 to 15 seconds. It can be an action to be done by a human or a movement of an object. 3. They will then carry out the action or movement, while taking a still image of each progressive step in that action or movement. 4. The still images will then be made to “move” using a digital animation program (as discussed in Quarter II). If the program allows the inclusion of a music clip or sound effects, the group may opt to add this as well. 5. The finished stop-action cartoons will be saved and turned over to the Arts teacher for safekeeping until they will be presented as part of the culminating exhibit. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. What role does animation play in the various media you see daily? What do you think of the reputation of Filipino artists in the world of animated feature films and cartoon series? 277 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III 3. 4. Do you think animation is an effective medium for promoting awareness among young Filipinos about Philippine history, literature, and folk lore? Why or why not? Would you consider animation as a possible career option in the future? WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter III “Exhibit on Media-Based Arts and Design” Note: This is to be done simultaneously with the artworks from the projects for advertising, comics illustration, and book design and illustration. Prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. All the finished artworks should be labelled with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. Print Media A longside the digital media forms discussed above, there remains the more conventional form known as print media. Included here are large-scale publications such as newspapers, magazines, journals, books of all kinds, as well as smaller-scale posters, brochures, flyers, menus, and the like. Of course, all of these now have their digital counterparts that may be accessed and read on the internet. However, there continues to be a demand and a purpose for the actual printed forms of these materials. And whether printed on paper or viewed on the web, these materials once again involve and showcase Filipino artistry. Advertising O ne major field that still relies heavily on print media is advertising. Despite the soaring popularity and seemingly limitless possibilities of online advertising and social media, Philippine artists are still called upon to create advertisements that will be physically printed. These appear in newspapers, magazines, posters, brochures, and flyers—each with their specific target readerships and markets, and highly-specialized approaches for reaching these target groups. 278 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Along with the advertising copywriters who provide the text for titles, taglines, and body copy, an entire team of modern-day art professionals creates the look of each ad. These range from art directors to photographers to graphic designers to illustrators. If the ad subject requires it, the team may further include food and product stylists, fashion stylists, hair and makeup artists, set and lighting designers. All for the purpose of creating an advertisement that will appear on a printed page or in a format that will be handed out to potential customers. WHAT TO KNOW 1. What forms does print media take in the field of advertising? Name five examples. 2. What does the advertising copywriter do? 3. Name the other art professionals who work together to create a print advertisement. WHAT TO PROCESS Advertising Group Project: “Presenting Products/Services with a Cause” 1. The group members will decide on original products or services, as well as special causes that these products or services can be presented as supporting or advocating. 2. Using image capture and manipulation programs discussed in Quarter II, the group members will create their choice of posters, banners/streamers, brochures, or print advertisements to present these products/services with a cause. (Note: The Arts teacher will guide the group members in selecting the final format for these projects, as the cost and the accessibility of printing or output services must be considered.) 3. The finished print advertisements will be turned over to the Arts teacher for safekeeping until they will be presented as part of the culminating exhibit. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. Is there still a place for print advertising along with other forms like television, radio, and online advertising? Why do you say so? 2. Would you consider the visual aspects of advertising as a form of media-based art? Support your answer. 3. Does advertising have certain responsibilities to the public? If yes, what do you think these are? 279 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III 4. Cite a specific print advertisement that you find particularly effective. Explain the elements or techniques that you believe contribute to its impact. 5. As a consumer of certain products for personal use or for school, do you find yourself influenced by print advertisements in choosing which products to buy? What factors in the advertisements influence you most, and why? WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter III “Exhibit on Media-Based Arts and Design” Note: This is to be done simultaneously with the artworks from the projects for animation, comics illustration, and book design and illustration. Prepare your advertisements for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. All the finished artworks should be labelled with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. Comic Books A nother field of print media that highlights the artistic gifts of Filipinos is that of comic books, or komiks as they are referred to locally. The popularity of Philippine comics began in the 1920s when Liwayway magazine started featuring comic strips, such as Mga Kabalbalan ni Kenkoy (The Misadventures of Kenkoy) created by Tony Velasquez. Velasquez went on to be recognized as the “Father of Filipino Comics.” Mga Kabalbalan ni Kenkoy 280 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines With the coming of the Americans to the country, local comics were clearly influenced by popular U.S. comics with superheroes as the main characters— resulting in local counterparts such as Darna and Captain Barbell. Darna Captain Barbell Even decades before, however, komiks creators had already introduced characters, themes, and story lines from Philippine folklore, mythology, and history. With books and libraries not yet readily accessible to a majority of the Filipino public, comics became a major form of reading material around the country, avidly read and shared by young and old alike. Pilipino Komiks, Lapu-lapu cover By Francisco V. Coching (1954) Tagalog Klasiks 281 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Filipino comics artists also became recognized for their talents, both locally and overseas. Thus, from the 1960s to the 1980s, Filipino artists were recruited to work for foreign comics publishers—among them the highly popular DC Comics. A more recent development in the Philippine comics scene has been the rise of comics series reflecting or commenting on current political and social issues or on the Filipino character in a humorous way. One such series is the longrunning Pugad Baboy, created by Pol Medina, Jr. Pugad Baboy With the phenomenal rise of digital media in recent decades, however, the local comics industry seemed to take a backseat. But there is a current resurgence of interest, not only among comics readers and collectors, but among Filipino artists and illustrators creating original concepts and experimenting with exciting new styles. There is now an entire range of subjects, characters, formats, and artistic treatments available for aspiring young comics artists to bring to life. The following are just a sampling of the possibilities. The Filipino Heroes League, created by Paolo Fabregas 282 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Trese, created by Budjette Tan and Kajo Baldisimo Skyworld: Safe Passage, created by Ian Sta. Maria Kiko Machine, created by Manix Abrera 283 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Kuting Magiting, created by Robert Magnuson Mythspace, created by Paolo Chikiamco and Borg Sinaban WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The popularity of comics began in the Philippines through what magazine? What was one of the first comic strips that appeared there? Who became known as the “Father of Filipino Comics”? What popular U.S. comics publisher hired many Filipino illustrators in the 1960s to the 1980s? How were early Filipino comics creators influenced by American comics? Yet how did local comics remain distinctly Philippine? With the limited access to books and libraries in the 1960s, what role did comics play? What trends in style and subject matter do you see in today’s local comics? 284 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines WHAT TO PROCESS Comics Group Project: “Kool Komiks” 1. The group members will decide upon a subject matter and main character (or characters) for a simple 5-frame comic strip that they will create. 2. The members will volunteer to take on different aspects of producing the comic strip: a. conceptualizing and creating the “story board” for the comic strip frames b. writing the text and/or dialogue that will appear in each frame c. rendering the main characters and the background details using an illustration program of the group’s choice d. outputting the finished frames (since this will be for exhibit purposes, each frame shall be approximately 5” x 7” in size; which means the entire strip will be a total of 35” long) 3. The finished comic strip will be mounted on illustration board or chipboard cut to size. 4. The group will turn over the finished comic strip to the Arts teacher for safekeeping until this will be presented as part of the culminating exhibit. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. 3. 4. Do you consider comics illustration a modern form of art? Why or why not? How are today’s Philippine comics different from those of the 1960s to the 1980s? Are you a comics reader—whether of American or Filipino comic books or series? If not, what is the reason? If yes, what attracts you to them? Among the current generation of local comics writers and artists presented here, whose style appeals to you most? Briefly explain why. WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter III “Exhibit on Media-Based Arts and Design” Note: This is to be done simultaneously with the artworks from the projects for animation, advertising, and book design and illustration. 285 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Prepare your artworks for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. All the finished artworks should be labelled with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique used. Book Design and Illustration Y et another extremely rich and promising area for young Filipino artists is the field of book design and illustration. Thanks to the visionary mindsets of progressive Philippine book publishers such as Bookmark, Anvil Publishing, Adarna Books, and Tahanan Books for Young Readers (now Ilaw ng Tahanan Publishing), local book designers and illustrators have been given the professional stature they deserve and the creative freedom they need to truly showcase their talents. Ang Tuta ni Noe, by Virgilio S. Almario, illustrated by Sergio Bumatay III How Long Till September, by Tanya Sevilla-Simon, illustrated by Jill Arwen Posadas Whuush! by Glenda Oris, illustrated by Aldy Aguirre Mahabang-Mahabang-Mahaba, by Genaro Gojo Cruz, illustrated by Ghani Madueño But That Won’t Wake Me Up!, by Annie Dennise Lumbao and Anelka Lumbao, illustrated by Liza Flores Published by Adarna Books 286 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Why the Piña Has a Hundred Eyes By Neni Sta. Romana-Cruz Illustrated by Felix Mago Miguel Published by Bookmark Ningning By Gilda Cordero-Fernando Published by Bookmark A Sea of Stories By Carla M. Pacis Illustrated by Ruben de Jesus Published by Bookmark Gotita de Dragon and Other Stories By Nick Joaquin Illustrated by Beth Parrocha Published by Anvil Publishing Alpabetong Filipino By Nicanor G. Tiongson Illustrated by Crispin Dayao, Jr. Published by Tahanan Books for Young Readers The Mats By Francisco Arcellana Illustrated by Hermes Alegre Published by Tahanan Books for Young Readers 287 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Digital Media A ll the artistic skills and techniques that go into producing books like those just presented, of course have their counterpart in the ever-growing world of digital media. This means that books that were originally available only in print are being gradually converted to digital format, while new books are now conceptualized, written, designed, and illustrated precisely for these online media. This also means that the manner by which today’s readers can find, access, and enjoy these electronic books (or ‘ebooks’) is via digital media tablets, ebook readers, and other handheld reading devices. One such device that is available locally is the ebook reader called Kobo, which features international as well as Philippine titles. Likewise gaining in popularity are social media-based publishing sites, like Wattpad, that serve as communities for millions of budding writers to share their original stories online. This phenomenon, along with the rise of electronic distribution platforms, such as Flipreads, which provide access to the works of Filipino authors and publishers, is also opening up exciting new opportunities for young artists to do the digital design and illustrations for all these upcoming titles. WHAT TO KNOW 1. 2. 3. 4. In the book publishing industry in the Philippines, how has the profession of book design evolved? What trends or styles do you notice in the examples of book design presented? What is the digital counterpart of print media now available to authors and publishers? Briefly explain this. Describe how this affects the publishing and printing industry. WHAT TO PROCESS Book Illustration Group Project: “Creating a Story Book” 1. The group members will decide upon a subject matter and characters for a simple 10-page storybook that they will create. 2. The members will volunteer to take on different aspects of producing the book: a. conceptualizing and writing the storyline b. encoding the text of the story into a word processing or book layout program c. rendering the artwork for the book cover using an illustration software 288 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines d. rendering the illustrations using an illustration software, and incorporating these into the book layout e. outputting the finished cover and inside pages of the book f. binding the cover and inside pages into book form 3. The group will turn over the finished book to the Arts teacher for safekeeping until this will be presented as part of the culminating exhibit. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Looking at the sample book covers shown, would you consider book design and illustration an art form? Why or why not? Are book design and illustration possible options as a profession for artistic young Filipinos? Explain your opinion. With books now being available online, explain how this new development affects the buying and reading public. Do you view this as a positive development? Why do you say so? Do you yourself access books online? What do you find to be the pros and cons of this new form of reading experience? WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter III “Exhibit on Media-Based Arts and Design” Note: This is to be done simultaneously with the artworks from the projects for animation, advertising, and comics illustration. Prepare your story book for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. It should be labelled with the original title, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique(s)/software used. Innovation in Product and Industrial Design Y et another breakthrough arena for Filipino imagination, ingenuity, and innovativeness in recent decades has been that of design. Specifically, this encompasses product and industrial design as applied to furniture, lighting, and interior accessories, as well as fashion from haute couture to bridal ensembles to casual wear. As a result, a number of Filipino designers have risen to superstardom both locally and internationally. 289 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Kenneth Cobonpue Cebu-based Kenneth Cobonpue is a multiawarded designer and the creative director of Hive, a design and manufacturing facility for designers of interior accessories and lighting. Cobonpue’s fresh and exciting concepts and excellent craftsmanship have earned him the acclaim and the patronage of discerning clientele the world over—including prominent Hollywood celebrities. Yoda chair Carousel lamps Trame chairs 290 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Monique Lhuillier Also hailing from Cebu City, Filipina fashion designer Monique Lhuillier first rose to prominence for her exquisite wedding gowns. But she has since become one of the darlings of the Hollywood celebrity set, with several A-list stars having worn her couture creations to gala events and award shows, as well as to their own weddings. Lhuillier studied at the Fashion Institute of Design & Merchandising in Los Angeles, and now has her own retail boutiques in that city and in New York. Her collections include bridal and bridesmaids dresses, ready-to-wear, evening gowns, linens, tableware, stationery, and home fragrances. Josie Natori Another name that has a prestigious place in the New York fashion industry is that of Josie Natori. Born Josephina Almeda Cruz in Manila, this FilipinoAmerican fashion designer began her career as an investment banker, before she made the dramatic shift to creating her own lines of lingerie, resort and lounge wear, as well as semi-formal and casual attire. 291 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III She went on to establish The Natori Company that has built up a lifestyle brand that today includes four lingerie lines, the Josie Natori ready-to-wear collection, home accessories, fragrance, and eyewear. Rajo Laurel Probably best known to the general public as a judge on the television series Project Runway Philippines, Rajo Laurel is a much-admired Filipino fashion designer with a number of national and international awards to his name. He trained at New York’s Fashion Institute of Technology and at Central Saint Martin’s in London. Laurel is also a savvy entrepreneur, establishing House of Laurel and Rajo Laurel Enterprise. His creations maintain a Filipino sensibility, incorporating embroidery, beadwork, and hand-painted prints, while also offering the prestige of limited edition pieces. Thus, he has gained a loyal local following and the attention of the international market. 292 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines Rajo Laurel’s 2014 “Palawan” collection Laurel also co-pioneered the social enterprise known as Rags2Riches. This organization enables women from poor communities across the country to earn through creating fashion and home accessories out of up-cycled scrap cloth, organic materials, and indigenous fabrics. Today, Rags2Riches has evolved into an ecoethical lifestyle brand. Lulu Tan Gan Known for her fashionable knitwear lines since 1985, Lulu Tan-Gan had been dubbed “The Queen of Knitwear” in the country. That specialty has since evolved into a new hand-woven line, called Indigenous Couture, that blends Philippine artisan crafts, fabrics, fibers, and other local materials with TanGan’s signature contemporary lifestyle dressing. Photo by Vito Studios The designer’s vision is to encourage the use of stylized indigenous and traditional wear, as she draws inspiration from the rich textile and embroidery traditions of the Philippines and interprets these in modern styles and silhouettes. Further, each Tan-Gan creation is 95% hand-made—hand-loomed (knitted and woven) by Philippine artisans. 293 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Dita Sandico-Ong Another Philippine designer who has been advocating the use of local weaving techniques and natural fibers is Dita Sandico-Ong. Known as the “Wrap Artiste” of the Philippines for her famous bold-colored wraps, Sandico-Ong first experimented with the local weave of Ilocos Sur, known as inabel, as well as with pineapple fibers blended with Irish linen, dubbed piñalino. Photo: Philippine Embassy, Rome From there, she tried other local fibers, particularly abaca which she was introduced to by weaver and entrepreneur Virgilio Apanti. Sandico-Ong has since been working with a multipurpose cooperative in Catanduanes, training them in natural dye extraction and advanced weaving techniques for abaca. Today, her collection includes wraps or panuelos, as well as boleros, jackets, and long tunics of banana fiber and abaca. Her designs are presented in fashion shows around the world and are sold in high-end shops in major international cities. Photo: Philippine International Aid WHAT TO KNOW 1. How does technology drive the applied arts such as product design, fashion design, and industrial design? 2. Who is an acclaimed Filipino designer who has become known globally for his innovative furniture pieces, lighting accessories, and interior accents? 3. Who is hailed as the “Wrap Artiste” of the Philippines? Why is this so? What unique materials does she use in her creations? 294 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines 4. Who is the Filipino investment banker turned fashion designer, worldrenowned for luxury lingerie and lounge wear? 5. Which Filipino fashion designer is popularly recognized for being a judge on the TV series Project Runway Philippines and a major name in the local and international fashion scene? What other commendable efforts is he involved in? 6. What is the new fashion line of designer Lulu Tan-Gan, known as “The Queen of Knitwear”? What makes her creations interesting and unique? 7. Who is the Cebu-born Filipina designer who has become the darling of the international celebrity set from her beginnings as a wedding dress designer? 8. Do you note a common vision among these Filipino artists? What do you think it is? Explain briefly. WHAT TO PROCESS Applied Arts Group Projects: “Project Runway” / “Project Interior” 1. Your teachers will divide the class into two large groups. Group A will create fashion-related pieces; while Group B will create interior designrelated pieces. 2. The key here is for each group to make use of locally and readily-available materials in very innovative and imaginative ways. 3. The suggested target output for each group is listed below. However, group members may have their own, even more creative ideas that they are free to implement. Group A – Fashion-related Pieces • Head piece or hair accessory • Bag, tote, or pouch • Belt or sash • Fashion accessories – bangles, buckles, buttons, a scarf, etc. Group B – Interior Design-related Pieces • Vase, basket, or decorative bowl • Seat cushion or throw pillow 295 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III • • Lamp shade or lighting accessory Door mat or small area rug 4. Ideally, the group members will use Session 8 to work on their particular products together in the classroom. Anything left undone by the end of the session will be completed on their own time outside of class hours. 5. Each finished piece will be labeled with a creative name highlighting its distinct qualities; and the names of the group members. The pieces will be turned over to the Arts teacher for safekeeping until they will be presented as part of the culminating exhibit. WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. Seeing the Filipino achievers in this field, both locally and internationally, how do you view the potential of our people in terms of the ‘applied arts’? Explain your opinion. 2. What realizations do you have about Philippine raw materials and how they can be incorporated into creations for interior design, furniture, decorative accent pieces, clothing, and fashion accessories? 3. What do you think about combining our traditional crafts and indigenous materials with world-wide trends in color, texture, design, and even function? 4. What is your reaction to the creations of the Filipino designers presented? Which one/s particularly impressed or appealed to you? 5. Would you consider these designers as role models for young Filipinos like yourselves looking ahead to your future careers? Explain briefly. WHAT TO PERFORM Preparing for the Quarter III “Exhibit on Media-Based Arts and Design” Prepare your fashion and/or interior design creations for the culminating exhibit at the end of the quarter. All the finished pieces should be labelled with original titles, your group members’ names, the date, and the technique and materials used. 296 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Media-based Arts and Design in the Philippines CULMINATING ACTIVITY FOR QUARTER III: “AN EXHIBIT OF MEDIA-BASED ARTS AND DESIGN” The last session for Quarter III will be devoted to staging “An Exhibit of Mediabased Arts and Design” presenting the following categories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Photography Film Animation Advertising Comics Illustration Book Design and Illustration Interior Design / Fashion / Industrial Design You will be assigned to select from among your own works, as well as source photos, magazine or calendar cutouts, Internet images, etc. of at least two to three representative artworks each for the above categories. Curating the Exhibit Each artwork will be accompanied by a card briefly describing the work as follows: Title _________________________________________________ Artist/s _________________________________________________ Artistic style and medium used _______________________________ Date of creation ___________________________________________ Invite the school Administration, other faculty members, and your schoolmates to visit the exhibit. Be prepared to explain the works and how these present the characteristics, techniques, and trends of media-based arts and design. 297 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter III Critiquing the Exhibit As a form of self-evaluation, rate the culminating exhibit using the format below: “AN EXHIBIT ON MEDIA-BASED ARTS AND DESIGN” Evaluation Form Criteria Very Good Good Fair Poor Selection of artworks/products (theme and message) Completeness of exhibit Presentation (display, mounting, and labelling of works) Assignment of tasks Cooperation among students Response of exhibit visitors 298 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Quarter IV: ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE WITH THE USE OF MEDIA CONTENT STANDARDS The learner demonstrates understanding of… 1. how theatrical elements (sound, music, gesture, movement, and costume) affect the creation and communication of meaning in a theater play/performance incorporated with media. 2. theater and performance as a synthesis of arts. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS The learner… 1. creates appropriate costumes, props, set accessories, improvised lighting, and other décor for Philippine plays. 2. creates/improvises appropriate sound, music, gesture, and movements for a chosen theatrical composition. 3. participates in an original performance inspired by local Philippine stories, myths, and events relevant to current issues. LEARNING COMPETENCIES The learner… 1. explains how an idea or theme is communicated in a selected performance through the integration of musical sounds, songs, dialogue, and dance. 2. analyzes examples of plays based on theatrical forms, and elements of art as applied to performance. 3. illustrates how the different elements are used to communicate the meaning. 4. defines the uniqueness of each original performance. 5. designs with a group the visual components of a school play (stage design, costumes, props, etc.). 6. assumes the role of a character as an actor/performer, or production staff (director, choreographer, lighting designer, stage manager). 7. analyzes the uniqueness of the group that was given recognition for its performance and explains what components contributed to its selection. 8. contributes to the conceptualization of an original performance 9. choreographs the movements and gestures needed in the effective delivery of an original performance with the use of media. 10. improvises accompanying sound and rhythm needed in the effective delivery of an original performance with the use of different media. From the Department of Education curriculum for ARTS Grade 10 (2014) 299 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV Quarter IV: Original Performance With the Use of Media INTRODUCTION T heater is the one major art form that brings together all the other art forms—from painting and sculpture, to installation art, to music, to dance, to literature, even to computer arts—in a single production. A story is acted out on stage (or other performance area) by actors portraying the characters, bringing them to life and developing the plot through dialogue and actions, and sometimes through song and/or dance. Contributing to the vivid theater experience are the stage sets and props, the lighting, the background music and sound effects, the costumes and accessories. In recent decades, computergenerated visual effects and mechanized sets have been incorporated as well. All of these components draw from the various art forms and call upon the artistic skills and techniques that you have been exposed to over the last three quarters. In this fourth quarter, you will get to experience the complex and exciting process of mounting an original performance together with your classmates—combining most, if not all, of these skills and techniques. Philippine Theater and Performing Groups T he Philippines has a rich and thriving theater industry that you may be interested to venture into in the future. Productions range from original plays with Philippine themes and settings, to renowned theater classics from past centuries, to contemporary musicals from Broadway or London’s West End. Below is an overview of some of the more prominent theater and performing groups in the country and their major productions. PETA and Tanghalang Pilipino With the American presence in the Philippines for the first half of the 20th century, it was inevitable that many U.S. and European theater forms and scripts found their way here. Among them were the classics, such as the plays of William Shakespeare, as well as the works of great American playwrights. At the same time, local theater groups staged original Philippine zarzuelas which were plays performed in song, similar to the European opera. In the past few decades, modern theater groups have continued to express the distinctly Philippine interpretation of both originally-written plays as well as adaptations of foreign works translated into Filipino. 300 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media At the forefront of these are the Philippine Educational Theater Association (PETA), founded in 1967 by Cecile Guidote-Alvarez, and Tanghalang Pilipino, the resident theater company of the Cultural Center of the Philippines, founded in 1987. Himala Tanghalang Pilipino, 2004 Caredivas PETA, 2011 The productions of these groups span the range from daring new presentations of classical works, to the spectacle of Philippine myths and legends, to commentaries on current social and political issues. Haring Lear PETA, 2012 Pamana PETA, 2013 301 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV Ibalong Tanghalang Pilipino, 2012 Noli Tanghalang Pilipino, 2011 William Tanghalang Pilipino, 2011 302 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media M eanwhile, other Philippine theater groups are also staging original and adapted plays and musical productions, primarily in English. Best known among these are Repertory Philippines, Trumpets, and New Voice Company. More recently, Theater Down South has been added to their roster. And championing the cause of the more classical form of musical performances is the Philippine Opera Company. Repertory Philippines In 1967, theater director Zenaida Amador fulfilled her dream of bringing the best of Broadway and London’s West End to Filipino audiences. Together with actress Baby Barredo, Amador established Repertory Philippines, a company that not only staged English-language plays and musicals year-round but trained actors and actresses as well. The company continues with this vision to this day. Multi-awarded theater actress and singer, Lea Salonga, in fact, began her career as a child lead in productions of Repertory Philippines. From there, she went on to become an international stage superstar in the lead role of Kim in Miss Saigon—putting the Philippines on the world map in terms of theater talent. Lea Salonga in the lead roles of Repertory’s production of Annie, and London’s Miss Saigon Also among Repertory’s many notable achievements was the 1993 staging of the international hit musical Les Miserables in Manila with an all-Filipino cast and production team. Repertory Philippines’ founder, Zenaida Amador, with Les Miserables composer Claude Michel Schonberg 303 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV In its 2009 season, Repertory added a Filipino classic in English to its productions—A Portrait of the Artist as Filipino, by National Artist Nick Joaquin. To date, it continues to offer a mix of productions ranging from literary classics to contemporary satires, comedies, and musicals. A Portrait of the Artist as Filipino Repertory Philippines, 2009 Alice in Wonderland Repertory Philippines, 2013 Little Women Repertory Philippines, 2010 The Producers Repertory Philippines, 2013 304 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media Trumpets In the 1990s, the Philippine theater group Trumpets also began mounting grand productions of originally-written musicals with a slant towards good values for children and the whole family. Among their plays have been Joseph the Dreamer; First Name; The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe; Little Mermaid; Honk; N.O.A.H.; and The Bluebird of Happiness. The intention of Trumpets is to provide wholesome theater experiences for Filipino youth while also building up the Philippine theater-going public. The Lion, The Witch, and The Wardrobe Trumpets, 1997 N.O.A.H. Trumpets, 2009 The Bluebird of Happiness Trumpets, 2013 305 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV New Voice Company Also making its own distinct contribution to the Philippine theater scene is New Voice Company, established in 1994 by Monique Wilson—also a Repertory Philippines’ protégée who went on to star on the international stage. New Voice has earned a reputation for staging thoughtprovoking productions on daring and deep topics. Aspects of Love New Voice Company, 2006 The Male Voice New Voice Company, 2009 My Name is Rachel Corrie New Voice Company, 2010 306 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media Philippine Opera Company The Philippine Opera Company (POC) was founded in 1999 by a group of dedicated classically-trained singers, led by soprano Karla Gutierrez as artistic directress. The POC seeks to develop performers as well as audiences for classical music performances, both foreign and Filipino. Harana Philippine Opera Company, 2009 Master Class Philippine Opera Company, 2010 The Mikado Philippine Opera Company, 2013 307 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV Theater Down South In 2007, Theater Down South was founded, with Philippine theater mainstay Michael Williams as artistic director. The vision of the company is to widen the reach of stage productions beyond the traditional centers within Metro Manila, and therefore develop a broader audience base. A Midsummer Night’s Dream Theater Down South, 2007 The Red Carp Theater Down South, 2009 DEPED COPY A Funny Thing Happened on the Way to the Forum Theater Down South, 2010 Roles in a Stage Production M ost visible on stage in a theater production are the actors and actresses playing their roles. However, behind the scenes is an entire team whose work begins months in advance of the actual performance. It is they who support the actors and enable them to truly bring the play to life. While the members of this team may vary depending on how complex or simple the production is, below are the basic roles that most plays require: Producer – In a professional stage production, this is the person who takes the play from a mere concept to an actual finished presentation. He or she chooses all the team members and assigns 308 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media them their functions, and oversees the casting of the actors and actresses for the different roles. He or she also decides on major logistical matters like when and where the play will be staged, the production schedule, and in most cases either finances all the production costs or else sources the funds needed. Note: In a school or class play, the role of the producer is normally fulfilled by the Drama Club moderator, the classroom teacher, or by the school itself. Director – The director is the overall artistic coordinator of the entire production. Like a conductor of an orchestra, he or she has a vision of the desired total effect and impact of the performance. With the play’s script serving as a “musical score,” the director ensures that each one in the production “hits all the right notes” to create a cohesive, seamless performance that will engage the audience. Throughout the play’s rehearsals, the director instructs and guides the actors as to the delivery of their lines of dialogue; their positions and movements on stage (called “blocking”); the thoughts or feelings they are to convey through tone of voice, facial expression, and gestures. By the time of the actual performance, all these should be second nature to the actors as they portray their characters on stage. The director also coordinates closely with the set, lighting, sound, costume/makeup designers, and the choreographer (if the play involves dance) to create the envisioned total effect. Playwright – For a script intended for stage performance, the writer of the script is more specifically called a playwright. The initial concept or plot may be original, and then developed into a play script. Or it may be based on an existing story or another play which the playwright will then adapt to present in a new way. The script forms the basis of the entire production. It contains the exact lines of dialogue that each character will memorize and deliver on stage, often with notes on tone of voice, facial expression, and even movement or blocking. It also provides a clear description of the set, props, and lighting to be used in each scene. In some cases, the director may collaborate with the playwright on making some script adjustments in the course of the rehearsals to better achieve the desired effect. Set designer – The concept and creation of the physical stage setup is the task of the set designer. He or she builds the set (or sets) that will simulate the world that the play’s characters are supposed to live in. The set may be realistic and filled with authentic details; or it may be minimalist, merely suggesting the setting with a few pieces of furniture or props and a simple backdrop. In either case, the set designer ensures that the set will enable the actors to move about easily and naturally to make their roles believable, and will truly provide the ambiance on stage that the director and the playwright intend. 309 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV Lighting designer – Coordinating closely with the set designer is the lighting designer. Lighting is critical in creating the mood of each scene in the play, highlighting a dramatic moment, signalling the entrance of a character, focusing attention on a specific spot on stage, or even providing the blanket of darkness for set and prop changes. Colored lights or filters may be used, as well as special effects such as gradual dimming or brightening, a speckled effect like sunlight through leaves, or flickering lights. The lighting designer plans all these and adds detailed notes on the script for the lighting crew to follow during rehearsals and the actual performance. Costume designer – The actors and actresses must look believable in their roles, and much of this is owed to the costume designer. He or she studies the general setting (time and place) that the play is meant to take place in, as well as each character in the script. He or she then decides what attire will not only give the audience a clear sense of the setting, but will also express each character’s personality and distinct qualities. The costumes may need to be designed and sewn to meet these requirements. Or they may simply be assembled from available clothes and accessories, with some additional touches created as needed. For a modern or avant-garde play, the actors sometimes wear regular street clothes with a simple prop, a mask, or headgear to denote the characters they are playing. Sound designer – Similar to the lighting designer, the sound designer serves a vital role in creating and enhancing the atmosphere of the performance. Sound, in this case, includes music both on stage and as background, which the sound designer may need to source to suit the general time and place of the play, as well as particular scenes. Also involved are special sound effects like thunder, birds chirping, rushing water, gunfire, passing cars, approaching footsteps, and the like. The sound designer works with all these to support the action and interaction taking place on stage. He or she adds detailed notes to the script to serve as a guide for the sound crew during rehearsals and the actual performance. Note: In large scale productions where live musicians or even a full orchestra are involved, a separate musical director is responsible for coordinating the play’s music. Production manager – Coordinating all the complex behind-the-scenes details of staging a play is the production manager. He or she is tasked with overseeing the crews for the sets and props, the sound and music, the lighting, and the costumes. This includes ensuring that all the needed elements, facilities, and equipment are not only available, but are in good working order, properly catalogued and labelled, and safely stored from one rehearsal to the next, up until the time of the performance. Technical director – The technical director shadows the play’s director throughout the entire production process. From the time the director presents his or her vision for the play and issues instructions at every rehearsal, the technical director carefully notes how each actor and every member of the stage, sound, lighting, and costume crews need to be coordinated to bring the director’s vision to life—ensuring that every instruction is properly executed. 310 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media By the time of the final technical rehearsal (sometimes called the dress rehearsal, since it is performed in full costume and makeup), the director focuses on assessing the total effect of the performance and how it might still be improved. It is then the technical director who takes over to closely monitor the individual details, and again ensure that these work together seamlessly in the actual performance. Choreographer – In cases where a play involves dance in certain scenes, a choreographer is included in the production team. He or she not only plans out all the dance steps to suit the music, but also rehearses the actors until they are able to perform the dance skillfully—while remaining “in character” on stage. Should the play happen to involve fight scenes, the choreographer will likewise program the moves of the opposing sides so these can be executed not only believably, but safely as well. Makeup designer – As the costume designer deliberates on the characters’ main attire, the makeup designer is brought in to plan the hairstyles and makeup to complement the costumes. The work of the makeup designer may be as simple as making the actors look natural for their respective roles—based on their characters’ age and personality, and the time and place of the story. But it may also be far more challenging, such as transforming the actors into mythical creatures, animals, a different nationality, or futuristic beings. Thus, the makeup designer works his or her magic through the wonders of makeup, face and body painting, and hair coloring. Other accessories may be employed, like masks, wigs and hair extensions, headdresses, and even prosthetics to alter certain facial features or body parts. WHAT TO KNOW A. Philippine Theater Groups 1. What are the active theater groups in the Philippines specializing in original plays written in Filipino? 2. Name two performing groups that present adaptations of foreign plays, primarily in English. 3. Which theater company has produced a number of actors and actresses who have gone on to become stars on the international stage? 4. Which theater company tends to present productions with thought-provoking content? 5. Name the production group that focuses on family-oriented and values-rich performances. 6. Which performance company aims to develop both performers and audiences for classical music theater? 7. What do you note as two of the main objectives that Philippine theater groups have in common? Explain these briefly. 311 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV B. Roles in a Stage Production 1. How is the director of a play similar to an orchestra conductor? Explain briefly. 2. Which member of the production team shadows the director? Briefly describe his or her role. 3. What is the creator of the script for stage performance called? 4. Out of the many roles required in a stage production, name three that are involved with the physical setup and mood of the performance area. 5. Name two other roles that are responsible for the physical appearance of the different characters on stage. 6. What is another name for the technical rehearsal? Why was it given this name? WHAT TO PROCESS “Experiencing Theater” 1. Your teacher will schedule a time within Quarter IV for the class to watch a live play. Depending on what is available or accessible in your area within that period, any of the following may be considered: Option 1: a live performance of a production by any Philippine theater group (whether discussed above or others) Option 2: a recorded performance of a production by any of these groups to be viewed in school Option 3: a school or community play Option 4: a classroom play 2. Watch the play very attentively. Observe how the plot is developed and take note of the artistic elements and principles used. 3. Afterwards, write a reaction paper using the following outline: Title of the play ______________________________________________ Scriptwriter ______________________________________________ Director ______________________________________________ Stage Designer ______________________________________________ Setting ______________________________________________ 312 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media Main characters ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ Main story line (a 1-paragraph summary) ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ Personal reaction ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ WHAT TO UNDERSTAND 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. What is your impression of the theater industry in the Philippines? Would you like to attend a stage production of the various theater groups? What type of play most interests you, and why? How do you feel about the Philippine theater performers who have become stars on both the local and international stage? Can you envision yourself being involved in the theater arts in some way? Would you consider a full-time (or part-time) career in this field? WHAT TO PERFORM CULMINATING ACTIVITY FOR QUARTER IV: “STAGING AN ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE” Assigned Theme: A Philippine Myth, Legend, or Folk Tale Or a Current Issue At the start of Quarter IV, your teacher would already have oriented the class on this culminating activity of staging an original theater performance. Every class member would already have been assigned his or her specific role in the production process, which each one should have been carrying out in the course of the quarter. 313 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV A. Start of the Quarter: Pre-Production 1. Sourcing/Writing the Script - A group of class members will be tasked with sourcing an existing script on a Philippine myth, legend, or folk tale; or dealing with a current issue. If an existing script is not available or not suitable for school use, this group will create an original script. Note: Guidelines for effective scriptwriting would have been taken up in your English classes. 2. Casting the Actors - Based on the script that has been sourced or written, the characters will be cast from among the class members. 3. Forming the Production Team - B. The remaining class members will be assigned the following roles that are typically required for a school or class play: a) Director b) Technical/Assistant Director c) Set Designer, with a team of 4-5 students as production crew d) Lighting Designer, with a team of 4-5 students as lighting crew e) Sound Designer, with a team of 4-5 students as sound crew f) Production Manager, with a team of 6-8 students as stage crew g) Costume Designer, with a team of 3-4 students as wardrobe crew h) Makeup Designer, with a team of 2-3 students as makeup crew i) Choreographer, with an Assistant Choreographer Mid-Quarter: Production of Sets, Costumes, and Props Design of Lighting and Sound, Using Different Media Start of Acting Rehearsals and Blocking As mentioned at the start of this Quarter, theater is an art form that brings together an entire range of art forms—along with their corresponding elements and principles. As the entire class begins production of the play’s sets, costumes, and props; the design of the lighting and sound; and the acting rehearsals, all class members should maintain a clear intent to apply the following elements of art in this particular class production. 314 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Original Performance With the Use of Media Elements of Art as Applied to an Original Performance 1. Sound and Music – incorporating sound recording and editing techniques available using applications for desktop or laptop computers, tablets, and android phones 2. Gesture, Movement, and Dance – incorporating appropriate dance styles and techniques learned in Physical Education classes 3. Costume, Mask, Makeup, and Accessories – incorporating art techniques such as painting, papier mache, assemblage, simple sculpture and industrial design 4. Spectacle – creating a striking, even awe-inspiring effect on stage through the use of lighting, sound, music, costumes, dance, and special effects Principles of Art as Applied to an Original Performance 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. D. Rhythm, Movement Balance Emphasis Harmony, Unity, and Variety Proportion Last Weeks of the Quarter: Technical Rehearsal - Schedule a technical rehearsal at least a week before the intended performance date of your play. - With the guidance of your Music and Arts teachers, and perhaps your Drama Club moderator, assess what components of the play may still need improvement. End of the Quarter: Performance Proper - This is the culmination of your months of hard work and preparation. Invite the other sections of Grade 10, other grade levels, and the school administration to be your audience. - Execute each of your roles—whether as an actor or a member of the production team—to the best of your ability. - Your Arts teacher will schedule a critiquing session after the performance (see guide on the following page) to discuss the various learnings that took place in the course of staging an original theater performance. 315 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS  Quarter IV Critiquing the Performance As a form of self-evaluation, rate the class performance using the format below: “STAGING AN ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE” Evaluation Form Criteria Very Good Good Fair Poor Choice of play subject (theme and message) Casting of characters Assignment of tasks Rehearsal process Production process Cooperation among students Carrying out of roles: Scriptwriting Direction Stage management Acting Stage design Lighting Music Choreography Sound effects Costumes Makeup Audience response 316 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC GLOSSARY absolute music Music with no extra-musical association such as words, visual imagery, or emotion; the opposite of program music a cappella A Latin term, applied to choral music without accompaniment aerophone Any musical instrument that produces sound primarily by causing a body of air to vibrate, without the use of strings or membranes alternative music An underground independent form in the 1980’s that became widely popular in the 1990’s for defying the excesses of “mainstream” rock music, Alternative Music became known for its unconventional practices such as distorted guitar sounds, oppressive lyrics, and defiant attitudes. alto 1 A female voice with a range lower than a soprano, but higher than the male tenor 2 A term used for an instrument whose range is analogous to the alto voice aria An air or song for solo voice with orchestra, usually part of an opera, cantata, or oratorio art song Short stylized song dealing with such subjects as love, nature, and life. It is usually written for one voice with piano accompaniment atonality A term used for music without a central key, thereby producing dissonant harmonies and disjunct melodies avant-garde A French term used to describe composers (also artists and writers) whose works are radical and advanced ballad Is an expressive folksong in narrative verse whose text deals typically about love. ballet An artistic dance form performed to music, using precise and highly formalized set steps and gestures beat Regular, current pulsation that divides music into equal units of time bebop It is a modernist jazz style of music during World War II whose jazz spirit is coupled with the harmonic standard structure as a new pattern to base its improvisation. big band A large ensemble form originating in the United States in the mid 1920’s closely associated with the Swing Era with jazz elements. Relying heavily on percussion (drums), wind, rhythm section (guitar, piano, double bass, vibes), and brass instruments (saxophones), with a lyrical string section (violins and other string instruments) to accompany a lyrical melody. bodabil A genre of various entertainment composed of songs, dances, comedy routines, magic acts, and chorus girls bossa nova originated in 1958-b9 as a movement effecting a radical change in the classic Cuban samba. The word “bossa” comes from the Brazilian capital of Rio de Janeiro, which means either ‘trend’ or ‘something charming’, integrating melody, harmony, and rhythm into a “swaying” feel, where the vocal production is often nasal. blues A type of black American folk music of the 20th century related to jazz, and associated with one’s state of mind blues ballad A fusion of Anglo-American and Afro-American styles from the 19th century that deals with the anti-heroes resisting authority. call and response method It is a succession of two distinct musical phrases usually rendered by different musicians, where the second phrase acts as a direct commentary on or response to the first. Much like the question and answer sequence in human communication, it also forms a strong resemblance to the verse-chorus form in many vocal compositions. cha cha A ballroom dance originating in Cuba in 1953, derived from mambo and its characteristic rhythm of 2 crochets – 3 quavers – quaver rest with a syncopation on the 4th beat. chamber music Music for a chamber (or small room) rather than a hall; hence music played by small groups—duos, trios, quarters, etc. chance music Music in which chance or randomness of performance is an element of the composition. chord The simultaneous sounding of two or more tones chordophone Any musical instrument that produces sound primarily by vibrating strings chromatic An interval based on an octave of 12 semitones rather than a diatonic scale 317 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. concerto Originally, a work (vocal or instrumental) with effects of contrast, but now a work in which a solo instrument performs with a large ensemble or orchestra counterpoint The simultaneous combination of two or more melodies, or polyphony countersubject A subsidiary theme played in response to the subject of a figure cumbia An African courtship dance with European and African instrumentation and characteristics, which became popular in Panama and Colombia disco Music pertained to rock music that was more danceable, which led to the establishment of venues bearing the same name as a place for public dancing dissonance An interval or chord that is not harmonious like a consonance dynamics Variations in the volume of musical sounds electronic music Music which uses electronic equipments ensemble A small group of performers expressionism A term borrowed from painting and literature for music designed to express a state of mind folksongs Songs by the people handed down from generation to generation form Organization of musical ideas in time; structure of a musical composition foxtrot A 20th century social dance in the USA that was executed as a one step, two step and syncopated rhythmic pattern harmony The combination of simultaneous tones to produce chords, and the relationship of successive chords idiophones A musical instrument that creates sound through its own vibration, without the use of strings or membranes impressionism A term borrowed from painting to describe music that is intended to convey an impression (often of natural phenomena) rather than a dramatic or narrative idea incidental music Music composed as a background in a stage production interval The distance between two pitches, traditionally measured in terms of the steps in the diatonic scale jazz Music originated from African-American people characterization by improvisation, syncopation, and usually a regular or forceful rhythm jazz ballad A blues style built from a single verse of 16 bars ending on the dominant or half-cadence, followed by a refrain/chorus part of 16 or 32 bars in AABA form J pop Japanese popular music jazz rock The music of the 1960’s and 1970’s bands that inserted jazz elements in its rock music. A synonym for “jazz fusion,” jazz rock is a mix of funk and R & B rhythms K pop Korean popular music maracatu A form of Latin-American music that first surfaced in the African state of Pernambuco, combining the strong rhythms of African percussion instruments with Portuguese melodies. melody A succession of notes of varying pitch with a recognizable shape or tune meter Organization of beats into regular groups musique concre’te Music in which real (or “concrete”) sounds are electronically recorded neo-classical A term describing the music of some twentieth-century composers whose techniques draw on those of the Baroque and Classical periods note Symbol used to indicate pitch opera A drama set to music, with costumes and scenery to complement the musicians 318 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. opus The Latin word for “work” used with a number to identify a work in a composer’s output paso doble (meaning “double step”) A theatrical Spanish dance used in bullfights, where the music was played as the matador enters (paseo) and during passes just before the kill pitch Relative highness or lowness of a sound polyphony A texture in which two or more independent melodic lines are combined, as opposed to heterophony, homophony, monophony prelude A short instrumental work originally intended to precede another, but from the nineteenth century a short, self-contained piece usually for piano program music Instrumental music that is narrative or descriptive of some non-musical idea, often literary or pictorial progression A musically logical succession of chords ragtime An American popular musical style mainly for piano, originating in the red light districts of the Afro-American communities in St. Louis and New Orleans. Its style was said to be a modification of the “marching mode” made popular by John Philip Sousa, where the effect is generated by an internally syncopated melodic line pitted against a rhythmically straightforward bass line. reggae An urban popular music and dance style that originated in Jamaica in the mid 1960’s, containing an English text coupled with Creole expressions that were not so intelligible to the nonJamaican. rhythm The distribution of sounds into groups with a perceptible meter or pulse rock ballad It is an emotional love song with suggestions of folk music, as in the Beatles’ composition “The Ballad of John and Yoko” and Billy Joel’s “The Ballad of Billy.” This style is sometimes applied to strophic story-songs such as Don McLean’s “American Pie. rock and roll Popular song form in the United States during the late 1940’s to the 1950’s that combines Afro-American forms such as the blues, jump blues, jazz, and gospel music with the Western swing and country music. rumba A popular recreational dance of Afro-Cuban origin, performed in a complex duple meter pattern and tresillo, which is a dotted quaver – dotted quaver – dotted semiquaver rhythm. It is normally used as a ballroom dance scale A sequence of notes going upwards or downwards by step score The music-copy of a piece for several performers; hence full score, containing complete details of every participating voice and instrument serialism A method of composing using a series of tones (usually all 12 of the chromatic scale), or other musical elements, which are heard only in a particular order soprano 1 The highest female voice 2 A term used for an instrument of high range soul music was a popular music genre of the 1950’s and 1960’s. It originated in the United States. It combines elements of African-American gospel music, rhythm and blues, and often jazz sound Vibrations which are transmitted, usually through air, to the eardrum, which sends impulses to the ear that we hear spiritual Normally associated with a deeply religious person, it refers here to a Negro spiritual, a song form by African migrants to America who became enslaved by its white communities. staff The set of lines on and between which music is written standard It is a song of established popularity by virtue of its enduring and recurring power. subject A theme or a group of themes on which work is based suite An instrumental work in several movements, usually a set of dances, which in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries often took the form allemande-courante-sarabande-optional dance movements-gigue syncopation The stressing of beats of a meter that are normally unstressed synthesizer A machine that produces and alters sounds electronically 319 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. tablature A system of notation by symbols that represent the position of a performer’s fingers (e.g., on a guitar) rather than the tone to be played tango A Latin-American dance form whose name may have been of African origin meaning “African Dance” or from the Spanish word “taner” meaning to play (an instrument). tempo The speed of a piece of music tenor The highest normal male voice theme A musical idea on which a work is based, usually with a recognizable melody timbre Quality of sound that distinguishes one instrument or one voice from another time signature Two numbers, one above the other, appearing at the beginning of a staff, or the start of the piece, indicating the meter of a piece; the number above refers to the number of beats per measure, and the number below represents the note that gets one beat tonality The feeling of gravitational pull towards a particular tone, determined by the key of the music tone Sound that has a definite pitch or frequency tone-color The quality of the sound of a particular instrument or voice, or a combination of them triad A three-note “common” chord consisting of a fundamental tone with tones at the intervals of a 3rd and 5th above twelve-tone A term used to describe a technique of composition (serialism) in which all 12 notes of the chromatic scale are treated equally variation A varied (elaborated, embellished, etc.) version of a given theme or tune waltz A nineteenth-century dance in triple meter whole tone The interval of two semitones zarzuela A musical stage performance popularized in the Philippines during the Spanish period MUSIC PRONUNCIATION GUIDE Music Terms Pronunciation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. ah kuh-pel-uh; Italian ah kahp-pel-lah ahr-ee-uh; air-ee-uh; ahr-ee-uh; uh-rahy-uh uh-vahnt-gahrd; uh-vant-, av-ahnt-, ah-vahnt-; French a-vahn-gard bee-bop bos-uh noh-vuh kYn cháirtō chah-chah koo m-bee-uh; Spanish koom-byah ahn-sahmb; French ahn-sahn-bluh ey-tood, ey-tyood, ey-tood, ey-tyood;French ey-tyd jahyv marakatu French pronunciation: [myzik kɔ ̃.kʁ ɛ t] op-er-uh, op-ruh oh-puh s pah-soh doh-bley; Spanish pah-sawdaw-vle prel-yood, preyl-, prey-lood, preereg-ey sahl-suh; Spanish sahl-sah] sam-buh, sahmtang-goh tab-luh-cher, -choo r trahy-ad, -uh d a capella aria avant-garde bebop bossa nova concerto cha cha cumbia ensemble etude jive maracatu musique concre’te opera opus paso doble prelude reggae salsa samba tango tablature triad 320 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. Musicians’ Names Pronunciation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Claude [klôd), De·bus·sy [dèb byoo see] Schoen·berg [shúrn bùrg] Bar·tók [bar tàwk] Stra·vin·sky [strY vín skee] Pro·ko·fi·eff [prY káwfee ef] Pou·lenc [pol angk] Bern·stein [búrn steen] Stock·haus·en [stók howz’n] Claude Debussy Arnold Schoenberg Bela Bartok Igor Stravinsky Sergey Prokofieff Francis Poulenc Leonard Bernstein Karlheinz Stockhausen ARTS GLOSSARY abstractionism An artistic style in which the natural appearance of objects becomes unimportant, and images are reduced to geometrical shapes, patterns, lines, angles, textures, and colors acrylic A fast-drying paint containing pigment suspension in acrylic polymer emulsion action painting A style of painting in which paint is spontaneously dribbled, splashed, or smeared on the canvas, rather than being carefully applied aesthetic Relating to or dealing with the beautiful; pleasing in appearance airbrush A device that is used to spray a liquid (such as paint) onto a surface android A mobile operating system (OS) developed for use on electronic devices such as a mobile phone or tablet; sometimes also used to refer to the device itself using such an OS animation The process of creating the illusion of motion or shape change by means of the rapid display of a sequence of static images that are minimally different from one another avant-garde Experimental or innovative, particularly in art and culture balance A principle of art having to do with visual equilibrium, or two parts or sides of an artwork having equal “visual weight” celluloid A colorless flammable material used to make photographic film cinematography The art of making motion pictures collage An artistic composition of materials and objects pasted over a surface, often with unifying lines and color composition An organization or arrangement imposed upon the elements within a work of art conceptual art Art that is intended to convey an idea or concept to the perceiver, and need not involve the creation or appreciation of a traditional art object such as a painting or sculpture contemporary art Art subjects, styles, and forms that are prevalent at the current time contrast The use of opposing elements, such as colors, forms, or lines, in proximity to produce an intensified effect in a work of art copywriter The creator of text, normally for use in advertising in magazines, brochures, posters cubism A style of art that stresses abstract structure at the expense of other pictorial elements, especially by displaying several aspects of the same object simultaneously and by fragmenting the form of depicted objects dadaism A movement in art and literature based on deliberate irrationality and negation of traditional artistic values dark room A room from which all light is excluded, so that photographs can be developed in it digital Referring to data (including images) that are created, stored, and transmitted through electronic means digital camera A camera that encodes images and videos through electronic means (rather than through traditional film) and stores them for later retrieval and use 321 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. digital single lens reflex (DSLR) camera A camera that combines the features of a traditional singlelens reflex camera with a digital imaging sensor, eliminating the use of film distortion / distorted The alteration of the original shape of something, such as an object or image documentary A film or TV program presenting the facts about a person or event dubbing The act or process of furnishing a film or tape with a new sound track or adding music, sound effects, etc. to an existing one embellishment Anything that adds design interest to a piece, usually in sewing, arts, and crafts entrepreneur A person who conceptualizes and develops a business expressionism A theory or practice in art of seeking to depict the subjective emotions and responses that objects and events arouse in the artist fauvism A movement in painting characterized by vivid colors, free treatment of form, and a resulting vibrant and decorative effect filter In photography, a device that partially or completely absorbs certain light rays fish eye A visual distortion, usually in a photographic image, created by a special lens resulting in a convex, hemisphere-shaped image focal Placed at or measured from a focus footage Film that has been shot foreground The part of a scene or picture that is nearest to and in front of the viewer form The element of art pertaining to the three dimensions (height, width, and depth) of art objects; or the appearance or illusion of these three dimensions, as in a painting futurism A movement in art, music, and literature begun in Italy about 1909 and marked especially by an effort to give formal expression to the dynamic energy and movement of mechanical processes genre A type, style, or category of art haute couture “High fashion” or the creation of exclusive custom-fitted clothing hue The property of color that distinguishes one color from another as red, green, violet, etc. impasto An art technique involving heavy application of paint to canvas, often with a spatula or knife instead of a paintbrush, and sometimes directly from the tubes of paint impressionism A school of late 19th century French painters who depicted the appearance of images by using strokes of unmixed colors to give the impression of the reflected light improvised Created or devised with the use of whatever is on hand installation art Art that is created, constructed, or installed on the site where it is exhibited, often incorporating materials or physical features on the site kinetic Relating to or exhibiting motion kinetoscope An early motion picture exhibition device, designed for viewing films by one individual at a time through a peephole viewer window in the top of the device landscape In art, the depiction of natural scenery such as mountains, valleys, forests, and rivers as the main subject of the artwork mechanical style An artistic movement in which figures and images were reduced to basic elements, such as planes, cones, spheres, cylinders, and other mechanical components; even human figures were mere outlines without expression mime The art or technique of portraying a character, mood, idea, or narration by gestures and bodily movements minimalism A style or technique (as in music, literature, or design) that is characterized by extreme spareness and simplicity 322 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. mixed media Varied artistic materials and processes used in combination in one artwork monochromatic Having only a single color montage In filmmaking, the process of editing the film footage monumental Huge, imposing, great mythical Referring to a creature, character, or place that is found in myths, legends, and fantasy stories neodadaism A minor movement chiefly of the 1960s reviving some of the objectives of dada but placing emphasis on the importance of the work of art produced rather than on the concept generating the work neoprimitivism An early 20th century art movement inspired by the native arts of Africa and the South Sea Islands neo-realism Any movement seeking to incorporate a modified form of realism, as in art, cinema, literature, or philosophy nickelodeon In the early 1900s, a motion-picture theater, variety show, etc. where admission was a nickel (five cents) nonobjectivism An artistic style that had no reference to recognizable objects; lines, shapes, and colors were used in a cool, impersonal approach that aimed for balance, unity, and stability op art “Optical art,” a style of abstractionism popular in the 1960s which made use of precisely planned and positioned lines, spaces, and colors to create the illusion of movement palette In art, a wooden board used for mixing colors for painting performance art A form of theatrical art featuring the activity of the artist and works presented in a variety of media perspective The art of picturing objects or a scene in such a way as to show them as they appear to the eye with reference to relative distance or depth photomontage A combination of several photographs joined together for artistic effect or to show more of the subject than can be shown in a single photograph pictograph A written or drawn symbol that conveys its meaning through its visual resemblance to a physical object pigment A dry insoluble substance, usually pulverized, which when suspended in a liquid becomes a paint, ink, etc. playwright A writer of plays; dramatist plotter A computer printer for printing vector graphics pop art A form of art that depicts objects or scenes from everyday life and employs techniques of commercial art and popular illustration proportion A principle of art having to do with the relative size and positions of components in an artwork; also called “scale” rhythm A principle of art resulting from the repetition of elements or components of an artwork in a specific pattern satire A genre of literature, visual art, and performing arts in which shortcomings, vices, and abuses of a certain segment of society are presented humorously in order to urge improvement shutter In photography, a device for opening and closing the lens of a camera to expose the film inside it to light slapstick comedy Broad comedy characterized by boisterous action snapshot A photograph, usually taken quickly and spontaneously social realism Art used to comment on or protest against social ills such as injustice, inequality, war, poverty, industrial hazards, environmental destruction, etc. stencil A sheet of material that has been perforated with a pattern; ink or paint can pass through the perforations to create the printed pattern on the surface below 323 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. still life A work of art in which ordinary household objects such as vases of flowers, plates, fruit, food, and the like are depicted as the main subject street theater The presentation of plays or other entertainment by traveling companies on the streets, in parks, etc. stucco A material made of lime, sand, and water used as a decorative coating for walls and ceilings surrealism A style of painting depicting strange subjects like those seen in dreams and fantasies symmetrical Having both sides of an object identical or very similar to one another, creating a sense of balance tablet A mobile computer with a touch screen display, circuitry, and battery in a single unit tactile Perceptible to the sense of touch; tangible texture An element of art having to do with the roughness or smoothness of an artwork’s surface three-dimensional Having three dimensions: length, width, and depth two-dimensional Having two dimensions: length and width unity A principle of art referring to the integration of all the components of an artwork to create a meaningful whole value An element of art referring to the lightness or darkness of a color variety A principle of art referring to the use of differences or modifications to create visual interest viewfinder A device on a camera that indicates, either optically or electronically, what will appear in the field of view of the lens virtual Existing in the mind or the imagination, or in electronic data form zarzuela A Philippine adaptation of the European opera, highly popular during the late 1800s to the early 1900s ARTS PRONUNCIATION GUIDE Artists’ Names Cezanne – say-ZAHN Delacroix – deh-lah-KRWAH Manet – mah-NAY Monet – moe-NAY Renoir – ruhn-WAR Van Gogh – van-GO Art Terms aesthetic - es·thet´ic celluloid - sel´lu·loyd cubism - kyu´bism fauvism - fov´ism genre - zhon´r montage - mon·täzh´ surrealism - sur·re´al·ism 324 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. MUSIC BIBLIOGRAPHY Books Abraham, Gerald. The Concise Oxford History of Music. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1990. Ainsley, Robert (ed). Classical Music. New York: Smithmark Publishers, 1995. Alberti, Luciano. Music of the Western World. New York: Crown Publishers, Inc. 1974. Bartok, Bela . Album of Selected Pieces for the Piano, Volumes I and II. Compiled and Arranged by Katherine K. Davis. Copyright by E. C. Schirmer Music Co., Boston,Massachusetts, USA. Bonis, Ferenc. Bela Bartok. Budapest: Kossuth Printing House, 1981. Burrows, John. (general editor). Classical Music. Introduction by Lady Solti. London: Dorling Kindersley Limited, 2005. Cultural Center of the Philippines. Encyclopedia of Music, Cultural Center of the Philippines Library. Souvenir programmes. Debussy, Claude. Preludes pour Piano. France: Durand et Cie, 1910.. Gershwin, George. Rhapsody in Blue. London, England: Chappel and Co., Ltd. Guevara, Amelita D and Sternberg, Kathy (co-ed). Pag-ibig Song Book. Manila: The Manila Symphony Society, 1986. Miller, Hugh M. Introduction to Music. New York: Barnes and Noble, Inc. 1971. Morgan, Robert P. Twentieth-Century Music: A History of Musical Style in Modern Europe and America. New York/London: W.W. Norton and Company, 1991. Prokofieff, Serge. 3 Concerto pour Piano, Op. 26. New York: Boosey and Hawkes, Inc., 1947. Randel, Don Michael (compiled). Harvard Concise Dictionary of Music. London, England: The Belknop Press of Harvard University Press, 2000. Rimm, Robert (introduction). Twentieth Century Piano Classics. New York: Dover Publications, Inc., 1999. Romualdez, Norberto (ed.). The Philippine Progressive Music Series. New York: Silver Burnett Company, 1950. Sadie, Stanley and Alison Lathan (eds.). The Cambridge Music Guide. New York: The Press Syndicate of the University of Cambridge, 1985. Salzman, Eric. Twentieth-Century Music: An Introduction. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1967. Siegmeister, Erie. Invitation to Music. New York: Harvey House, Inc., 1962. Schoenberg, Harold C. The Lives of the Great Composers. New York: W.W. Norton and Company, 1981. Slonimsky, Nicolas. The Concise Baker’s Biographical Dictionary of Musicians. New York: Schirmer Books, 1986. The Best of Broadway Songs Ever. Wisconsin: Hal Leonard Corporation. University of the Philippines College of Music Library. Online references www.everynote.com www.imlsp.com www.naxosmusiclibrary.com www.icking-music-archive.org www.filipinaslibrary.org.ph 325 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. ARTS BIBLIOGRAPHY Books Duldulao, Manuel D. Contemporary Philippine Art. Vera-Reyes, Inc. Quezon City, Philippines. 1972. Fleming, William. Arts and Ideas. Holt, Rinehart and Winston. New York. 1980. Gatbonton, Juan T., Jeannie E. Javelosa, Lourdes Ruth R. Roa, eds. Art Philippines. The Crucible Workshop. Pasig City, Philippines. 1992. Time-Life Library of Art. The World of Cezanne. Time Inc., U.S.A. 1971 Time-Life Library of Art. The World of Delacroix. Time Inc., U.S.A. 1971 Time-Life Library of Art. The World of Manet. Time Inc., U.S.A. 1972 Time-Life Library of Art. The World of Monet. Time Inc., U.S.A. 1972 Time-Life Library of Art. The World of Picasso. Time Inc., U.S.A. 1972 Time-Life Library of Art. The World of Van Gogh. Time Inc., U.S.A. 1971 Online references The Ateneo Art Gallery – http://www.ateneoartgallery.org/ The Center for Art and Thought – http://www.centerforartandthought.org/ Deviant Art – http://www.deviantart.com/browse/all/digitalart/ Yuchengco Museum – http://yuchengcomuseum.org/ Animation Council of the Philippines – http://www.animationcouncil.org/ Philippine Animation Studio Inc. – http://www.pasi.com.ph/flash/ Kenneth Cobonpue - www.kennethcobonpue.com/ Rajo Laurel – http://www.rajolaurel.com/ Monique Lhuillier – https://www.moniquelhuillier.com/ Josie Natori – http://www.natori.com/ Dita Sandico-Ong – http://dittachannel.com/intro/ Lulu Tan-Gan – http://www.tan-gan.com/ George Tapan – https://www.facebook.com/georgetapan John K. Chua – http://adphoto.com.ph/photographer_profile/id/2 Federation of Philippine Photographers Foundation (FPPF) – http://www.photoworldmanila.com/about-fppf/ Twine – http://twinery.org/ Stencyl – https://www.udemy.com/create-your-first-computer-game-with-stencyl/ GameMaker – https://www.yoyogames.com/learn http://www.instructables.com/id/How-To-Make-A-Pinhole-Camera/ http://www.digitalcamerareview.com/default.asp?newsID=5464&news=how+to+take+great+pictu res+with+your+point+and+shoot+camera http://digital-photography-school.com/megapost-learning-how-to-use-your-first-dslr/ http://www.wikihow.com/Use-Your-Digital-Camera%27s-ISO-Setting 326 All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office.